JP7309205B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of starting a second game state in which the acquisition condition is more likely to be established than in the first game state.

Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that acquires determination information used to determine whether a special game (for example, a jackpot game) wins or fails when an acquisition condition is satisfied, and determines the determination information when the determination condition is satisfied. In the gaming machine described above, there are cases where a first game state and a second game state in which the acquisition condition is more likely to be established than in the first game state are provided (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2000-300761

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to improve the amusement of the opportunity to start the second game state.

In order to solve the above problems, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes acquisition means for acquiring determination information when an acquisition condition is satisfied, and determining whether a special game is appropriate or not based on the determination information when the determination condition is satisfied. Determination means, symbol display means for variably displaying when a determination condition is established, and stop-displaying a symbol according to the result of determination, and special game execution means capable of executing a special game, when operating in the first mode, In the first game state, it is possible to determine the first mode as the operation mode of the movable accessory means, and in the second game state, operation mode determination means capable of determining the second mode as the operation mode of the movable role product means; role product control means for operating the movable role product means in the operation mode determined by the operation mode determination means upon establishment of the operating condition; A first start means capable of starting a second game state after the end of a special game, and a second game state can be started after the number of times determined as non-winning in the special game reaches a predetermined specific number of times. and a screen display means capable of displaying a screen corresponding to the effect mode composed of various effect images, and the average time length of the variable display when winning the special game is The second game state started by the second start means tends to be shorter than the second game state started by the first start means, and the second game state started by the first start means and the second start The advantage is different from the second game state started by the means, and the screen display means can be controlled to the first effect mode among the effect modes when the second game state is started by the first start means. When the second game state is started by the second starting means, it is possible to control to the second effect mode different from the first effect mode, and the power is turned off in the second game state started by the second starting means. It is characterized in that it can be controlled to the first effect mode when the power supply is restored after the occurrence.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to start the second game state after the number of determinations, which is the number of times that the special game is determined to have not been won, reaches a predetermined specific number of times. Therefore, compared to the configuration in which the second game state is not started at this opportunity, the interest of the opportunity to start the second game state is improved. In addition, according to the present invention, the average time length of the variable display when winning the special game is compared with the second game state started by the first starting means, the second game state started by the second starting means. It tends to be short in the game state. Therefore, in the second game state started by the second starting means, there is an advantage that the time until the symbols for starting the special game are stopped and displayed can be easily shortened.

According to the present invention, the interest of the opportunity to start the second game state is improved.

1 is a front view showing an example of a game machine; FIG. It is a perspective view showing an example of the back side of the gaming machine. It is a functional block diagram of the gaming machine. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining details of a base indicator; 3 is a functional block diagram of an image control board; FIG. It is the figure which showed an example of a big-hit determination table and a hit determination table. It is the figure which showed an example of the design determination table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a table scenario. FIG. 11 is another diagram for explaining an example of a table scenario; It is a figure for demonstrating the specific example of the fluctuation pattern determination table in each period. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining another specific example of a variation pattern determination table for each period; It is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern determination table for the non-time-saving gaming state. It is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern determination table for the time saving gaming state. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining specific examples of a stationary notification image and a remaining number of times image; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining display periods of a stationary notification image and a remaining number of times image; It is a figure for demonstrating the specific example of each screen at the time of the start of a 2nd time saving game state. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific example of each screen in a time saving game state. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of a display period of an image at the start; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining another specific example of the display period of the image at the start; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining details of update timing of numbers in the remaining count image; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of each screen when a power failure occurs; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining another specific example of each screen when power failure occurs; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a configuration for notifying an activated period; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of a display period of a left-handed image; It is a figure for demonstrating the structure which alert|reports that it can shift to a 2nd time saving game state. It is the figure which showed an example of the prior determination table. 4 is a flowchart of main processing by a main CPU; 7 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing by the main CPU; 4 is a flowchart of input control processing by a main CPU; 4 is a flow chart of a first starting port detection switch input process by a main CPU; 7 is a flowchart of pre-determination processing by the main CPU; It is a flowchart of special figure special electric control processing by main CPU. It is a flowchart of special symbol storage determination processing by the main CPU. It is a flowchart of special symbol stop time processing by the main CPU. 7 is a flow chart of processing of migration determination processing by the main CPU; It is a flow chart of the general figure general electric processing by main CPU. 4 is a flowchart of main processing by a sub CPU; 4 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing by a sub CPU; 4 is a flowchart of command analysis processing 1 by a sub CPU; 10 is a flowchart of command analysis processing 2 by a sub CPU; It is a flow chart of effect input control processing by the sub CPU. 4 is a flowchart of main processing by a host CPU; 4 is a flowchart of interrupt processing by a host CPU; It is the figure which showed an example of the fluctuation|variation production|presentation pattern determination table. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific example of the end production|presentation in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure for explaining a specific example of the execution timing of the end effect in the second embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the big-hit determination table and hit determination table in 2nd Embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the design determination table in 3rd Embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the variation pattern determination table for non-time-saving gaming states in 3rd Embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the variation pattern determination table for time saving gaming states in 3rd Embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the advance determination table in 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flowchart of pre-determination processing by a main CPU in the third embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart of special symbol stop time processing by the main CPU in the third embodiment. 14 is a flowchart of migration determination processing and the like by the main CPU in the third embodiment; FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of each screen in the third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of a limited period in the third embodiment; FIG. It is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the variation time of the normal symbol display device in the third embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining another specific example of the variation time of the regular pattern display device in the third embodiment; It is a diagram for explaining a specific example in which the time-saving gaming state in the third embodiment performs an overlapping operation. It is a diagram for explaining a specific example when the time saving gaming state in the third embodiment ends. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific example of each image displayed in the time saving game state in 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining specific examples of a right-handed start image and a left-handed start image in the third embodiment; FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of a result image in the third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of counting periods in the third embodiment; FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the 1st information and 2nd information in 4th Embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a display period of an image at the start in a modified example;

<First embodiment>
BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION The present invention will now be described in detail with reference to embodiments shown in the drawings.
<Composition of gaming machines>
1 is a front view showing an example of a gaming machine according to the present embodiment, FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing an example of the back side of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 3 is the present embodiment. It is a block diagram of a game machine.

As shown in FIG. 1, the gaming machine 1 has an outer frame 2 and an inner frame 3. As shown in FIG. The outer frame 2 is attached to the island structure of the game hall, and the inner frame 3 is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable. A glass frame 4 is attached to the inner frame 3 . Further, the inner frame 3 is mounted with a game board 10 having a board surface on which game balls are launched.

As shown in FIG. 1, a window 4a is formed in the glass frame 4, and a transparent plate 4b is attached to the window 4a. A game area 10a in which game balls can move (flow down) is formed between the board surface of the game board 10 and the transparent plate 4b on the front side thereof. The transparent plate 4 b is, for example, a glass plate, and is detachably fixed to the glass frame 4 .

The glass frame 4 is connected to the outer frame 2 via the hinge mechanism 5 at one end in the left-right direction (for example, the left side facing the game machine), and the other end in the left-right direction (for example, right side facing the game machine) can be rotated in a direction to release from the outer frame 2. Specifically, the glass frame 4 covers the game board 10 together with the glass plate 4b, and rotates like a door with the hinge mechanism 5 as a fulcrum, thereby opening the inner portion of the outer frame 2 including the game board 10. can.

A lock mechanism for fixing the other end side of the glass frame 4 to the outer frame 2 is provided on the other end side of the glass frame 4 (for example, the right side when facing the game machine). Fixation by the locking mechanism can be released with a special key. Further, the glass frame 4 is provided with a door open switch 136 (see FIG. 3) for detecting whether the glass frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 or not.

A plate unit 7 having a storage plate 6 (upper plate 6a and lower plate 6b) for storing game balls is provided in the lower portion of the glass frame 4 (the lower portion of the window 4a). In addition, the plate unit 7 includes a performance button 8 that can be pressed by the player, a cross key 40 that allows the player to perform various selection operations, and a game ball stored in the lower plate 6b to the outside of the game machine. A discharge button 9 for discharging is provided.

The effect button 8 is provided in the central portion of the plate unit 7 as shown in FIG. The effect button 8 of this embodiment is configured to be able to advance and retreat over a normal operating position, a depressed position retracted below the normal operating position, and a protruding operating position protruding upward above the normal operating position. be. In the specific example of FIG. 1, the production button 8 in the normal operation position is shown.

The effect button 8 is configured to be able to be pressed from any position including the normal operation position and the projecting operation position to the pressed position. In this specification, the detailed structure of the effect button 8 is disclosed, for example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-116168, so the description thereof is omitted.

Although the details will be described later, an operation effective period is provided during which the operation of the effect button 8 can be accepted (the operation of the effect button 8 is valid). The production button 8 is provided with a production button detection switch 8a (see FIG. 4), and when the production button detection switch 8a detects the player's operation, a predetermined production is executed.

The cross key 40 includes an up button, a down button, a left button and a right button. The cross key 40 is also provided with cross key detection switches (40a, 40b, 40c, 40d). The cross key detection switches (40a, 40b, 40c, 40d) include an upper button detection switch 40a for detecting operation of the upper button of the cross key 40, a lower button detection switch 40b for detecting operation of the lower button, and an operation of the left button. and a right button detection switch 40d (see FIG. 3) for detecting the operation of the right button.

As shown in FIG. 1 , an operating handle 11 is provided on the lower right side of the glass frame 4 . The operating handle 11 is provided with a touch sensor 11a (see FIG. 4). When the touch sensor 11 a detects that the player has touched the operating handle 11 , a touch signal is transmitted to the firing control board 160 .

The firing control board 160, upon receiving a touch signal from the touch sensor 11a, permits energization of the firing solenoid 12a. When the rotation angle of the operating handle 11 changes, the gear directly connected to the operating handle 11 rotates, and the knob of the firing volume 11b (see FIG. 3) connected to the gear rotates.

During the period in which the touch signal is received, a voltage corresponding to the detected angle of the shooting volume 11b is applied to the shooting solenoid 12a (see FIG. 3) provided in the game ball shooting mechanism. When a voltage is applied to the firing solenoid 12a, the firing solenoid 12a operates according to the applied voltage, and the game ball moves toward the game area 10a of the game board 10 with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the operation handle 11. fired.

As shown in FIG. 1, an outer rail R1 and an inner rail R2 are provided around the game board 10 (game area 10a). The outer rail R1 and the inner rail R2 described above guide the game ball shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the upper part of the game area 10a. The game ball guided to the upper part of the game area 10a falls within the game area 10a. A game area 10a is provided with a plurality of nails and windmills, and game balls fall unpredictably.

As shown in FIG. 1, a center member 12 is arranged substantially in the center of the game board 10 . The center member 12 is provided with an image display device 31 such as a liquid crystal display device and an effect movable body 32 . The effect movable body 32 can move to a retracted position and an appearing position, and normally stops at the retracted position. The specific example of FIG. 1 shows a case where the effect movable body 32 stops at the retracted position. The effect movable body 32 may overlap the image displayed by the image display device 31 when viewed from the front. Moreover, the effect|presentation movable body 32 is comprised including a light-emitting body. The effect movable body 32 emits light by the luminous body.

As shown in FIG. 1 , a first starting hole 13 into which a game ball can enter is provided in the center lower game area 10 a of the center member 12 . A second starting port 14 is provided below the first starting port 13 . When the game ball wins (enters) the above first starting port 13 or second starting port 14, the game is started.

The second starting port 14 is provided with an opening/closing door 14b. The opening/closing door 14b is movably controlled between a first mode in which the opening/closing door 14b is maintained in a closed state and a second mode in which the opening/closing door 14b is in an open state. According to the second starting port 14 described above, in the first mode, it is difficult for the game ball to win (including cases where it is substantially impossible), and in the second mode, it is easy for the game ball to win (the first starting port 13 is easier to win).

It should be noted that the second starting port 14 (opening/closing door 14b) of the present embodiment is configured such that a game ball cannot enter during the period when it is controlled in the first mode. However, if the game ball is easier to enter during the period during which the second starting port 14 is controlled in the first mode than in the period during which the second starting port 14 is controlled in the second mode, in the period during which the game ball is controlled in the first mode It is good also as a structure which can enter a game ball to the 2nd start opening 14. FIG.

A game ball that has won the first starting hole 13 is detected by the first starting hole detection switch 13a (see FIG. 3). Also, the game ball that has entered the second starting hole 14 is detected by the second starting hole detection switch 14a (see FIG. 3). When game balls are detected by the first start hole detection switch 13a, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls (prize balls) are paid out. Similarly, when game balls are detected by the second start hole detection switch 14a, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls (prize balls) are paid out.

In this embodiment, when game balls enter the first start port 13 and the second start port 14, three game balls are paid out in common, but the number of payouts is made different for each start port. may For example, the number of payouts for the first starting port 13 may be three, and the number of payouts for the second starting port 14 may be one.

When the first start hole detection switch 13a or the second start hole detection switch 14a detects a game ball, a lottery (hereinafter referred to as "big win lottery") for obtaining the right to execute a big win game, which will be described later, is executed. The jackpot game of this embodiment includes a long winning game and a short winning game. The long winning game consists of 10 rounds, and in each round, the big winning opening is opened for a time (for example, 30 seconds) during which the game ball can win. However, each round ends when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls enter the big winning hole. In addition, the short winning game is composed of two rounds, and in each round, the big winning opening is opened for the time during which the game ball can win. However, each round ends when a predetermined number of game balls enter the big winning opening. A predetermined time interval is provided between each round. In the small winning game, the big winning opening is opened over the time (for example, 1.8 seconds) during which the game ball can win.

As shown in FIG. 1, the game area 10a on the right side of the center member 12 is provided with a gate 15 through which game balls can pass. The gate 15 is provided with a gate detection switch 15a (see FIG. 3) for detecting the passage of a game ball. When the gate detection switch 15a detects the passage of a game ball, a normal symbol lottery, which will be described later, is executed.

A game area 10a on the right side of the center member 12 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a "right area") is provided with a first big winning hole 16 and a second big winning hole 17 into which game balls can enter. A game ball can enter the above right region when the operation handle 11 is rotated by a greater angle than a predetermined angle (so-called "right hitting"). On the other hand, when the operation handle 11 is rotated smaller than the angle (so-called "left hitting"), the game ball does not enter the right area. That is, in the first big winning hole 16 and the second big winning hole 17 provided in the right side area, the game ball can win when the game is played with the right hand, and the game ball can win when the game is played with the left hand. Configured so as not to win prizes.

In this embodiment, when a game is played with a left hand, a game ball can enter the first starting hole 13, but it is difficult (including a case where it is substantially impossible) to enter a game ball into the second starting hole 14. configuration is adopted. In addition, when the game is played with the right hand, the game ball can enter the second starting hole 14, but the first starting hole 13 adopts a configuration in which it is difficult for the game ball to win (including cases where it is substantially impossible). be done.

The first big prize winning port 16 is normally kept closed by the opening/closing door 16b, and winning of game balls is impossible. On the other hand, in the jackpot game, the opening/closing door 16b is opened, and the opening/closing door 16b functions as a tray for guiding the game ball into the first big prize winning port 16, so that the game ball can win the first big prize winning port 16.例文帳に追加. A first big winning hole detection switch 16a is provided in the first big winning hole 16, and when the first big winning hole detection switch 16a detects a game ball, a preset number (for example, 15) of prize balls are paid out. be done.

The second big winning hole 17 is normally kept closed by the movable piece 17b, and the winning of game balls is impossible. On the other hand, in the jackpot game, the movable piece 17b operates to open the second big winning hole 17, and the movable piece 17b functions as a guide path for guiding the game ball into the second big winning hole 17, and the game ball is released. A ball can be entered into the second big winning hole 17.例文帳に追加A second big winning hole detection switch 17a is provided in the second big winning hole 17, and when the second big winning hole detection switch 17a detects the entry of a game ball, a preset number (for example, 15) of prizes A ball is paid out.

As shown in FIG. 1, a plurality of general prize winning openings 18 are provided in the game area 10a. When a game ball wins in each of the above general winning holes 18, predetermined prize balls (for example, 10 game balls) are paid out. Also, at the bottom of the game area 10a, the ball did not enter any of the general winning opening 18, the first starting opening 13, the second starting opening 14, the first big winning opening 16 and the second big winning opening 17. An out port 19 is provided for discharging game balls.

The image display device 31 displays various images under the control of an effect control board 120 (image control board 150), which will be described later. For example, a demonstration moving image is displayed on the image display device 31 during a non-game period in which no game is played. In addition, the image display device 31 variably displays three performance symbols GA (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol) for notifying the lottery result of the big win during the game period during which the game is executed. The effect symbol GA is scroll-displayed (variable display) from the upper side to the lower side of the image display device 31, then displayed (temporarily stopped) so as to oscillate within the image display device 31, and is stopped by a symbol confirmation command. Is displayed.

In this embodiment, a combination of specific performance symbols GA (for example, 777, etc.) is stop-displayed to notify that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. In addition, by stop-displaying a combination (for example, 289, etc.) other than the specific effect symbol 38, it is informed that the result of the big win lottery is a loss.

In addition, the image display device 31 displays the fourth pattern separately from the production pattern GA. The fourth symbol is an image showing the fluctuation state of the performance symbol GA used for notification of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery. However, a display lamp may be separately provided to indicate the changing state of the effect symbol GA, and the fourth symbol may not be displayed on the image display device 31 .

As shown in FIG. 1, a pair of left and right performance lamps 33 are provided above the glass frame 4 . Each of the performance lamps 33 has a plurality of lights, and the lighting direction and emission color of the lights are changed according to each performance.

The gaming machine 1 is provided with an audio output device 34 (see FIG. 4) composed of a speaker (not shown). The audio output device 34 outputs various sounds including BGM (background music) and SE (sound effects). For example, the audio output device 34 outputs BGM according to the image displayed on the image display device 31 .

As shown in FIG. 1, a main display 28 is provided below the left side of the game area 10a. The main display 28 described above is controlled by a main control board 110 which will be described later. The main display device 28 includes a first special symbol display device 20, a second special symbol display device 21, a normal symbol display device 22, a first special symbol reservation display device 23, a second special symbol reservation display device 24, and a normal symbol display device. A pending indicator 25 and a round number indicator 26 are included.

The first special symbol display device 20 notifies the result of the jackpot lottery when the game ball enters the first starting port 13, and is composed of a plurality of LEDs. Specifically, a plurality of special symbols corresponding to the result of the big win lottery are provided, and by displaying the special symbols (lighting mode) corresponding to the result of the big win lottery on the first special symbol display device 20, the result of the lottery is the game. person is notified. The above special symbols are stop-displayed after being variably displayed (blinking) for a predetermined time.

The second special symbol display device 21 is for notifying the result of the jackpot lottery when the game ball enters the second starting port 14, and is composed of a plurality of LEDs (the first special symbol display device 21). Specifically, a plurality of special symbols corresponding to the result of the big win lottery are provided, and by displaying the special symbols (lighting mode) corresponding to the result of the big win lottery on the second special symbol display device 21, the result of the lottery is the game. person is notified. As with the special symbols of the first special symbol display device 20, the special symbols of the second special symbol display device 21 are stopped and displayed after being variably displayed (blinking) for a predetermined period of time.

The normal symbol display device 22 notifies the lottery result of the normal symbol executed when the game ball passes through the gate 15.例文帳に追加Although it will be described later in detail, when winning a normal symbol lottery (hereinafter "normal lottery"), the normal symbol display device 22 lights up, and then the second start port 14 is controlled in the second mode for a predetermined time. be. The above-described normal symbol display device 22 is displayed (blinks) for a predetermined period of time when the game ball passes through the gate 15, and then stopped.

When a game ball enters the first start port 13 or the second start port 14 during the variable display of special symbols or during the big win game, and the big win lottery cannot be performed immediately, the right of the big win lottery is reserved under certain conditions. be done. For example, the right of a jackpot lottery that is reserved when a game ball enters the first start port 13 is reserved as a first reserve, and the right of a jackpot lottery that is reserved when a game ball enters the second start port 14. is reserved as a second reservation.

The first special symbol reservation display 23 displays the current value of the number of first reservations. The first reservation in this embodiment is reserved with an upper limit of four. In addition, the second special symbol reservation display 24 displays the current value of the number of second reservations. The 2nd reservation of this embodiment is reserved with four as the upper limit, similarly to the 1st reservation. Also, in this embodiment, when both the first hold and the second hold are stored, the second hold is preferentially consumed. That is, the second special symbol display device 21 is prioritized over the first special symbol display device 20 and is variably displayed.

If normal pattern lottery cannot be performed immediately during the variable display of the normal pattern or during the period when the second start port 14 (opening door 14b) is in the second mode (open), the right of the normal pattern lottery is reserved. The upper limit reserved number of the normal pattern lottery is set to 4, and the reserved number of the normal pattern lottery is displayed on the normal pattern reservation display 25.例文帳に追加It should be noted that the normal drawing lottery is also executed in the jackpot game (non-time-saving game state). The number-of-rounds indicator 26 is for notifying the number of rounds of a round game performed during a big hit (special game).

As shown in FIG. 2, a main control board 110, an effect control board 120, a payout control board 130, a power supply board 170 and a game information output terminal board 27 are provided on the back side of the gaming machine 1. FIG. The power board 170 is provided with a power plug 171 and a power switch (not shown) for supplying power to the gaming machine.

<Configuration of game control device>
FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a game control device that controls the progress of a game in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 3, the gaming machine 1 includes a lamp control board 140, an image control board 150 and a launch control board 160 in addition to the above-described main control board 110, effect control board 120, payout control board 130 and power supply board 170. do.

The main control board 110 controls the basic operations of the game. As shown in FIG. 3, the main control board 110 includes at least a one-chip microcomputer composed of a main CPU 111, a main ROM 112, and a main RAM 113, and an input port and an output port (not shown) for main control.

The main CPU 111 reads a program stored in the main ROM 112 based on an input signal from each detection switch (the first starting port detection switch 13a, etc.) and performs arithmetic processing. Various commands are transmitted from the output port to other boards according to the results of the above arithmetic processing. The main CPU 111 also controls each display including the main display 28 described above. The main RAM 113 functions as a data work area during arithmetic processing of the main CPU 111 .

As shown in FIG. 3, on the input side of the main control board 110, there are a first start hole detection switch 13a, a second start hole detection switch 14a, a gate detection switch 15a, a first big prize hole detection switch 16a, and a second big prize. The mouth detection switch 17a, the general prize winning mouth detection switch 18a and the out ball detection switch 19a are connected, and game ball detection signals are input from the above detection switches.

For example, a game ball that has entered the first big winning hole 16 is detected by the first big winning hole detection switch 16a. Also, the game ball detected by the first big winning hole detection switch 16a is then detected by the out ball detection switch 19a. Similarly, the game ball that has entered the second big winning hole 17 is detected by the second big winning hole detection switch 17a, and then detected by the out ball detection switch 19a. A game ball that has entered the general winning hole 18 is detected by a general winning hole detection switch 18a, and then detected by an out ball detection switch 19a. In the above configuration, the game ball hit into the game area 10a is finally detected by the out ball detection switch 19a. Hereinafter, the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 19a may be referred to as "out number".

As shown in FIG. 3, the main control board 110 receives a signal from the clear switch 30a. Specifically, the gaming machine 1 is provided with a clear button 30 (not shown). The clear switch 30a outputs an ON signal to the main control board 110 while the clear button 30 is operated (pressed). Also, the clear switch 30a outputs an OFF signal to the main control board 110 while the clear button 30 is not operated.

The above clear button 30 cannot be operated when the inner frame 3 is closed. That is, the clear button 30 is provided at a position where the player cannot operate it. For example, the administrator of the gaming machine 1 operates the clear button 30 . When the gaming machine 1 is powered on with the clear button 30 being operated, various information in the main RAM 113 is initialized.

The main control board 110 includes a starting opening opening/closing solenoid that opens and closes the opening/closing door 14b of the second starting opening 14, a first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid that opens and closes the opening/closing door 16b of the first big winning opening 16, and a second big winning opening/closing solenoid. A second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid for opening and closing the movable piece 17b of the winning opening 17 is connected.

The main control board 110 includes a first special symbol display device 20, a second special symbol display device 21, a normal symbol display device 22, a first special symbol reservation display 23, a second special symbol reservation display 24, and a normal symbol reservation. A display 25 and a round number display 26 are connected. The main control board 110 outputs to the game information output terminal board 27 an external information signal necessary for managing the game machine in a hall computer or the like of the game parlor.

As shown in FIG. 3, the right-handed lamp 28 is connected to the main control board 110 . The right-handed lamp 28 is turned on during a period when it is more advantageous to play with the right hand than with the left hand, and is turned off during the period when it is more advantageous to play with the left hand than with the right hand. For example, the right hitting lamp 28 lights up in the time saving game state, the big hit game and the small hit game. In the above configuration, when the right-handed lamp 28 lights up, the player plays right-handed. Therefore, it can be said that the right-handed lamp 28 is means for instructing the operation mode (left-handed, right-handed) of the operation handle 11 .

The main ROM 112 stores a program for game control, which will be described later, and data necessary for various games. Also, the main RAM 113 has a plurality of storage areas. For example, the main RAM 113 has a normal symbol reserved number (G) storage area, a normal symbol reserved storage area, a first special symbol reserved number (U1) storage area, a second special symbol reserved number (U2) storage area, and a judgment storage area. , 1st special symbol storage area, 2nd special symbol storage area, high probability game number (X) storage area, round game number (R) storage area, release number (K) storage area, game state storage area, game state buffer , a stop pattern data storage area, an effect transmission data storage area, and the like are provided. The game state storage area includes a time saving game flag storage area, a high probability game flag storage area, a special figure special electric processing data storage area, and a general figure normal electric processing data storage area. Note that the storage areas described above are merely examples, and many other storage areas are provided.

The game information output terminal board 27 is a board for outputting an external information signal generated by the main control board 110 to a hall computer or the like of the game parlor. The game information output terminal board 27 is wire-connected to the main control board 110, and is provided with a connector for connection to a hall computer or the like of the game parlor. A magnetic sensor for detecting illegal magnetism is also connected to the main control board 110 .

As shown in FIG. 3, the main control board 110 is provided with a base display 114 . The base display 114 of this embodiment displays a base value, which will be described later. The base display 114 includes four segment displays (see FIG. 4 described later) and is directly mounted on the main control board 110 .

The power board 170 converts the power supply voltage supplied from the power plug 171 into a predetermined voltage and supplies it to each control board. Also, the power board 170 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the game machine, and outputs a power interruption detection signal to the main control board 110 when the power supply voltage becomes equal to or less than a predetermined value. Specifically, when the power failure detection signal becomes high level, the main CPU 111 becomes operable, and when the power failure detection signal becomes low level, the main CPU 111 becomes inoperative.

In this embodiment, the power supply substrate 170 is provided with a backup power supply composed of a capacitor. With the backup power supply described above, the data stored in the main RAM 113 is maintained even when the operation is stopped. Note that the backup power supply is not limited to a capacitor, and may be, for example, a battery. Also, a capacitor and a battery may be used in combination.

The production control board 120 controls each production. As shown in FIG. 3 , the effect control board 120 has a sub CPU 121 , a sub ROM 122 , a sub RAM 123 and an RTC (real time clock) 124 . The effect control board 120 described above is connected to the main control board 110 so as to be communicable in one direction.

The sub CPU 121 reads out the program stored in the sub ROM 122 based on the command transmitted from the main control board 110 or the input signal from the effect button detection switch 8a input via the lamp control board 140 and performs calculation. Execute the process. Further, the sub CPU 121 transmits corresponding data to the lamp control board 140 or the image control board 150 based on the arithmetic processing described above. The sub-RAM 123 functions as a data work area during arithmetic processing of the sub-CPU 121 .

The sub ROM 122 stores a program for effect control and data necessary for various games. For example, a variable performance pattern determination table for determining the performance pattern based on the variation pattern designation command received from the main control board 110, and a performance symbol pattern determination table (not shown) for determining the combination of the performance symbols GA to be stopped and displayed. ) are stored in the sub ROM 122 . The sub-ROM 122 also stores many other tables and programs (not shown).

The sub-RAM 123 has multiple storage areas. Specifically, the sub RAM 123 includes a command reception buffer, a game state storage area, an effect mode storage area, an effect pattern storage area, an effect pattern storage area, a determination storage area (0th storage area), a first reservation storage area, A second reserved storage area or the like is provided.

RTC 124 outputs the current time. The RTC 124 of the present embodiment operates by the power supply during the period when power is supplied to the gaming machine from the outside. On the other hand, during a period in which power is not supplied to the gaming machine from the outside, the game machine operates with a backup power supply mounted on the power supply board 170 . The RTC 124 described above can clock the current date and time even during a period when power is not supplied to the gaming machine from the outside.

A date signal indicating the current date and a time signal indicating the current time are received from the RTC 124 by the sub CPU 121, and various processes are executed according to the current date and time. In addition, a battery may be provided in the performance control board 120, and the RTC 124 may be configured to operate with the battery.

The payout control board 130 executes game ball launch control and prize ball payout control. As shown in FIG. 3, the payout control board 130 includes a payout CPU 131, a payout ROM 132 and a payout RAM 133, and is connected to the main control board 110 so as to be bidirectionally communicable. Signals from a payout ball counting switch 135, a door opening switch 136, a plate full detection switch 51, and a ball clogging detection switch 52 are input to the payout control board .

The payout ball counting switch 135 is a switch for detecting whether game balls have been paid out. The plate full detection switch 51 is a switch for detecting that the game ball storage plate (lower plate) is full. Further, the ball clogging detection switch 52 is a switch for detecting clogging of the game balls in the path along which the game balls to be paid out move, for example.

The payout CPU 131 reads out the program stored in the payout ROM 132 based on the input signals from the various switches described above, performs arithmetic processing, and transmits data according to the result of the arithmetic processing to the main control board 110. .

As shown in FIG. 3, the output side of the payout control board 130 is connected with a payout motor 134 of a prize ball payout device for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls from the game ball storage section to the player. The payout CPU 131 controls the payout motor 134 of the prize ball payout device based on the payout number designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 to pay out predetermined prize balls to the player. The payout RAM 133 functions as a work area for data during the arithmetic processing of the payout CPU 131 .

In this embodiment, whether or not a game ball lending device (card unit) (not shown) is connected to the payout control board 130 is monitored. If the game ball lending device is connected to the payout control board 130, the shooting control board 160 is permitted to shoot the game ball. On the other hand, if the game ball lending device is not connected to the payout control board 130, the shooting control board 160 is prohibited from shooting game balls.

The firing control board 160 permits firing when receiving the firing control data from the payout control board 130 . Then, the touch signal from the touch sensor 11a and the input signal from the shooting volume 11b are read, and the firing solenoid 12a and the ball feeding solenoid 12b are energized and controlled to shoot the game ball.

The firing solenoid 12a is composed of a rotary solenoid. A hitting member (not shown) is directly connected to the firing solenoid 12a, and the firing member rotates as the firing solenoid 12a rotates. One game ball is shot for each rotation of the shooting solenoid.

The rotational speed of the firing solenoid 12a is set to about 99.9 (times/minute) from the frequency based on the output period of the crystal oscillator provided on the firing control board 160. FIG. With the above configuration, the number of game balls launched in one minute is about 99.9 (pieces/minute). That is, game balls are shot approximately every 0.6 seconds. The ball feed solenoid 12b is composed of a linear solenoid, and feeds the game balls on the upper tray 6a (see FIG. 1) one by one toward the hitting member directly connected to the firing solenoid 12a.

The lamp control board 140 is connected to the effect control board 120 so as to be capable of two-way communication. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the input side of the lamp control board 140 is connected to the production button detection switch 8a and the cross key detection switches (40a, 40b, 40c, 40d). A detection signal from each detection switch described above is input to the effect control board 120 via the lamp control board 140 .

Also, the lamp control board 140 is connected to the effect movable bodies 32 and the effect lamps 33 provided on the game board 10 . The lamp control board 140, based on the data transmitted from the production control board 120, performs lighting control of the production lamp 33 and driving control of the motor for changing the irradiation direction of light. In addition, the driving source such as a solenoid or a motor for operating the effect movable body 32 is energized and controlled. In this embodiment, the effect button 8 is configured to protrude, so the effect movable body 32 includes the effect button 8 .

The image control board 150 is connected to the effect control board 120 so as to be capable of two-way communication, and the output side of the image control board 150 is connected to the image display device 31 and the audio output device 34 .

<Base display>
FIGS. 4A to 4C are diagrams for explaining the control of the base indicator 114 in this embodiment. Although the details will be described later, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment shifts to each gaming state including the low probability non-time-saving gaming state. The base display 114 displays the base value B in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state. The base value B of a specific section is calculated by dividing the total number of prize balls paid out in the section by the number of outs (total number of game balls hit).

FIG. 4A is a diagram for explaining various counters (a prize ball counter for base calculation, an out counter for base calculation, and a total out counter) used for display control of the base indicator 114. FIG. Each counter described above is provided in the main RAM 113, for example.

The prize ball counter for base calculation counts the prize balls in a specific section. Specifically, when the game ball wins the general winning hole 18, the numerical value "10" is added to the prize ball counter for base calculation. Also, when the game ball wins the first big winning hole 16 or the second big winning hole 17, the numerical value "15" is added to the base calculation winning ball counter. Similarly, when the game ball wins the first starting hole 13 or the second starting hole 14, the numerical value "3" is added to the prize ball counter for base calculation. Also, the base calculation out counter counts the number of outs in a specific section. Specifically, each time a game ball is detected by the out-ball detection switch 19a, the numerical value "1" is added to the base calculation out counter.

The main CPU 111 calculates the base value B of the specific section by multiplying the result of dividing the value of the base calculation prize ball counter by the value of the base calculation out counter by the value “100”. However, the out counter for base calculation and the prize ball counter for base calculation are not added except in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state. In the above configuration, the base value B in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state is calculated in the specific section. In this embodiment, the period during which the base calculation out counter and the base calculation prize ball counter are added may be referred to as the "counting period", and the period other than the counting period may be referred to as the "non-counting period". .

The main CPU 111 memorizes (saves) the base value B of the predetermined interval each time the interval ends. In this embodiment, the base value B is saved each time 60000 outs are counted. Specifically, the total out counter counts the number of outs (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "total number of outs") from when the power is first turned on until the present. The main CPU 111 calculates and stores a base value B from the current values of the base calculation winning ball counter and the base calculation out counter each time the number "60000" is added to the total out counter. Also, each time the numerical value "60000" is added to the total out counter, the base calculation winning ball counter and the base calculation out counter are initialized.

FIG. 4B is a diagram for explaining the base value B displayed on the base display 114. As shown in FIG. In the specific example of FIG. 4(b), 60000 outs are counted in section 3, then 60000 outs are counted in section 2, 60000 outs are counted in section 1, and section L is started. The number of outs in section L is less than 60000 (0 to 59999). Also, the base value B in section 3 is "B3", the base value B in section 2 is "B2", the base value B in section 1 is "B1", and the base value B in section L is "BL ” is assumed.

In the above specific example, in the interval L, the base value BL of the interval L (real time), the base value B1 of the interval 1 (the previous interval), the base value B2 of the interval 2 (the interval two times before), and the interval A base value B3 of 3 (three times before) is displayed on the base display 114 . Specifically, the base display 114 switches and displays the four base values B in the order of base value BL, base value B1, base value B2, and base value B3. The base value B for each section is switched and displayed, for example, every five seconds. In this embodiment, the base value B is continuously displayed on the base display 114 including the period during which the game can be played.

When one interval ends (when 60000 outs are counted), the base value B of that interval is saved as the base value B of the previous interval, and the base value B of the oldest interval is discarded. . For example, in the specific example of FIG. 4B, when the number of outs in section L reaches 60000, the base value BL of section L is stored as the base value B1 of section 1, and the base value B1 of section 1 is stored as the base value B1 of section 2. , the base value B2 of interval 2 is stored as the base value B3 of interval 3, and the base value 3 of the oldest interval 3 is discarded.

FIG. 4C is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the base display 114. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 4(c), the base display 114 includes a first display section 114x and a second display section 114y. The second display section 114y is composed of two seven-segment displays and displays the base value B. FIG. The second display unit 114y described above can display the numbers "00" to "99". If the base value is greater than the numerical value "100", "99." is displayed on the second display portion 114y (the dot display portion lights up).

As described above, the base display 114 switches the base value B of each section in the order of section L, section 1, section 2, and section 3 every about five seconds and displays it on the second display unit 114y. The first display section 114x displays identification information (bL, b1, b2, b3) that enables identification of which interval of the base value B is displayed on the second display section 114y.

For example, in the specific example of FIG. 4B described above, the identification information "bL" is displayed on the first display section 114x during the period in which the base value BL of the section L is displayed. Further, the identification information "b1" is displayed on the first display unit 114x during the period when the base value B1 of the section 1 is displayed, and the identification information "b2" is displayed on the first display unit 114x during the period when the base value B2 of the section 2 is displayed. The identification information “b3” is displayed on the first display portion 114x during the period in which the base value B3 of the section 3 is displayed on the first display portion 114x.

However, if the total number of outs is less than 60000, the base value to be displayed on the second display section 114y cannot be calculated during the period in which the identification information "b1" is displayed on the first display section 114x. Similarly, when the total number of outs is less than 60000, the base value indicated by the identification information "b2" and the base value indicated by the identification information "b3" cannot be calculated. Considering the above circumstances, when the total number of outs is less than 60000, each piece of identification information is displayed blinking during the period in which the identification information "b1" to the identification information "b3" are displayed on the first display unit 114x. , the special symbol “--” is illuminated on the second display section 114y.

When the total number of outs is 60000 or more but less than 120000, the base value B1 indicated by the identification information "b1" is calculated, but the base value B2 indicated by the identification information "b2" and the identification information "b3" are indicated. The base value B3 to be used cannot be calculated. Considering the above circumstances, when the total number of outs is 60000 or more and less than 120000, during the period when the identification information "b1" is displayed on the first display unit 114x, the identification information is lit and displayed and the base value During the period in which B1 is lit and the identification information "b2" or the identification information "b3" is displayed, each piece of identification information is displayed blinking, and the special symbol "--" is lit on the second display portion 114y.

Similarly, when the total number of outs is 120000 or more and less than 180000, the base value B1 indicated by the identification information "b1" and the base value B2 indicated by the identification information "b2" are calculated. cannot be calculated. Considering the above circumstances, when the total number of outs is 120000 or more and less than 180000, the identification information "b1" or the identification information "b2" is displayed on the first display unit 114x. During the period in which the base values (B1, B2) are lit and displayed, and the identification information "b3" is displayed, the identification information is blinked and the special symbol "--" is displayed on the second display portion 114y. Lights up.

As described above, in this embodiment, the real-time base value BL is displayed during the period in which the identification information "bL" is displayed. However, in the specific example of FIG. 4B, for example, when the number of normal outs in section L is not sufficiently large, it is difficult to calculate an accurate (original) base value B. In consideration of the above circumstances, it is preferable to have a configuration in which whether or not the number of normal outs in section L is sufficiently large is notified. According to the above configuration, there is an advantage that the administrator of the gaming machine 1 can evaluate the base value BL after considering whether or not the number of normal outs is sufficient.

Specifically, in this embodiment, when the number of normal outs in section L is less than 6000, the identification information "bL" is displayed blinking, and when the number of normal outs in section L is 6000 or more, the identification information "bL ” has been adopted. With the above configuration, whether or not the number of normal outs in section L is sufficiently large is substantially notified, and the above-described advantages can be obtained.

By the way, the operation of the gaming machine 1 is usually checked before the player actually plays the game. The above operation confirmation includes confirmation of whether the detection switches (13a, 14a, 16a, 17a, 18a, 19a) normally detect the game ball. Therefore, in a configuration in which the base calculation prize ball counter and the base calculation out counter are incremented immediately after the gaming machine 1 is first powered on, calculation is performed immediately after the gaming machine 1 is first powered on. The calculated base value is assumed to be different from the base value B calculated when the game is actually played.

In consideration of the above circumstances, in the present embodiment, the base calculation winning ball counter and the base calculation out counter are not added until the total out counter reaches a predetermined numerical value (for example, the numerical value "300"). adopted. According to the above configuration, the above inconvenience is suppressed.

<Setting change switch>
As shown in FIG. 3, the main control board 110 is provided with a setting change switch 115a. The setting change switch 115a is turned ON when the setting key device 115 (not shown) is rotated to a specific position, and turned OFF when the setting key device 115 is rotated to a position other than the specific position. Any one of a plurality of types (for example, six types) of set values with different payout rates can be set in the gaming machine 1 . Specifically, when the setting key device 115 is rotated to a specific position and the clear button 30 is pressed, when the game machine 1 is powered on, a setting change process, which will be described later, is executed. Shifts to a mode in which values can be changed (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "setting change mode"). When the setting change mode is entered, the current setting values stored (set) in the main RAM 113 are displayed on the base display 114 . In the setting change mode, the setting values displayed on the base display 114 are switched in the order of "...1→2→3→4→5→6→1..." each time the clear button 30 is pressed. . When the setting change switch 115a is turned off in the setting change mode, the setting value displayed on the base display 114 is stored (set) in the main RAM 113, and the setting change mode ends.

In the setting change process, various information stored in the main RAM 113 is initialized. For example, the remaining number of times N indicating the remaining number of games until the second time-saving gaming state, which will be described later, is initialized to the initial value (in the case of the present embodiment, the numerical value "800"). It should be noted that the remaining number of times N is also initialized in the processing at the time of clear operation, which will be described later. The clear operation process is executed when the power is turned on while the clear button 30 is pressed.

<Configuration of image control board>
FIG. 5 is a functional block diagram of the image control board 150. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 5, the image control board 150 includes a host CPU 151, a host RAM 152, a host ROM 153, a CGROM 154, a crystal oscillator 155, a VRAM 156 and a VDP (Video Display Processor) 200 for controlling image display of the image display device 31. Configured.

The host CPU 151 instructs the VDP 200 to display various images on the image display device 31 based on a later-described effect pattern designation command received from the effect control board 120 . The above instructions are executed by setting data in the control register 201 of the VDP 200 and outputting a display list composed of drawing control commands.

The VDP 200 transmits a V blank interrupt signal and a drawing end signal to the host CPU 151 . Upon receipt of each of the above signals, the host CPU 151 appropriately executes interrupt processing. The image data of the image displayed on the image display device 31 is stored in the CGROM 154 .

The host CPU 151 instructs the VDP 200 to output a predetermined sound to the audio output device 34 based on the effect pattern designation command received from the effect control board 120 . The host RAM 152 is built in the host CPU 151 and functions as a work area for data generated by arithmetic processing of the host CPU 151 . The host RAM 152 also temporarily stores data read from the host ROM 153 .

The host ROM 153 is composed of a mask ROM and stores programs for control processing of the host CPU 151 . The host ROM 153 also contains pattern arrangement information that associates the pattern numbers of the performance symbols with the types of the performance symbols GA, a display list generation program for generating a display list, animation patterns for displaying animation of the performance patterns, Stores animation scene information.

The animation pattern is referred to when the animation of the production pattern is displayed, and the combination of animation scene information included in the production pattern, the display order of each animation scene information, and the like are specified. The animation scene information includes information such as wait frame (display time), target data (sprite identification number, transfer source address, etc.), parameters (sprite display position, transfer destination address, etc.), drawing method, etc. be

The CGROM 154 is composed of flash memory, EEPROM, EPROM, mask ROM, etc., and stores compressed image data (sprite, movie), etc., which is a collection of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (eg, 32×32 pixels). . A combination of color number information specifying the color number of each pixel and an α value indicating transparency is specified from the pixel information.

The CGROM 154 also stores palette data in which display color information and color number information used when actually displaying colors are associated with each other without being compressed. Note that the CGROM 154 may be configured to compress and store only part of the image data. As a movie compression method, various known compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used. Also, the CGROM 154 stores various audio data.

Crystal oscillator 155 outputs a pulse signal to VDP 200 . A clock generation circuit 205 of the VDP 200 divides the pulse signal from the crystal oscillator 155 to generate a system clock for control by the VDP 200 and a synchronization signal for synchronizing with the image display device 31 .

The VRAM 156 is a storage device in which image data can be written and read, and is composed of an SRAM, for example. Palette data, for example, is stored in the VRAM 156 described above.

The VRAM 156 also includes a display list storage area 156a for temporarily storing a display list output from the host CPU 151, a development storage area 156b for storing image data decompressed by the decompression circuit 206, and an image drawing or display area. A first frame buffer 156c and a second frame buffer 156d are provided for this purpose. The two frame buffers 156c and 156d are alternately switched between a "drawing frame buffer" and a "display frame buffer" each time drawing is started.

The VDP 200 is a so-called image processor, and reads image data from a frame buffer (frame buffer for display) according to instructions from the host CPU 151 . The VDP 200 also generates a video signal (such as an RGB signal) based on the read image data, and outputs the video signal to the image display device 31 .

As shown in FIG. 5, the VDP 200 of this embodiment includes a control register 201, a CG bus I/F 202, a CPU I/F 203, a clock generation circuit 205, an expansion circuit 206, a drawing circuit 207, and a display circuit 208. , a memory controller 209 and an audio control circuit 300 .

The control register 201 is a register for the VDP 200 to control drawing and display, and writing and reading data to and from the control register 201 controls drawing and display. The host CPU 151 writes data to and reads data from the control register 201 via the CPU I/F 203 .

Specifically, the control register 201 includes a system control register for performing basic settings required for the operation of the VDP 200, a data transfer register for performing settings required for transferring data, and a register for controlling drawing. A drawing register for setting, a bus interface register for setting necessary for accessing the bus, a decompression register for setting necessary for decompressing a compressed image, and a display register for setting for controlling the display. including.

A CG bus I/F 202 is an interface circuit for communication with the CGROM 154 . Image data from the CGROM 154 is input to the VDP 200 via the CG bus I/F 202 described above.

A CPU I/F 203 is an interface circuit for communication with the host CPU 151 . For example, a display list output by the host CPU 151 is input to the VDP 200 via the CPU I/F 203 . Various interrupt signals output from the VDP 200 are input to the host CPU 151 via the CPU I/F 203 . The host CPU 151 can access control registers via the CPU I/F 203 .

A data transfer circuit 204 transfers data between various devices. Specifically, the data transfer circuit 204 performs data transfer between the host CPU 151 and the VRAM 156, data transfer between the CGROM 154 and the VRAM 156, and data transfer between various storage areas (including frame buffers) of the VRAM 156.

A clock generation circuit 205 receives a pulse signal from the crystal oscillator 155 and generates a system clock for the VDP 200 . It also generates a clock for generating a synchronous signal and outputs the synchronous signal to the image display device 31 via the display circuit 208 .

The decompression circuit 206 is a circuit for decompressing the image data compressed in the CGROM 154, and stores the decompressed image data in the decompression storage area 153b. The drawing circuit 207 is a circuit that performs sequence control using a display list composed of a group of drawing control commands.

The display circuit 208 generates an RGB signal (analog signal) indicating image color data as a video signal from the image data (digital signal) stored in the “frame buffer for display” in the VRAM 156 . A video signal (RGB signal) generated by the display circuit 208 is output to the image display device 31 .

The display circuit 208 also outputs a synchronization signal (a vertical synchronization signal, a horizontal synchronization signal, etc.) to the image display device 31 for synchronizing with the image display device 31 . Note that in the present embodiment, as video signals, RGB signals obtained by converting digital signals into analog signals are output to the image display device 31, but the video signals may be output as digital signals.

When the host CPU 151 instructs the memory controller 209 to switch frame buffers, the memory controller 209 switches between the “drawing frame buffer” and the “display frame buffer”.

The VDP 200 of this embodiment has an audio data reproduction function in addition to the image data reproduction function. Specifically, the audio output in the gaming machine is controlled by the audio control circuit 300 of the VDP 200 . The voice control circuit 300 reads out a predetermined program based on the command transmitted from the performance control board 120 and controls voice output in the voice output device 34 .

The voice control circuit 300 outputs voice using voice data stored in the CGROM 154 . It should be noted that instead of storing the audio data in the CGROM 154, a configuration in which a sound source ROM storing the audio data is provided separately from the CGROM 154 may be employed. Also, the audio control circuit 300 may be provided independently within the image control board 150 instead of being included in the VDP 200 . In the above case, the tone generator ROM may be included in the audio control circuit 300 .

<Description of game state>
Next, game states to which the gaming machine 1 transitions will be described. In this embodiment, the game progresses in one of the "low-probability game state", "high-probability game state", "time-saving game state", and "non-time-saving game state". Specifically, a game state that is a "low probability game state" and a "time saving game state", a game state that is a "low probability game state" and a "non-time saving game state", and a "high probability game state” and shifts to a game state which is a “time-saving game state”.

In the above-described low-probability gaming state, the winning probability of the big win is 1/299.5 in the big-hit lottery executed when the game ball enters the first start hole 13 or the second start hole 14 . Winning a jackpot means obtaining the right to play a jackpot game. The jackpot game includes a "long-hit game" and a "short-hit game" which will be described later.

In the high-probability game state described above, the winning probability of the big win in the big-win lottery is higher than in the low-probability game state. Specifically, in the high-probability gaming state of the present embodiment, the winning probability of the big hit is 1/29.95. However, the winning probability of the big win in each game state may be changed as appropriate.

In the non-time-saving game state, the winning probability of winning becomes 1/20 in the normal drawing lottery executed when the game ball passes through the gate 15.例文帳に追加In addition, in the non-time-saving game state, the length of time from the start of the variable display of the normal symbols (normal symbol display device 22) to the stop display is set to about 10 seconds. Furthermore, when winning in the normal drawing lottery, the total opening time of the second start port 14 when the long open pattern described later is determined is about 4.2 seconds, and the second start port when the short open pattern is determined. 14 total open time is set to about 0.2 seconds.

In the time-saving game state, in the normal drawing lottery executed when the game ball passes through the gate 15, the probability of winning is improved compared to the non-time-saving game state. In addition, in the time-saving game state, compared with the non-time-saving game state, the length of time from the start of the variable display of normal symbols to the stop display is short, and the total open time of the second start port 14 tends to be long. .

Specifically, in the time-saving gaming state, the winning probability in the normal drawing lottery is 19/20. In addition, in the time-saving game state, the normal symbols are stopped and displayed about one second after they are variably displayed. Furthermore, in the time-saving game state, the total opening time of the second start port 14 is set to 5 seconds when the long open pattern is determined, and the total open time of the second start port 14 when the short open pattern is determined. is set to 3 seconds. When the normal symbols are stopped, the normal symbols are maintained in a stopped state for at least about 0.5 seconds.

In the above configuration, in the time-saving gaming state, as long as the game ball passes through the gate 15 than in the non-time-saving gaming state, the second starting port 14 is more likely to be controlled in the second mode. Therefore, in the time-saving gaming state, the player can proceed with the game while suppressing the consumption of game balls. In this embodiment, the game ball can enter the second starting port 14 and the gate 15 by playing the game with the right hand. Therefore, in the time-saving game state, it is more advantageous to play with the right hand than with the left hand.

In this embodiment, a plurality of types of time-saving gaming states are provided. Specifically, the time-saving gaming state of the present embodiment includes a first time-saving gaming state and a second time-saving gaming state. The game shifts to the first time-saving game state when the jackpot game (ending period) ends. It is possible to shift to the second time-saving game state when the big win is not won over a predetermined number of times in the jackpot lottery (jackpot determination processing) in the low-probability game state.

In this embodiment, the variation time of normal symbols is common in each time-saving game state. Specifically, the variation time of normal symbols in each time-saving game state is about 1 second. In addition, the winning probability of the normal drawing lottery is common in each time saving game state, and the probability that the long open pattern is determined and the probability that the short open pattern is decided are common in each time saving game state.

In each time-saving game state, the operation mode (total opening time, number of times of opening) of the opening/closing door 14b when the long open pattern is stopped and displayed is common. Further, in each time-saving game state, the operation mode of the open/close door 14b when the short open symbol is stopped and displayed is common. Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, the "variation time of the normal symbol, the time of opening (expansion) of the second start port 14 and the number of times of opening" in the time saving game state will be the second start port 14 (opening and closing door 14b) in the time saving game state. may be described as "open mode". As described above, the opening mode of the second starting port 14 is common in each time-saving gaming state. However, in each time-saving game state, the opening mode of the second starting port 14 may be different.

Each of the time-saving game states described above ends when the game is executed a predetermined number of times, or when the game shifts to a big hit game. Hereinafter, the number of times the time-saving game state ends may be referred to as the "time-saving number of times" of the time-saving game state. In this embodiment, each time-saving game state has a different time-saving number of times. Specifically, the number of times of time saving in the first time saving game state is 100 times or 799 times. The number of times of time saving in the second time saving game state is 1000 times. However, the number of times of time saving in the time saving game state can be changed as appropriate. For example, the number of times of time saving in the second time saving game state may be 100 times (common with the first time saving game state).

Next, details of various tables stored in the main ROM 112 will be described.

<Jackpot Judgment Table>
FIG. 6(a-1) and FIG. 6(a-2) show an example of a big hit determination table that is referred to when determining whether or not the result of stopping the special symbol variation is a big hit (at the time of a big win lottery). It is a conceptual diagram.

FIG. 6(a-1) is a big hit determination table that is referred to when determining whether the stop result of the special symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 20 is a big hit, a small hit, or a loss (big hit lottery). It is A. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 7(a-1) to 7(a-3), but when a big win is won in a big win lottery, a big win symbol (special symbol A, etc.), which will be described later, is displayed. Also, when winning a small prize, a small prize pattern (special pattern K) is displayed.

FIG. 6(b-2) is a big hit determination table B referred to when determining the stop result of the special symbol variation in the second special symbol display device 21. FIG. It should be noted that the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21 have different winning probabilities of small hits, and the same big win probabilities. In addition, in this embodiment, the first special symbol display device 20 may be simply referred to as "first special figure", and the second special symbol display device 21 may simply be referred to as "second special figure". Also, the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21 may be collectively simply referred to as "special symbols".

In this embodiment, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 13 or the second starting port 14 (hereinafter sometimes collectively referred to as "starting port"), a special symbol determination random number value is acquired. The random number range of the special symbol determination random number in this embodiment is a numerical value "0 to 598".

The big hit determination table defines a special symbol determination random number value for a "big hit" and a special symbol determination random number value for a "small hit". In the jackpot lottery, the random number for special symbol determination obtained when the game ball wins the starting hole is compared with the random number for special symbol determination defined in the jackpot determination table, and if both match, the jackpot or Win a prize.

The jackpot determination tables (A, B) shown in FIGS. 6(a-1) and 6(a-2) are composed of a low-probability random number determination table and a high-probability random number determination table. The main CPU 111 refers to the game state, selects the low-probability random number determination table in the low-probability game state, and selects the high-probability random number determination table in the high-probability game state. Also, the main CPU 111 determines any one of "big win", "minor win", and "losing" based on the selected table and the extracted special symbol determination random number value.

For example, according to the low-probability random number determination table shown in FIG. 6(a-1), two special symbol determination random numbers are determined to be "big hit". On the other hand, according to the high-probability random number determination table, 20 special symbol determination random numbers are determined to be "big hits". In addition, in the big hit determination table of FIG. 6 (a-1), whether the random number determination table at low probability or the random number determination table at high probability is used, the four special symbol determination random numbers are "small hit". is determined. If a random number that is not determined as either a "big win" or a "minor win" is determined to be "losing".

As described above, the random number range of the special symbol determination random number is "0 to 598". Therefore, in the jackpot determination table A (at the time of winning the first start opening), the probability of jackpot determination is 1/299.5 in the low-probability gaming state. Similarly, the probability of being determined to be a big hit in the high probability game state is 1/29.95, which is 10 times. On the other hand, the probability of being determined as a small hit is 1/149.75 in both the low-probability game state and the high-probability game state.

In the big hit determination table B shown in FIG. 6(a-2), the special symbol determination random number determined to be a big hit in the low probability game state and the high probability game state is the same as the big hit determination table A. On the other hand, the big-hit determination table A and the big-hit determination table B differ in the special symbol determination random number value determined as a small hit. For example, in the big hit determination table B, it is determined as a "small hit" only when the special symbol determination random number is "50".

In the above configuration, the probability that a game ball wins in the first start port 13 and the case that a game ball wins in the second start port 14 is 1/299. 5, and the probability of being determined as a big hit in the high probability game state is 1/29.95. On the other hand, when the game ball entered the first start port 13, the probability of being judged as a small hit was 1/149.75 in both the low probability game state and the high probability game state. The probability of judging a small hit when a game ball wins is 1/599 in both the low-probability game state and the high-probability game state.

<Hit Judgment Table>
FIG. 6(b) is a conceptual diagram of an example of a hit determination table that is referred to when determining whether or not to win the stop result of normal symbol variation in the normal pattern lottery. The hit determination table shown in FIG. 6(b) is composed of a non-time-saving game state random number determination table and a time-saving game state random number determination table. The above time-saving gaming state random number determination table is commonly referred to in the first time-saving gaming state and the second time-saving gaming state.

The main CPU 111 acquires a normal symbol determination random number when the game ball passes through the gate 15 . The random number range of the hit determination random number is a numerical value "0 to 19". The main CPU 111 refers to the game state, selects the non-time-saving game state random number determination table in the non-time-saving game state, and selects the time-saving game state random number determination table in the time-saving game state. In addition, the main CPU 111 determines whether it is a “hit” or a “lose” based on the selected table and the obtained random number value for winning determination.

Specifically, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the acquired random number value for winning judgment matches the random number value for winning judgment defined in the winning judgment table. In the hit determination table shown in FIG. 6(b), the probability of being determined to be a win during the non-time-saving game state is about 1/20, and the probability of being determined to be a win during the time-saving game state is about 19/20.

<Design decision table>
FIGS. 7(a-1) to 7(a-3) are conceptual diagrams of a special symbol determination table for determining special symbols (stop symbols) to be stopped and displayed in each game.

The special symbol determination table includes a big win symbol determination table, a small win symbol determination table, and a losing symbol determination table. The big-hit pattern determination table is referred to when determining a stop pattern (big-hit pattern) when a big-hit is won in a big-hit lottery. The small winning design determination table is referred to when determining a stop design (small winning design) when a small winning is won in a big winning lottery. The losing symbol determination table is referred to when determining a stop symbol (losing symbol) in the case of a loss in the jackpot lottery.

As shown in FIGS. 7(a-1) to 7(a-3), each special symbol determination table is provided for each special symbol display device, and the special symbol determination table for the first special symbol display device 20 and the second It is composed of a special symbol determination table for the special symbol display device 21 .

FIG. 7(a-1) is a conceptual diagram of an example of a big hit symbol determination table. When winning a jackpot, the main CPU 111 refers to the jackpot symbol random number. The random number range of the jackpot symbol random number is a numerical value "0 to 99". For example, if a big win is won by winning the first start port 13, the main CPU 111 sets the stop symbol data to "01" ( A special symbol A1) is determined. In the above case, as shown in FIG. 7(a-1), the special symbol A1 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20. FIG.

In addition, the main CPU 111 generates a performance symbol designation command capable of specifying stop symbol data (type of special symbol) at the start of fluctuation of special symbols. For example, when the stop symbol data "01" is determined, the effect symbol specifying commands "E0H" and "01H" are generated as shown in FIG. 7(a-1).

As shown in FIG. 7(a-1), if the winning to the first starting port 13 results in winning a jackpot, and if the obtained random number for the jackpot symbol is "60" to "69", the game is stopped. "02" (special symbol A2) is determined as symbol data, and effect symbol designation commands "E0H" and "02H" are generated. In the above case, the special symbol A2 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20 .

Similarly, if the winning to the first starting port 13 results in a big win and the random number for the big win symbol is "70" to "99", the stop symbol data is "03" (special symbol A3). is determined, and effect symbol designation commands "E0H" and "03H" are generated. In the above case, the special symbol A3 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20 .

If the jackpot is won by winning the second starting port 14 and the random number for the jackpot pattern is ``0'' to ``69'', ``04'' (special pattern B1) is determined as the stop pattern data. , effect symbol designation commands "E1H" and "01H" are generated. In the above case, as shown in FIG. 7(a-1), the second special symbol display device 21 stops displaying the special symbol B1.

In addition, if the winning to the second starting port 14 wins the jackpot, and if the random number for the jackpot symbol is "70" to "89", "05" (special symbol B2) is set as the stop symbol data. It is determined, and production symbol designation commands "E1H" and "02H" are generated. In the above case, the second special symbol display device 21 stops displaying the special symbol B2. If the jackpot is won by winning the second starting port 14 and the random number for the jackpot pattern is ``90'' to ``94'', ``06'' (special pattern B3) is determined as the stop pattern data. , effect symbol designation commands "E1H" and "03H" are generated. In the above case, the special symbol B3 is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 21 .

Similarly, if the winning to the second starting port 14 is a trigger to win a jackpot, and the random number for the jackpot design is "95" to "99", the stop design data is "07" (special design B4). is determined, and effect symbol designation commands "E1H" and "04H" are generated. In the above case, the special symbol B4 is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 21 . Although it will be described later in detail, the number of time reductions M in the first time reduction game state after the big win game changes according to the type of the special symbol stopped and displayed when the big win game is started.

When the special symbol A1, special symbol A2, special symbol A3, special symbol B1 to special symbol B4 (hereinafter sometimes collectively referred to as "jackpot symbol") are stopped and displayed, then the big win game is started. . As described above, the jackpot game includes a long-hit game and a short-hit game. In the jackpot game, the first big winning hole 16 and the second big winning hole 17 (hereinafter sometimes collectively referred to as "big winning hole") are opened. In the long winning game, the opening time of the big winning opening is set longer than in the short winning game.

The kind of the big win game corresponds to the big win special symbol stopped and displayed when the big win game is started. Specifically, when any one of special symbols A1, A3, and special symbols B1 to B4 among the big hit special symbols is stopped and displayed, a long winning game is started. On the other hand, when the special symbol A2 is stopped and displayed, a short winning game is started.

In addition, the game state after the end of the big win game is determined according to the special symbol stopped and displayed when shifting to the big win game. For example, when the special symbol A1, the special symbol A2 or the special symbol B1 is stopped and displayed, the game moves to a time-saving game state of a high-probability game state (hereinafter simply referred to as "high-probability time-saving game state"). The time-saving game state of the high-probability game state is continued until a jackpot is won in principle. On the other hand, when any one of the special symbols A3, B2 to B4 is stopped and displayed, the game moves to a low-probability time-saving game state (hereinafter simply referred to as "low-probability time-saving game state"). Specifically, the special symbols A3, B2 to B4 are stopped and displayed, and when the jackpot game ends, the game shifts to the first time-saving game state.

In this embodiment, the number of times of time saving in the first time saving game state is different depending on the type of big hit symbols (A3, B2 to B4). Specifically, when the special symbol A3 or the special symbol B2 among the jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed, the number of times of time saving in the first time saving game state is 100 times. On the other hand, when the special symbol B3 or the special symbol B4 among the jackpot symbols is stop-displayed, the number of games in the first time-saving game state is 799 times.

Although the details will be described later, a new table scenario S is set when the jackpot game ends. By setting the table scenario S, the variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern (described later) of the special figure is switched according to the number of games played. The table scenario S described above is variably set according to the type of the jackpot symbol.

In this embodiment, a jackpot game in which the game state after completion is a high-probability game state is sometimes referred to as "probability variable jackpot", and a jackpot game in which the game state after completion is a low-probability game state is sometimes described as "normal jackpot". . Further, in the present embodiment, the non-time-saving gaming state of the low-probability gaming state may be described as "low-probability non-time-saving gaming state".

FIG. 7(a-2) is a conceptual diagram of an example of a small winning symbol determination table. When winning a small win, the main CPU 111 refers to the small win symbol random number. The random number range of the small hit symbol random number is a numerical value "0 to 99". However, if a small win is won by winning the first starting port 13, the main CPU 111 determines "11" (special symbol K) as the stop symbol data regardless of the obtained random number for the small winning symbol. do. In the above case, as shown in FIG. 7(a-2), the special symbol K is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20. FIG. In addition, production symbol designation commands "E0H" and "0AH" are generated.

Similarly, when a small win is won by winning the second starting port 14, the main CPU 111 sets "12" (special symbol K) as the stop symbol data regardless of the obtained random number for the small winning symbol. decide. In the above case, as shown in FIG. 7(a-2), the special symbol K is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 21. FIG. In addition, production symbol designation commands "E1H" and "0AH" are generated.

FIG. 7(a-3) is a conceptual diagram of the losing symbol determination table. In the jackpot lottery at the time of winning a prize to the first starting port 13, when it is determined that the game is lost, "00" (special symbol H) is determined as the stop symbol data. In the above case, production symbol designation commands "E0H" and "00H" are generated. Similarly, in the jackpot lottery at the time of winning a prize to the second starting port 14, when it is determined that the game is lost, "00" (special symbol H) is determined as the stop symbol data. In the above case, production symbol designation commands "E1H" and "00H" are generated.

FIG. 7(b-1) and FIG. 7(b-2) are conceptual diagrams of an example of a normal symbol determination table. The normal symbol determination table is used when determining the normal symbols to be stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22 . The normal symbol determination table described above is commonly used in each game state (non-time-saving game state, first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state).

The normal symbol determination table of the present embodiment includes a normal symbol determination table X and a normal symbol determination table Y. The normal symbol determination table X is used when winning the normal symbol lottery (when the second starting port 14 is opened). On the other hand, the normal symbol determination table Y is used when the normal symbol lottery is lost (when the second starting port 14 is not opened).

FIG. 7(b-1) is a conceptual diagram of the normal symbol determination table X. As shown in FIG. The main CPU 111 acquires a normal symbol random number when determining a normal symbol. The random number range of the normal symbol random number is a numerical value "0 to 10". For example, when winning the general pattern lottery and the normal symbol random number value is "0" or "1", the long open symbol is determined as the normal symbol. On the other hand, when the normal symbol random number is any of the numerical values "2 to 10", the short open symbol is determined as the normal symbol.

When the long open symbol is determined as the normal symbol, the main CPU 111 determines stop symbol data "01", and generates normal symbol designation commands "E8H" and "01H" at the start of fluctuation of the normal symbol. When the short open symbol is determined, the stop symbol data "02" is determined, and normal symbol specifying commands "E8H" and "02H" are generated at the start of variation of the normal symbol.

7(b-2) is a conceptual diagram of the normal symbol determination table Y. FIG. As described above, the normal symbol determination table Y is used in the case of loss in the normal symbol lottery. In the case of a loss in the general pattern lottery, as shown in FIG. 7(b-2), the normal symbol random number value is any value from "0" to "10" to determine the lost pattern. The main CPU 111 determines "00" as the stop symbol data when a losing symbol is determined as the normal symbol, and generates normal symbol designation commands "E8H" and "00H" when the normal symbol starts to fluctuate.

FIGS. 8(a), 8(b-1) and 8(b-2) are diagrams for explaining the variation pattern determination table referred to in each game. The variation pattern determination table is referred to when determining the variation pattern in each game. The main CPU 111 determines a variation pattern in each game, and variably displays the special symbol display device (first special symbol display device 20, second special symbol display device 21) according to the variation pattern.

The variation pattern determination table referred to in each game after the end of the big win game is variable according to the type of the big win symbols stopped and displayed at the start of the big win game. Specifically, in this embodiment, a plurality of types of table scenarios S corresponding to a plurality of types of jackpot symbols are provided. The main CPU 111 sets a table scenario S corresponding to the jackpot symbols stopped and displayed at the start of the jackpot game. Further, the main CPU 111 uses the set table scenario S to determine the variation pattern determination table referred to in each game after the big win game. In the above configuration, the variation pattern determination table referred to in each game becomes variable according to the set table scenario S. Although details will be described later, when the number of games after the end of the jackpot game reaches the number of games defined in the table scenario S, the variation pattern determination table is switched (see FIG. 8(b-1) described later).

FIG. 8A is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the table scenario S. FIG. Table scenario S includes table scenario Sa1, table scenario Sa2, table scenario Sa3, table scenario Sb1, table scenario Sb2, table scenario Sb3 and table scenario Sb4. The table scenario Sa1 is set when the special symbol A1 among the jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed. Similarly, the table scenario Sa2 is set when the special symbol A2 among the jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed, the table scenario Sa3 is set when the special symbol A3 among the jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed, and the table scenario SB1 is: It is set when the special symbol B1 among the big hit symbols is stopped and displayed.

The table scenario Sb2 is set when the special symbol B2 among the jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed. As described above, when the special symbol B2 is stopped and displayed, the game moves to the first time-saving game state of 100 times after the big hit game. That is, the table scenario Sb2 is set when shifting to the first time-saving game state 100 times after the jackpot game. The table scenario Sb3 is set when the special symbol B3 among the jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed. As described above, when the special symbol B3 is stopped and displayed, the game moves to the first time-saving game state of 799 times after the big hit game. Further, the table scenario Sb4 is set when the special symbol B4 among the big winning symbols is stopped and displayed. As described above, when the special symbol B4 is stopped and displayed, the game moves to the first time-saving game state of 799 times after the big hit game.

As can be understood from the above description, when the special symbol B3 is stopped and displayed, and when the special symbol B4 is stopped and displayed, the number of time reductions in the first time reduction game state after the big hit game is common (799 times). On the other hand, the set table scenarios (Sb3, Sb4) are different. That is, in each of the above cases, the variation pattern determination table referred to in the first time-saving gaming state is different. Although the details will be described later, the effect mode in the first time-saving game state differs between when the special symbol B3 is stopped and displayed and when the special symbol B4 is stopped and displayed. In games with different effect modes, the effects that can be executed by the image display device 31 are different.

In the present embodiment, referencing a specific variation pattern determination table T in the variation pattern determination process may be simply described as "referring to the variation pattern determination table T". In addition, there are cases where referring to a specific variation pattern determination table T among a plurality of types of variation pattern determination tables T is simply described as "the variation pattern determination table T is set". For example, as an example of "becoming able to refer to a specific variation pattern determination table T", it is assumed that the variation pattern determination table T is read from the main ROM 112 and stored (developed) in the main RAM 113.

8(b-1) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the variation pattern determination table set by the table scenario S. FIG. The table scenario S defines a plurality of triggers for setting (switching over) the variation pattern determination table, and the variation pattern determination table set at the triggers. The main CPU 111 sets (switches) a variation pattern determination table when a trigger specified in the table scenario S is established.

FIG. 8(b-1) shows the order in which the triggers for setting the variation pattern determination table are established. Also, a variation pattern determination table set at the trigger is shown corresponding to the trigger. In the specific example of FIG. 8(b-1), it is assumed that the table scenario Sb2 of the table scenario S is set. Further, in the specific example of FIG. 8(b-1), it is assumed that the jackpot game is not won during the period from when the table scenario Sb2 is set until the second time-saving game state ends.

As shown in FIG. 8(b-1), in the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, the variation pattern determination table Ta1 is set upon the end of the jackpot game. Further, during the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, when the 91st game after the end of the jackpot game is started, the variation pattern determination table Ta2 is set. After that, when the 100th game after the end of the jackpot game is started, the variation pattern determination table Tj1 is set. In the above configuration, of the first time-saving game state (100 times), the variation pattern determination table Ta1 is referred to in the game up to the 90th time (the game of the 90th time after the jackpot game ends), and the 91st time to the 99th time The variation pattern determination table Ta2 is referred to in the previous games, and the variation pattern determination table Tj1 is referred to in the 100th (last) game.

As shown in FIG. 8(b-1), when the table scenario Sb2 is set, the variation pattern determination table Tn1 is set upon completion of the first time-saving gaming state. Further, when the 791st game starts after the jackpot game ends, the variation pattern determination table Tn2 is set. In the above configuration, the variation pattern determination table Tn1 is referred to until the game 11 times before shifting to the second time-saving gaming state among the games in the non-time-saving gaming state, and 10 times before shifting to the second time-saving gaming state game, the variation pattern determination table Tn2 is referred to.

When the second time-saving gaming state starts, a variation pattern determination table Ts is set. As shown in FIG. 8(b-1), when the table scenario Sb2 is set, when the 802nd game (the second game in the second time-saving game state) starts after the jackpot game ends, the variation pattern is determined. A table Tax is set. In addition, when the second time-saving gaming state ends, a variation pattern determination table Tn1 is set. In the above configuration, in the first game in the second time-saving gaming state, the variation pattern determination table Ts is referred to, and in the second and subsequent games in the second time-saving gaming state, the variation pattern determination table Tax is referred to. After that, when the second time-saving gaming state ends, the variation pattern determination table Tn1 is referred to. As can be understood from the above description, during the period in which the table scenario S is set, the variation pattern determination table is changed according to the number of times the game has been played since the jackpot game, in addition to the opportunity for changing the game state.

In this embodiment, the table scenario S is changed at the opportunity of winning the jackpot game, and is not changed at another opportunity. However, when the clear operation process or the setting change process described above is executed, the table scenario S is left unset. Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, an operation in which a setting change process or a clear operation process is executed may be referred to as a "clear operation". Also, a period during which the table scenario S is not set may be referred to as a "scenario unset period". The scenario unset period is a period from when the clear operation is executed until the first big win game ends. Also, the period in which any one of the table scenarios S is set after the jackpot game is finished may be referred to as a "scenario setting period".

It is assumed that the variation pattern determination table is changed in accordance with the number of games played during the scenario unset period. Further, in the comparison, a variation pattern determination table advantageous to the player is referred to from the start of the scenario unset period to the predetermined number of games. In the above comparison, the manager of the gaming machine 1 can shift to a state advantageous to the player at any timing by performing a clear operation. Therefore, an inconvenience that the fairness of the game is impaired may occur. In consideration of the above circumstances, the present embodiment adopts a configuration in which the variation pattern determination table is not changed according to the number of games during the scenario unset period.

FIG. 8(b-2) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the variation pattern determination table referred to during the scenario unset period. In the specific example of FIG. 8(b-2), it is assumed that the jackpot game is not won during the period from the start of the scenario unset period to the end of the second time-saving game state.

As shown in FIG. 8(b-2), the variation pattern determination table Tn1 is referred to immediately after the clearing operation is executed and the scenario unset period is started. When the clear operation is executed, it becomes a low-probability short-time gaming state. Moreover, when the game is executed 800 times after the clear operation is executed, the state is shifted to the second time-saving game state. As described above, in the scenario setting period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, the variation pattern determination table T referred to in the low-probability short-time gaming state changes from the variation pattern determination table Tn1 to the variation pattern determination table Tn2 according to the number of games played. Change. On the other hand, in the low-probability short-time gaming state in the scenario unset period, the referenced variation pattern determination table T does not change from the variation pattern determination table Tn1.

As shown in FIG. 8(b-2), in the scenario unset period, when the second time-saving gaming state is started, the variation pattern determination table Tbx is set. After that, when the second time-saving gaming state ends and shifts to the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, the variation pattern determination table Tn1 is set. In the above configuration, the variation pattern determination table is not changed (according only to the number of games played) during the period when the scenario is not set, other than when the game state changes.

FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the variation pattern determination table T referred to in each game state. In this embodiment, when each game is started, a variation pattern designation command indicating the variation pattern of the game is transmitted from the main control board 110 (main CPU 111) to the effect control board 120 (sub CPU 121). The sub CPU 121 is controlled to an effect mode corresponding to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command. FIG. 9 shows each effect mode corresponding to each variation pattern determination table.

As described above, the variation pattern determination table T is referred to, and the variation pattern is determined by lottery. In addition, the time when the special figure fluctuates may be different for each fluctuation pattern. In the above configuration, the time during which the special figure is variably displayed in each game is variable. In this embodiment, for the sake of explanation, in the period in which the variation pattern determination table T is referred to, the average of the time when the special figure is variably displayed in each game when playing in a normal procedure is may be described as "average fluctuation time of FIG. 9 shows the average variation time (short, long, fixed) of the special figure in the period in which the variation pattern determination table T is referred to, corresponding to the variation pattern determination table T. It should be noted that the above-mentioned "playing the game according to the normal procedure" means hitting left when the right hitting lamp 28 is turned off, hitting right when the right hitting lamp 28 is lit, and so-called "stopping" (single-shot hitting). including).

As shown in FIG. 9, in the first time-saving gaming state, variation pattern determination table Ta1, variation pattern determination table Ta2, variation pattern determination table Tj1, variation pattern determination table Tj2, and variation pattern determination table Tax can be referred to. However, the variation pattern determination table T referred to in the first time-saving gaming state changes according to the table scenario S (that is, changes according to the jackpot pattern).

Specifically, when the jackpot symbol is the special symbol B2, the table scenario Sb2 is set, and the first time-saving game state is started 100 times. In the first time-saving game state (100 times) in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, as described with reference to FIG. ), the variation pattern determination table Ta1 is referred to, the variation pattern determination table Ta2 is referred to from the 91st to 99th games, and the variation pattern determination table Tj1 is referred to in the 100th (last) game.

In the game in which the variation pattern determination table Ta1 is referred to, the production mode is the time saving mode A. Further, in the game in which the variation pattern determination table Ta2 is referred to, the production mode is the time saving mode A, similarly to the game in which the variation pattern determination table Ta1 is referred to. That is, in the first time-saving game state in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, the production mode in the game from the 1st time to the 99th time does not change, but when the remaining number of times reaches 10 times, the variation pattern determination table T switches (Ta1 → Ta2). However, the effect mode may differ between the period in which the variation pattern determination table Ta1 is referred to and the period in which the variation pattern determination table Ta2 is referred to. In the above configuration, when the remaining number of times of the first time-saving game state in which the table scenario Sb2 is set reaches 10 times, the effect mode is switched.

The variation pattern determination table Ta2 is more likely to determine a long-time variation pattern than the variation pattern determination table Ta1. In the above configuration, in the game after the remaining number of times of the first time-saving game state reaches 10 times, for example, an effect (for example, countdown effect) that informs (suggests) that the first time-saving game state ends is executed. It becomes easier to secure time for In the game in which the variation pattern determination table Tj1 is referred to, the end effect is executed after the judgment effect is executed.

In the judgment effect, for example, the shielding image GF (see FIG. 16(c) described above) is displayed first. That is, when the judgment effect is started, the closed sliding doors are displayed. Further, in the judge effect, it is displayed that the fusuma can be opened by hitting the effect button 8 repeatedly, and that the first time-saving game state continues when the fusuma is opened. Temporarily, in the judgment production|presentation in case a 1st time saving game state continues, the moving image which a fusuma opens is finally displayed (shielding image GF is not displayed). On the other hand, in the judgment effect when the first time-saving game state does not continue, the sliding door remains closed. In the end effect, it is informed that the first time-saving game state is ended. A specific example of the ending effect will be described in a second embodiment (see FIG. 45).

In the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, the variation pattern determination table Tn1 is referred to in the non-time saving game state immediately after the first time saving game state ends (see FIG. 8 (b-1) described above). In the game in which the variation pattern determination table Tn1 is referred to, the effect mode is the normal mode. Further, when the 791st game starts after the jackpot game ends, the variation pattern determination table Tn2 is set. In the game in which the variation pattern determination table Tn2 is referred to, the effect mode is the previous mode. In the immediately preceding mode, effects that are not performed in the normal mode can be performed. For example, in the immediately preceding mode, an effect is executed that suggests that the second time-saving gaming state will start soon.

In the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, when the second time-saving gaming state starts, the variation pattern determination table Ts is set. The variation pattern determination table Ts is referred to in the first game in the second time-saving game state. In the game in which the variation pattern determination table Ts is referred to, rush effects are executed. The rush effect is a effect for notifying that the second time-saving game state has started. The average fluctuation time of the special figure in the game in which the fluctuation pattern determination table Ts is referred to is longer than the average fluctuation time of the special figure in the second and subsequent games (the game in which Tax is referred to) in the second time-saving gaming state. Specifically, in the game in which the variation pattern determination table Ts is referred to, a predetermined variation pattern is determined for each result of the big win lottery. For example, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, the variation pattern of the time required for stop-displaying the performance symbol GA corresponding to the loss after executing the judgment performance and the end performance is determined. On the other hand, when the big win is won, the fact that the big win has been won is notified after the judgment performance and the end performance are executed.

In the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, the variation pattern determination table Tax is referred to in the game from the second time to the 1000th time (last time) in the second time saving game state. In the variation pattern determination table Tax, a variation pattern shorter than the non-time-saving gaming state (the game in which Tn1 or Tn2 is referred to) is likely to be determined. Also, in the variation pattern determination table Tax, a shorter variation pattern is more likely to be determined than the variation pattern determination table Ta1 and the variation pattern determination table Ta2 referred to in the first time-saving gaming state, and the average variation time of the special figure is shortened. Similarly, in the variation pattern determination table Tbx, it is easier to determine a shorter variation pattern than the variation pattern determination table Ta1 and the variation pattern determination table Ta2 referred to in the first time-saving gaming state, and the average variation time of the special figure is shortened. In the game in which the variation pattern determination table Tax is referred to, the production mode is the time saving mode B.

As shown in FIG. 9, when the table scenario Sb3 is set, the variation pattern determination table Ta1, the variation pattern determination table Ta2, the variation pattern determination table Tj2, the variation pattern determination table Tax, the variation pattern determination table Tnc, the variation pattern determination table Tax The variation pattern determination table T referred to in the order of is changed. A specific example of the motion pattern determination table T referred to in each game during the period in which the table scenario Sb3 is set will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 11(a) described later.

As shown in FIG. 9, when the table scenario Sb4 is set, the variation pattern determination table T, which is referred to in the order of the variation pattern determination table Tax, the variation pattern determination table Tnc, and the variation pattern determination table Tax, is changed. A specific example of the motion pattern determination table T referred to in each game during the period in which the table scenario Sb3 is set will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 11(b) described later. Further, as shown in FIG. 9, in the scenario unset period, the variation pattern determination table T is changed, which is referred to in the order of the variation pattern determination table Tn1 and the variation pattern determination table Tbx. A specific example of the motion pattern determination table T referred to in each game during the scenario unset period will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 10(b) described later.

FIG. 10(a-1) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the variation pattern determination table referred to in each game during the period in which the table scenario Sb2 of the table scenario S is set. In addition to the variation pattern determination table T at each point in FIG. 10 (a-1), the production mode at each point, the remaining number of times of the time saving game state (hereinafter "remaining number M"), and the second time saving game state The remaining number of times until the start (hereinafter “remaining number of times N”) is indicated. The remaining number M and remaining number N are stored in the main RAM 113, for example.

In each game in the time-saving game state, the remaining number of times M is decremented by "1", and when the remaining number of times M is decremented to "0", the time-saving game state ends. In each game in the low-probability game state, the remaining number of times N is decremented by "1", and when the remaining number of times N is decremented to "0", the second time-saving game state is started. The remaining number of times N is initialized to the initial value "800" at the opportunity of winning the jackpot game and the above clear operation. That is, when 800 games (low probability game state) are executed from the jackpot game, and when 800 games (low probability game state) are executed from the clear operation, the second time-saving game state starts be done.

FIG. 10(a-1) shows the game start time ts and the game end time te. As can be seen from FIG. 10(a-1), the remaining number of times M of the time-saving game state is subtracted at the end of the game. Specifically, the remaining number of times M is subtracted at the end of the later-described fixed period. Similarly, the remaining number N is decremented at the end of the settlement period.

As described above, in the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, the variation pattern determination table Ta1 is referred to until the 90th game in the first time-saving game state. That is, the variation pattern determination table Ta1 is referred to until the game in which the remaining number of times M in the first time-saving game state is the numerical value "11" and the remaining number of times N is the numerical value "711". Further, the variation pattern determination table Ta2 is referred to from the 91st time to the 99th game in the first time saving game state. Both the variation pattern determination table Ta1 and the variation pattern determination table Ta2 correspond to the time saving mode A (see FIG. 9 described above). In the above configuration, from the first time to the 99th game of the first time-saving game state, it becomes the time-saving mode A. As shown in FIG. 10 (a-1), in the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, the variation pattern determination table Tj1 is referred to in the last game of the first time-saving game state, and the above-mentioned judge effect is executed and then terminated. A performance is performed.

In the specific example of FIG. 10(a-1), it is assumed that the remaining number of times M is subtracted to the numerical value "0" at the time ta, and the first time-saving game state ends. In the above specific example, the remaining number of times N is decremented to the numerical value "700" at time ta. As described above, during the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, the variation pattern determination table Tn1 is set when the first time-saving gaming state ends, and the production mode becomes the normal mode.

FIG. 10(a-2) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the variation pattern determination table referred to in each game during another period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set. In the specific example of FIG. 10(a-2), as in the specific example of FIG. 10(a-1) described above, it is assumed that the first time-saving gaming state ends at time ta. As described above, in the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, the variation pattern determination table Tn1 is set when the first time-saving gaming state ends, and after that, when the game is executed 690 times, the variation pattern determination table Tn2 is set. That is, after the jackpot game, the variation pattern determination table Tn2 is referred to from the 791st game. The variation pattern determination table Tn2 corresponds to the previous mode (see FIG. 9 above). In the above configuration, after the jackpot game, the immediately before mode is entered from the 791st game.

In the specific example of FIG. 10(a-2), it is assumed that the remaining number of times N is subtracted to the numerical value "0" at time tb, and the second time-saving game state is started. In the above case, the remaining number of times M of the time saving game state is set to the numerical value "1000" at time tb. Further, in the specific example of FIG. 10(a-2), it is assumed that the number of reservations is 1 or more at time tb, and the first game starts immediately after the start of the second time-saving game state. As described above, in the first game in the second time-saving game state during the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, the fluctuation pattern determination table Ts is referred to, and the rush effect is executed. Also, in the second and subsequent games in the second time-saving game state, the variation pattern determination table Tax is referred to, and the effect mode becomes the time-saving mode B.

FIG. 10(b) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the variation pattern determination table referred to in each game during the scenario unset period. As described above, the scenario unset period is triggered by the clear operation. When the clear operation is executed, the remaining number of times M is initialized to the initial value "0", and a low probability non-time-saving game state is entered. In addition, when the clear operation is executed, the remaining number of times N until the second time-saving game state is initialized to the numerical value "800". As shown in FIG. 10(b), in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state of the scenario unset period, the variation pattern determination table Tn1 is referred to, and the other variation pattern determination table T is not referred to.

In the specific example of FIG. 10(b), it is assumed that the remaining number of times N is subtracted to the numerical value "0" at time tb, and the second time-saving game state is started. Further, in the specific example of FIG. 10 (b), as in FIG. 10 (a-1) described above, the number of reservations is one or more at the start time tb of the second time-saving gaming state, and immediately after the time tb It is assumed that the 2 o'clock short game state is started. In the scenario unset period, when the second time-saving gaming state is started, the variation pattern determination table Tbx is set. The variation pattern determination table Tbx is referred to until the second time-saving gaming state ends. The variation pattern determination table Tbx corresponds to the time saving mode B (see FIG. 9 above). In the above configuration, the effect mode of the second time-saving game state is the time-saving mode B in any of the scenario setting period and the scenario non-setting period.

As can be understood from the above description, the first game in the second time-saving gaming state in the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set and the first game in the second time-saving gaming state in the period in which the scenario is not set, the variation referred to The pattern determination table T is different. Specifically, in the first game of the second time-saving gaming state in the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, the dedicated variation pattern determination table Ts is referred to, whereas the second time-saving gaming state in the scenario unset period In the first game of , reference is made to the variation pattern determination table Tbx, which is also referred to in subsequent games.

In a game in which the variation pattern determination table Ts is referred to, a longer variation pattern is likely to be determined than in a game in which the variation pattern determination table Tax is referred to and a game in which the variation pattern determination table Tbx is referred to. Specifically, in the game in which the variation pattern determination table Ts is referred to, various effects (rush effect, mode selection effect, etc.) when the second time-saving game state is started are executed. In a game in which the variation pattern determination table Ts is referred to, a variation pattern having a length that allows execution of the above effects is determined.

On the other hand, the variation pattern determination table Tbx is referred to in the first game of the second time-saving game state in the scenario unset period. In a game in which the variation pattern determination table Tbx is referred to, a shorter variation pattern is likely to be selected than in a game in which the variation pattern determination table Ts is referred to. Specifically, the variation pattern of the first game in the second time-saving game state in the scenario unset period is shorter in principle than the time during which the rush effect or the like is executed in the game in which the variation pattern determination table Ts is referred to.

From the above circumstances, in the first game of the second time-saving game state in the period when the scenario is not set, in principle, all the rush effects etc. executed in the first game of the second time-saving game state in the period when the table scenario Sb2 is set Cannot run. However, as will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS. 18(a) and 18(b), in the first game in the second time-saving gaming state in the scenario unset period, the first game in the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set An effect omitting a part of various effects (mode selection effect) executed in the first game in the 2 o'clock short game state is executed.

FIG. 11(a) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the variation pattern determination table T referred to in each game during the period in which the table scenario Sb3 is set. In the first time-saving game state (799 times) in which the table scenario Sb3 is set, similar to the first time-saving game state (100 times) in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, the variation pattern determination table Ta1 is changed in the game up to the 90th time. The variation pattern determination table Ta2 is referred to in the 91st to 99th games.

However, in the first time-saving game state (799 times) in which the table scenario Sb3 is set, the variation pattern determination table Tj2 is referred to in the 100th game. In the game in which the variation pattern determination table Tj2 is referred to, the continuation effect is executed after the judgment effect is executed. In the continuous effect, it is informed that the first time-saving game state continues. As described above, in the first time-saving game state (100 times) in which the table scenario Sb2 is set and the first time-saving game state (799 times) in which the table scenario Sb3 is set, the production mode in the game up to the 100th time is Common. Therefore, in the first time-saving game state (799 times) in which the table scenario Sb3 is set, it is difficult to grasp whether the first time-saving game state continues to the game after the 101st game until the continuous effect is executed ( (including cases where it is practically impossible).

In the first time-saving game state (799 times) in which the table scenario Sb3 is set, the variation pattern determination table Tax is referred to in the 101st to 799th (last) games. As described above, the production mode is the time saving mode B in the game in which the variation pattern determination table Tax is referred to.

When the game is executed 800 times in the low-probability game state (non-time-saving, time-saving), it shifts to the second time-saving game state. Therefore, when the 799 first time-saving game state ends, the second time-saving game state is started through one game of the non-time-saving low-probability game state. Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, one game executed between the first time-saving game state (799 times) and the second time-saving game state may be referred to as "gap game". As shown in FIG. 11(a), the variation pattern determination table Tnc is referred to in the gap game. In the game in which the variation pattern determination table Tnc is referred to, the production mode is the time saving mode B, similarly to the game in which the variation pattern determination table Tax is referred to.

In the specific example of FIG. 11(a), it is assumed that the second time-saving gaming state is started at time tb. Further, in the specific example of FIG. 11(a), it is assumed that the number of reservations is equal to or greater than the numerical value "1" at time tb. As shown in FIG. 11(a), in the second time-saving game state during the period in which the table scenario Sb3 is set, the variation pattern determination table Tax is referred to, including the first game and the game after the second time, and the effect mode is the time-saving game. Mode B. In addition, in the second time-saving game state during the period in which the table scenario Sb3 is set, various effects (rush effect, etc.) when the second time-saving game state is started in the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set are omitted. .

As can be understood from the above description, when the table scenario Sb3 is set, after shifting to the time saving mode B in the first time saving game state (799 times), the second time saving game state starts via the gap game. Over a series of games after that, the performance mode becomes the time-saving mode B. In the above configuration, the player can be made to recognize that the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state are a series of time-saving game states. However, in the period in which the table scenario Sb3 is set, it may be configured to notify that the first time-saving game state has ended (that the gap game has started) and that the second time-saving game state has started.

FIG. 11(b) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the variation pattern determination table referred to in each game during the period in which the table scenario Sb4 is set. The table scenario Sb4 is set when the first time-saving game state of 799 times is started in the same manner as when the table scenario Sb3 is set (see FIG. 11(a) described above).

As shown in FIG. 11B, when the table scenario Sb4 is set, the variation pattern determination table Tax is referred to from the first game to the last game in the first time-saving game state (799 times), and the effect mode is the time-saving game. Go to mode B. That is, in the period in which the table scenario Sb3 described above is set, after the continuous effect is executed in the game (100th game) in the middle of the first time saving game state (799 times), the transition to the time saving mode B is performed. During the period in which the scenario Sb4 is set, the first game in the first time-saving game state is shifted to the time-saving mode B. In the above configuration, in the period in which the table scenario Sb4 is set, the player is substantially notified that the first time-saving gaming state continues 799 times immediately after the first time-saving gaming state starts.

As shown in FIG. 11(b), in the period in which the table scenario Sb4 is set, the variation pattern determination table Tnc is referred to in the gap game in the same manner as in the period in which the table scenario Sb3 is set, and the subsequent second time-saving gaming state Then, the variation pattern determination table Tax is referred to. In addition, during the period in which the table scenario Sb4 is set, the production mode is the time reduction mode over a series of games of the first time reduction game state, the gap game and the second time reduction game state, as in the period in which the table scenario Sb3 is set. become B.

During the period in which the above table scenario Sb4 is set, the player is made to recognize that the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state are a series of time-saving game states, similar to the period in which the table scenario Sb3 is set. be able to. During the period in which the table scenario Sb4 is set, the rush effect is not executed at the start of the second time-saving gaming state, similarly to the period in which the table scenario Sb3 is set.

As can be understood from the above description, in the present embodiment, a specific game (for example, the first game) in the second time-saving gaming state (the first game refers to Tax or Ts) started in the scenario setting period The variation pattern determination table T to be referred to is variable with the specific variation display in the second time-saving game state (Tbx is referred to in the first game) started in the scenario unset period.

FIGS. 12 and 13(a) to 13(c) are conceptual diagrams of specific examples of the variation pattern determination table. In this embodiment, for each special symbol display device (first special symbol display device 20, second special symbol display device 21), a random number for special symbol determination (won or lose a big hit), a random number for big hit symbol (big hit symbol), the number of reserved special symbols, the random number for reach determination, and the random number for special symbol variation, the variation pattern is determined. 12 and 13(a) to 13(c), the numbers in the column of "reserved number" mean the number of reserved special figures corresponding to the column.

The main CPU 111 determines a variation pattern when the special symbols start to vary. In addition, the main CPU 111 generates a variation pattern specification command that can specify the determined variation pattern. The above variation pattern specification command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 120 in the output control process.

FIG. 12 and FIGS. 13(a) to 13(c) show effects (such as reach) executed by the effect executing means (eg, the image display device 31) when each variation pattern is determined. "Reach" in the present embodiment means that after a part of the combinations of the performance symbols GA for notifying the shift to the special game (big hit game) is stopped and displayed, the rest of the performance symbols GA are displayed in a variable manner. means a continued state. For example, it is assumed that a combination of three performance symbols GA of "777" is set as the combination of performance symbols GA for notifying that the game will shift to a big hit game. In the above case, the state in which the two performance symbols GA are stopped at "7" and the remaining performance symbols GA are variably displayed is "reach".

Although detailed description is omitted, the variation pattern designation command of the present embodiment includes a first telegram indicating MODE and a second telegram indicating DATA. The first telegram (MODE) of the variation pattern specifying command indicating the variation pattern determined at the start of the variation display of the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 20 is "E6H". On the other hand, the first electronic message (MODE) of the variation pattern specifying command indicating the variation pattern determined when the second special symbol display device 21 starts the variation display of the special symbols becomes "E7H". The second telegram (DATA) of the variation pattern designation command indicates a specific variation pattern number.

<Variation pattern determination table for non-time-saving gaming state>
FIG. 12 is a conceptual diagram of an example of a variation pattern determination table used in a low-probability non-time-saving gaming state. As described above, any one of the variation pattern determination table Tn1, the variation pattern determination table Tn2 and the variation pattern determination table Tnc is referred to in the low probability non-time saving gaming state. FIG. 12 is a conceptual diagram of the fluctuation pattern determination table Tn1 among the above fluctuation pattern determination tables. It should be noted that the "variation time" shown in Figure 12 and Figures 13 (a) to (c) described later means the time from the start of the variation of the special figure to the end of the fixed period.

In the variation pattern determination table Tn1, as the variation patterns of the special symbols of the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21, variation pattern a (1x to 3x), variation pattern b (1x to 6x), variation pattern Any one of c (1x to 6x), variation pattern dx, variation pattern ex, variation pattern fx, and variation pattern g is determined.

The main CPU 111 determines the type of special symbol display device, the type of special symbol (a combination of a random number for special symbol determination and a random number for symbol), the number of reserved special symbols, the random number for reach determination, and the random number for special symbol variation. to determine any of the variation patterns. The random number for reach determination has a random number range of "0 to 99" and is obtained before determining the variation pattern. Also, the random number for special symbol variation has a random number range of "0 to 99" and is obtained before determining the variation pattern.

However, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the ready-to-win effect is always executed in the variation pattern in which the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol among the special symbols is stop-displayed. However, it may be configured such that the ready-to-win effect may not be executed in the variation pattern in which the small winning symbols among the special symbols are stopped and displayed. Therefore, when the special symbol corresponding to the big win or the small win is stopped and displayed, the reach determination random number value is not used in determining the variation pattern.

FIG. 12 shows an effect executed by the effect executing means such as the image display device 31 when the special symbol display device is variably displayed in each variation pattern. For example, in the variation pattern a (1x to 3x), a "normal ready-to-win effect" is executed. The "normal ready-to-win performance" described above is a ready-to-win performance in which the left and right symbols of the performance symbols GA displayed on the image display device 31 are temporarily stopped and the middle symbols fluctuate, and the expectation of winning the jackpot is relatively low.

In the variation pattern b (x1 to x6), "SP ready-to-win effect" is executed. The "SP ready-to-win effect" described above is a ready-to-win effect in which the left and right symbols of the effect symbols GA displayed on the image display device 31 are temporarily stopped in the same manner as the above-described normal ready-to-win effect. However, in the SP ready-to-win effect, a specific moving image (reach movie) that is not displayed in the normal ready-to-win effect is displayed on the image display device 31 . When the above SP ready-to-win effect is executed, the possibility of being notified of the winning of the big win (the same three effect symbols GA are displayed) is higher than that of the normal ready-to-win effect.

In the variation pattern c (x1 to x6), "SPSP ready-to-win effect" is executed. The above "SPSP ready-to-win effect" is a ready-to-win effect in which the left and right symbols of the effect symbols GA displayed on the image display device 31 are temporarily stopped, like other ready-to-win effects. However, in the SPSP ready-to-win effect, a specific moving image that is not displayed in other ready-to-win effects is displayed on the image display device 31 . When the above SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed, there is a higher possibility that a big win will be reported after that than the SP ready-to-win effect.

In this embodiment, in the game in which the SP ready-to-win effect is executed, the normal ready-to-win effect is executed before the SP ready-to-win effect. That is, it develops from normal reach production to SP reach production. Further, in the game in which the SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed, the normal ready-to-win effect develops to the SP ready-to-win effect, and the SP ready-to-win effect develops to the SPSP ready-to-win effect. However, there may be a case where the normal reach effect is directly developed into the SPSP reach effect.

For example, it is assumed that the first special symbol display device 20 stops displaying a special symbol A1 (big hit). In the above case, as shown in FIG. 12, if the special symbol variation random number is any of the numerical values "0 to 3", the variation pattern a1x is determined. In the above fluctuation pattern a1x, the first special symbol display device 20 is variably displayed over approximately 40000 ms. In addition, in the variation pattern a1x, the image display device 31 executes a normal ready-to-win effect, and executes an effect of notifying the variable probability big hit.

When the special symbol A1 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20, the variation pattern b1x is determined if the special symbol variation random number value is any of the numerical values "4 to 15". Also, if the random number for special symbol variation is any of the numerical values "16 to 34", the variation pattern b2x is determined. Furthermore, if the random number for special symbol variation is any of the numerical values "35 to 65", the variation pattern c1x is determined, and if the random number for special symbol variation is any of the numerical values "66 to 98", variation If the pattern c2x is determined and the special symbol variation random number value is "99", the variation pattern g is determined.

In the fluctuation pattern b1x, the first special symbol display device 20 is variably displayed over approximately 60000 ms. In addition, in the variation pattern b1x, the SP reach 1 effect is executed in the image display device 31, and the probability variation big hit is reported. Similarly, in the variation pattern b2x, the first special symbol display device 20 is variably displayed over about 60000 ms, the SP reach 2 effect is executed on the image display device 31, and the probability variation big hit is notified.

In the fluctuation pattern c1x, the first special symbol display device 20 is variably displayed over approximately 70000 ms. In addition, in the variation pattern c1x, the SPSP reach 1 effect is executed in the image display device 31, and a variable probability big hit is announced. Similarly, in the variation pattern c2x, the first special symbol display device 20 is variably displayed over about 70000 ms, the SPSP reach 2 effect is executed on the image display device 31, and the probability variation big hit is notified. In the variation pattern g, the first special symbol display device 20 is variably displayed over about 80000 ms, the image display device 31 executes the all-rotation ready-to-win effect, and the probability variation big hit is notified.

When the special symbol A2 (short hit probability variation) is stop-displayed on the first special symbol display device 20, the variation pattern dx is determined regardless of the special symbol variation random number value. In the above fluctuation pattern dx, the first special symbol display device 20 is variably displayed over approximately 20000 ms. Further, in the variation pattern dx, the image display device 31 executes a short hit effect. The above short hit production is a production for notifying that a small hit or a short hit (probability variable big hit) has been won.

As shown in FIG. 12, when the special symbol A3 (normal jackpot) is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20, if the random number for special symbol variation is any of the numerical values "0 to 3", the variation pattern a2x is determined. In the above fluctuation pattern a2x, the first special symbol display device 20 is variably displayed over approximately 40000 ms. Further, in the variation pattern a2x, the image display device 31 executes a normal ready-to-win effect, and a normal jackpot notification effect is executed.

When the special symbol A3 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20, the variation pattern b3x is determined if the special symbol variation random number value is any of the numerical values "4 to 15". Also, if the random number for special symbol variation is any of the numerical values "16 to 34", the variation pattern b4x is determined, and if the random number for special symbol variation is any of the numerical values "35 to 65", variation If the pattern c3x is determined and the special symbol variation random number is any of the numerical values "66 to 99", the variation pattern c4x is determined.

In the fluctuation pattern b3x, the first special symbol display device 20 is variably displayed over approximately 60000 ms. Further, in the variation pattern b3x, the SP reach 1 effect is executed in the image display device 31, and a normal big hit is notified. Similarly, in the variation pattern b4x, the first special symbol display device 20 is variably displayed over about 60000 ms, the SP reach 2 effect is executed on the image display device 31, and a normal jackpot is notified.

In the fluctuation pattern c3x, the first special symbol display device 20 is variably displayed over about 70000 ms. Further, in the variation pattern c3x, the SPSP reach 1 effect is executed in the image display device 31, and a normal jackpot is announced. Similarly, in the variation pattern c4x, the first special symbol display device 20 is variably displayed over about 70000 ms, the SPSP reach 2 effect is executed on the image display device 31, and a normal jackpot is announced.

When the special symbol K (small hit) is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20, as in the case where the special symbol A2 (probability variable short hit) is stopped and displayed, regardless of the special symbol variation random value, A variation pattern dx is determined.

As shown in FIG. 12, when the special symbol H is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20, the variation pattern according to the combination of the first special symbol reservation number, the random number for reach determination and the random number for special symbol variation. is determined.

For example, it is assumed that the number of reserved first special symbols is "0 to 2". In the above case, if the random value for reach determination is "0 to 69", the change pattern ex is determined without executing the reach effect. In the above fluctuation pattern ex, the first special symbol display device 20 is variably displayed over approximately 3000 ms. In addition, in the variation pattern ex, an effect of notifying a failure is executed after the normal effect (normal variation) is executed.

On the other hand, when the first special symbol reserved number is "0 to 2", if the random number value for reach determination is "70 to 99", the reach performance corresponding to the random number value for special symbol variation is executed. Specifically, if the random number for special symbol variation is any of the numerical values "0 to 27", the variation pattern a3x is determined. Also, if the random number for special symbol variation is any of the numerical values "28 to 48", the variation pattern b5x is determined, and if the random number for special symbol variation is any of the numerical values "49 to 77", variation A pattern b6x is determined. Furthermore, if the random number for special symbol variation is any of the numerical values "78 to 88", the variation pattern c5x is determined, and if the random number for special symbol variation is any of the numerical values "89 to 99", variation A pattern c6x is determined.

In the fluctuation pattern a3x, the first special symbol display device 20 is variably displayed over approximately 35000 ms. Further, in the variation pattern a3x, the image display device 31 executes a normal ready-to-win effect, and a loss is notified.

In the fluctuation pattern b5x, the first special symbol display device 20 is variably displayed over about 55000 ms. Also, in the variation pattern b5x, the SP reach 1 effect is executed in the image display device 31, and a loss is notified. Similarly, in the variation pattern b6x, the first special symbol display device 20 is variably displayed over about 55000 ms, the SP reach 2 effect is executed on the image display device 31, and a loss is notified.

In the fluctuation pattern c5x, the first special symbol display device 20 is variably displayed over approximately 65000 ms. Further, in the variation pattern c5x, the SPSP reach 1 effect is executed in the image display device 31, and a loss is notified. Similarly, in the variation pattern c6x, the first special symbol display device 20 is variably displayed over about 65000 ms, the SPSP ready-to-win 2 effect is executed on the image display device 31, and a loss is notified.

Also, it is assumed that the number of reserved first special symbols is "3" when the special symbol H is stopped and displayed. In the above case, if the random number for ready-to-win determination is "0 to 89", the ready-to-win effect is not executed, and the variation pattern fx is determined regardless of the random number for special symbol variation. In the above fluctuation pattern fx, the first special symbol display device 20 is variably displayed over about 2000 ms. In addition, in the variation pattern fx, an effect of notifying a failure is executed after the normal effect is executed.

On the other hand, when the first special symbol reserved number is "3", if the reach determination random number value is "90 to 99", the reach performance corresponding to the special symbol variation random number value is executed. Specifically, if the random number for special symbol variation is any of the numerical values "0 to 27", the variation pattern a3x is determined. Also, if the random number for special symbol variation is any of the numerical values "28 to 48", the variation pattern b5x is determined, and if the random number for special symbol variation is any of the numerical values "49 to 77", variation A pattern b6x is determined. Furthermore, if the random number for special symbol variation is any of the numerical values "78 to 88", the variation pattern c5x is determined, and if the random number for special symbol variation is any of the numerical values "89 to 99", variation A pattern c6x is determined. Although detailed description is omitted, the variation pattern in the non-time-saving gaming state of the second special symbol display device 21 is determined by the same method as the variation pattern of the first special symbol display device 20 described above.

<Variation pattern determination table for time saving gaming state>
FIG. 13(a) to FIG. 13(c) are conceptual diagrams of an example of a variation pattern determination table used in a low-probability time-saving gaming state. As described above, in the time-saving gaming state (first time-saving gaming state, second time-saving gaming state), variation pattern determination table Ta1, variation pattern determination table Ta2, variation pattern determination table Tj1, variation pattern determination table Tj2, variation pattern determination table Any one of Tax, variation pattern determination table Ts and variation pattern determination table Tbx is referred to.

FIG. 13(a) is a conceptual diagram of a specific example of the variation pattern determination table Tax. The variation pattern determination table Tax is referred to, for example, in the second time-saving game state started (via the jackpot game) during the scenario setting period in which the table scenario S is set.

As shown in FIG. 13(a), in a game in which the variation pattern determination table Tax is referred to, one of the variation patterns J1a to J1n is determined by lottery. In the above game, as the variation pattern of the second special figure, "immediate hit effect (probable variable big hit, normal big hit)", "straight line effect (probable variable big hit, normal big hit)", "7 pattern reach (probable variable big hit)", " Variation patterns (J1a to J1k) in which short variation (losing),” “straight line false effect (losing)”, and “reach swing (losing)” are executed can be determined. In addition, in the above game, as the variation pattern of the first special figure, the variation patterns (J1l to J1n) in which "special 1 hit (probability variable jackpot, normal jackpot)" and "special 1 loss (loss)" are executed are determined. obtain. However, in the time-saving gaming state, since the game is played with the right hand and the second special figure fluctuates, the fluctuation pattern J1k is usually determined from the fluctuation pattern J1a.

The instant hit performance is a performance in which the time from the start of the variation of the special figure to the notification of the winning of the big hit is relatively short. For example, in the immediate hit production, after about 0.5 seconds from the start of the variation of the special figure, the production pattern GA (for example, "777") corresponding to the big hit pattern is displayed (temporarily stopped). In addition, after the production design GA stops (after about 0.5 seconds), for example, the production design GA corresponding to the special design B2 (normal design) corresponds to the special design B1 (variable design). An effect to be promoted to the effect symbol GA is executed. Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, the performance symbol GA corresponding to the big-hit symbol may be referred to as "big-hit performance symbol GA". In the immediate hit effect described above, the ready-to-win effect is not executed, and the variable display of the three symbol images stops substantially simultaneously. It should be noted that the length of the immediate hit effect can be changed as appropriate. For example, in the immediate hit effect, the big win effect pattern GA is stopped and displayed about 0.5 seconds after the start of the special figure fluctuation, and after that, the big win game starts after about 0.5 seconds of confirmation period. It may be configured to be

The direct alignment effect is an effect in which the big win effect pattern GA is stopped and displayed without executing the ready-to-win effect, as in the immediate hit effect. However, the time from the start of the variable display of the special figure to the announcement of the winning of the big hit game is longer in the straight line effect than the immediate hit effect. For example, in the direct matching effect, the big hit effect symbol GA is displayed (temporarily stopped) after about 15 seconds from the start of the variable display of the special figure. The straight-aligned fake effect is an effect in which the same effect as the straight-aligned effect is executed halfway, and finally, the effect pattern GA corresponding to the failure is stopped and displayed.

The 7-symbol ready-to-win is an effect in which a jackpot effect pattern GA (a combination of 777 symbols) corresponding to the probability variable jackpot is displayed. Specifically, in the 7-symbol ready-to-win, two performance symbols GA representing the number "7" are temporarily stopped, the ready-to-win performance is executed, and then the big-hit performance symbol GA representing the symbol combination "777" is displayed. be. For example, in the 7-pattern reach, after about 20 seconds from the start of the variation of the special figure, the ready-to-win production is executed (probably variable big hit is substantially notified), and then after about 20 seconds, the big hit production pattern GA is displayed. be. As can be seen from FIG. 13(a), the 7-symbol reach is the longest (about 50 seconds) among the variation patterns that can be determined in the game in which the variation pattern determination table Tax is referred to. In the ready-to-win game, the same effect as the seven-symbol ready-to-win game is executed halfway through, and finally the ready-to-win effect is not executed, and the effect pattern GA corresponding to the failure is stopped and displayed. According to the above ready-to-win provocation, it is possible to improve the expectation that the 7-symbol ready-to-win game may be executed.

Short variation (loss) is an effect in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed and the effect symbol GA corresponding to the loss is stopped and displayed. Specifically, in the short fluctuation, the production pattern GA is stopped and displayed after about 0.5 seconds from the start of the special figure fluctuation, and then the production pattern GA is stopped and displayed for a fixed period of 0.5 seconds. state is maintained. The long variation (loss) is an effect in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed and the effect symbol GA corresponding to the loss is stopped and displayed. Specifically, in the long variation, the effect symbol GA is stopped and displayed after about 3.5 seconds from the start of the special figure variation, and then the effect symbol GA is stopped and displayed for a fixed period of 0.5 seconds. state is maintained.

As can be understood from FIG. 13(a), the instant hit effect is executed with a probability of about 8/10 in the game in which the probability variable jackpot or the normal jackpot is won. That is, in the second time-saving gaming state (the game in which Tax is referred to), the instant hit effect is executed in most (about 80%) of the games in which the big hit is won. However, the probability that the instant hit effect is executed can be appropriately changed. For example, it may be executed with a probability of about 1/10 when winning a variable probability jackpot and with a probability of about 1/2 when winning a normal jackpot. In the above configuration, the expectation for the probability variable big win can be improved when the straight line effect and the 7-symbol ready-to-win are executed than when the immediate hit effect is executed. That is, it can be said that the longer the time until the big-hit performance symbol GA is displayed, the more the expectation for the variable-probability big-hit can be improved.

The instant hit effect and the direct match effect described above can be executed both when the normal jackpot is won and when the probability variable jackpot is won. On the other hand, the 7-symbol ready-to-win can be executed only when winning the probability variable jackpot. In the above configuration, in the time saving mode B in which the variation pattern determination table Tax is referred to (see FIG. 9 described above), when the ready-to-win effect is executed with 7 symbols, the probability variable big hit is substantially notified. Therefore, in the time-saving mode B, it is possible to improve the interest of the effect (7-symbol reach, reach-influence) in which the presence or absence of execution of the reach effect is notified. However, in the game of the time-saving mode B in which the big hit lottery is lost, the ready-to-win effect can be executed with 7 symbols.

FIG. 13(b) is a conceptual diagram of a specific example of the variation pattern determination table Tbx. The variation pattern determination table Tbx is referred to in the second time-saving game state started in the scenario unset period (without going through the jackpot game). In addition, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern determination table T to be referred to in the second time-saving gaming state is different depending on whether the jackpot game is passed or not, but in each of the above cases, the variation pattern determination table T may be common.

As shown in FIG. 13(b), in the game in which the variation pattern determination table Tbx is referred to, the variation pattern J2g can be determined from the variation pattern J2a. In the game in which the variation pattern J2a is determined, the above-described immediate hit effect (probability variable big win) is executed. Further, in the game in which the variation pattern J2b is determined, the above-described immediate hit effect (normal jackpot) is executed, in the game in which the variation pattern J2c is determined, the above-described short variation (losing) is performed, and the variation pattern J2d is performed. In the determined game, the above-described long variation (losing) is performed, in the game in which the variation pattern J2e is determined, the above-described immediate hit effect (variable big hit) is performed, In the game in which the variation pattern J2f is determined, In the game in which the above-described immediate hit effect (normal jackpot) is executed and the variation pattern J2g is determined, the above-described special 1 loss (loss) is executed.

As understood from the above description, the 7-symbol ready-to-win which is performed in the game in which the variation pattern determination table Tax is referred to is not performed in the game in which the variation pattern determination table Tbx is referred to. Further, the variation pattern determination table Tbx is referred to in the second time-saving game state, and the variation pattern determination table Tax is referred to in the first time-saving game state (see FIG. 9 described above). The above configuration can also be rephrased that the variation pattern that can be determined is variable between the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state.

FIG. 13(c) is a conceptual diagram of a specific example of the variation pattern determination table Ta1. The variation pattern determination table Ta1 is referred to from the 1st to the 90th game in the first time-saving game state in which the table scenario Sb2 or the table scenario Sb3 is set.

As described above, the period in which the variation pattern determination table Ta1 (Ta2) is referred to is the time saving mode A, and the period in which the variation pattern determination table Tax (Tbx) is referred to is the time saving mode B. Therefore, as can be seen from FIGS. 13(a) to 13(c), the game (time saving mode A) in which the variation pattern determination table Ta1 is referred to, and the game in which the variation pattern determination table Tax (Tbx) is referred to ( The effects that can be executed are different in the time saving mode B). Specifically, the production executed in one production mode of the time saving mode A and the time saving mode B is not executed in the other production mode. However, you may provide the production|presentation performed in both the time saving mode A and the time saving mode B in common. In other words, although the effects executed in each effect mode are different in principle, a specific effect may be executed in common in each effect mode. Moreover, it is good also as a structure with all the production|presentations performed in the time saving mode A and the time saving mode B being common. Furthermore, although the production|presentation performed by each production|presentation mode is common in principle, it is good also as a structure performed only by one production|presentation mode about specific production|presentation.

In the present embodiment, in each game in which the variation pattern determination table Tax is referred to, the average time of the period during which the effect symbol GA is variably displayed (the period during which the symbol image is scrolled) (hereinafter simply referred to as the “average variation of the effect symbol GA time") is shorter than the average variation time of the effect symbols GA in each game with reference to the variation pattern determination table Ta1 and the average variation time of the effect symbols GA in each game with reference to the variation pattern determination table Ta2. That is, the average variation time of the effect symbol GA is shorter in the second time-saving game state than in the first time-saving game state in the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set. Also, the average variation time of the performance symbols GA in the period in which the variation pattern determination table Tbx is referred to is shorter than the average variation time of the performance symbols GA in each game in which the other variation pattern determination table T is referred to. However, depending on the table scenario S, the average variation time of the effect symbol GA may be shorter in the first time-saving game state than in the second time-saving game state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the average variation time of the effect symbol GA is the number of games in which the jackpot is won in the second time-saving gaming state more than the game in which the jackpot is won in the first time-saving gaming state, during the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set. shorter. However, depending on the table scenario S, the average fluctuation time of the performance symbols GA may be shorter in the game in which the jackpot is won in the first time-saving game state than in the game in which the jackpot is won in the second time-saving game state. .

As described above, the remaining number N stored in the main RAM 113 is decremented by "1" in each game, and when the remaining number N is decremented to "0", the second time-saving game state is started. The above remaining number of times N is retained by the backup power supply even when the power is turned off. Therefore, it is possible to leave the previous day's remaining number of times N unchanged at the opening of the game arcade in which the game machine 1 is installed. However, if a clear operation is performed when power supply to the gaming machine 1 is started, the remaining count N is initialized.

In the present embodiment, whether or not the remaining number of times N before power-off is left untouched immediately after the start of the game is concealed, and thereafter, a configuration is adopted in which notification is possible. According to the above configuration, there is an advantage that the player can be given the pleasure of predicting whether or not the remaining number of times N will remain unchanged in the period immediately after the start of the game. The above configuration will be described in detail below.

FIG. 14A is a schematic diagram of a screen displayed on the image display device 31. FIG. Specifically, FIG. 14(a) is a schematic diagram of a screen displayed on the image display device 31 in the low probability non-time-saving gaming state. The image display device 31 provides, in each game, a production symbol GA (x, y, w), a pending image GB (x, y), a fourth symbol GC (1, 2), a pending number image GD (1, 2) and Various images including the small pattern Ga are displayed.

The effect symbol GA is variably displayed during the period when the special symbol display devices (20, 21) are variably displayed, and is statically displayed during the period when the special symbol display device is statically displayed. In addition, the effect symbol GA stops and displays a combination of symbols corresponding to the special symbols that are stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device. A specific example of FIG. 14(a) assumes a case where a lost symbol (special symbol H) is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device. In the above case, for example, the performance symbol GA stops displaying the symbol combination "782".

In addition, the performance symbol GA stops displaying the symbol combination (for example, "777") corresponding to the big winning symbol when the special symbol display device stops displaying the big winning symbol. Similarly, the performance symbol GA stops displaying a symbol combination (for example, "757") corresponding to the small winning design when the special symbol display device stops displaying the small winning design. The production design GA includes production design GAx (see FIG. 14(a)), production design GAy (see FIG. 17(b)) and production design GAw. The production pattern GAx is displayed in the normal mode and the previous mode. Also, the production pattern GAy is displayed in the time saving mode A, and the production pattern GAw is displayed in the time saving mode B.

The fourth symbol GC indicates the fluctuation state of the special symbol display devices (20, 21). Specifically, the fourth symbol GC is stopped and displayed during the period when the special symbol display device is stopped and displayed. For example, during the period in which the special symbol display device is statically displayed, the fourth symbol GC is statically displayed in the first color (for example, white). On the other hand, the fourth symbol GC is variably displayed during the period when the special symbol display device is variably displayed. For example, the fourth pattern GC is alternately displayed in the first color and the second color (for example, red) during the period when the special pattern display device is variably displayed.

The fourth pattern GC includes a fourth pattern GC1 and a fourth pattern GC2. A fourth symbol GC1 indicates a variation mode of the first special symbol display device 20, and a fourth symbol GC2 indicates a variation mode of the second special symbol display device 21. FIG. Specifically, the fourth symbol GC1 is variably displayed during the period when the first special symbol display device 20 is variably displayed, and is statically displayed during the period when the first special symbol display device 20 is statically displayed. Similarly, the fourth symbol GC2 is variably displayed during the period when the second special symbol display device 21 is variably displayed, and is statically displayed during the period when the second special symbol display device 21 is statically displayed.

In the present embodiment, a common fourth symbol GC is displayed in the low probability non-work-time-saving gaming state, the low-probability time-saving gaming state, and the high-probability time-saving gaming state. That is, the common fourth symbol GC is displayed in the low-probability non-time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, and the high-probability time-saving game state. Specifically, a common fourth symbol GC is displayed in each game state except for the big hit game. However, the configuration may be such that different fourth symbols GC are displayed according to the game state. Also, in the jackpot game, the configuration may be such that the fourth symbol GC is displayed.

The pending number image GD(1, 2) displays the pending number (first pending number, second pending number). Specifically, the pending number image GD includes a pending number image GD1 and a pending number image GD2. The pending number image GD1 displays the first pending number. Also, the number of reservations image GD2 displays the second number of reservations. In the specific example of FIG. 14(a), it is assumed that the number of first reservations is four and the number of second reservations is zero.

The holding number image GD of the present embodiment is common in the low probability non-time-saving gaming state, the low probability time-saving gaming state, and the high probability time-saving gaming state, similarly to the above-described fourth symbol GC. That is, in the low-probability non-time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, and the high-probability time-saving game state, the common pending number image GD is displayed. Specifically, a common pending number image GD is displayed in each game state except for the jackpot game. However, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which different pending number images GD are displayed according to the game state. Further, in the jackpot game, the configuration may be such that the number-of-holds image GD is displayed.

The small pattern Ga is composed of three patterns (upper pattern, middle pattern, and lower pattern) in the same manner as the effect pattern GA. In addition, the small symbol Ga is variably displayed during the period when the special symbol display devices (20, 21) are variably displayed, and is statically displayed during the period when the special symbol display device is statically displayed. In this embodiment, the effect symbol GA may be temporarily hidden depending on the effect to be executed. Even in the above cases, the small pattern Ga is continuously displayed in principle.

The small symbols Ga stop-display the symbol combinations corresponding to the big-hit symbols when the big-hit symbols are statically displayed on the special symbol display device. Further, the small symbol Ga stops displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning symbol when the special symbol display device stops displaying the small winning symbol. Similarly, for the small symbols Ga, when the special symbol display device stops and displays the missing symbols, the symbol combination corresponding to the missing symbols is stopped and displayed. Further, the small symbols Ga are, in principle, stopped and displayed in the same manner as the performance symbols GA when the performance symbols GA are stopped and displayed. For example, when a big win is won and the production pattern GA is stopped and displayed at ``7.7.7'', the small pattern GA is also stopped at ``7.7.7'' and a small prize is won and the production pattern is displayed. When the GA is stop-displayed at "7.5.7", the small pattern Ga is also stop-displayed at "7.5.7".

In this embodiment, a common small symbol Ga is displayed in the low probability non-work-time-saving gaming state, the low-probability time-saving gaming state, and the high-probability time-saving gaming state. That is, in the low-probability non-time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, and the high-probability time-saving game state, the common small symbol Ga is displayed. Specifically, common small symbols Ga are displayed in each game state except for the big hit game. However, in the jackpot game, the small symbol Ga may be displayed. In this embodiment, the common small symbol Ga is displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol display device 20 and the variable display of the second special symbol display device 21, but the first special symbol display A small pattern Ga corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol display device 21 may be provided separately from the small pattern Ga corresponding to the variable display of the device 20 . In that case, the small symbol Ga corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol display device 21 may be in a common display mode with the small symbol Ga corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol display device 20. A display mode different from the small symbol Ga corresponding to the variable display of the 1 special symbol display device 20 may be used.

In this embodiment, a different background image GH is displayed for each effect mode. For example, in the normal mode and the previous mode, a background image GHx (an example of the first background image) is displayed (see FIG. 14(a)). However, the background image GH may be shared in all or part of each effect mode. The reserved images GB include a reserved image GBx (see FIG. 14(a)), a reserved image GBy (see FIG. 17(b)), and a reserved image GBw (see FIG. 17(a)). In the reserved image GBx, in the normal mode and the immediately preceding mode, the above-described random value (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "determination information") is stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area (first storage unit to fourth storage unit). displayed when Specifically, a plurality of reserved images GBx corresponding to each determination information stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area are displayed. The reserved image GBy is displayed in the time saving mode A when the determination information is stored in the second special symbol reserved storage area. The reserved image GBw is displayed in the time saving mode B when the determination information is stored in the second special symbol reserved storage area.

As shown in FIG. 14(a), the number-of-games image GE is displayed in the normal mode and the previous mode. The number-of-games image GE displays the number of games in the low-probability gaming state. Therefore, when the number displayed by the number-of-games image GE ("550" in the specific example of FIG. 14(a)) is added to "800", then the transition from the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state to the second time-saving gaming state be possible. In the above configuration, there is an advantage that the player can easily grasp the number of games played until the transition to the second time-saving gaming state.

However, when the gaming machine 1 is powered off and then turned on (turned off/on), regardless of the value of the remaining number N stored in the main RAM 113, the number-of-games image GE is displayed as a number. Display "0". That is, when the power is turned off/on while the remaining number N is subtracted from the initial value "800", the game number image GE displays the number "0" although the remaining number N is not the initial value. In the above case, before the game number image GE displays the number "800", the remaining number N is subtracted to the number "0", and the second time saving game state is started. On the other hand, if the clear operation is performed when the power is turned on, the remaining count N is initialized. In the above case, in the game in which the game number image GE is added to the number "800", the remaining number N is subtracted to the number "0", and the second time saving game state is started.

As can be understood from the above description, it is not possible to grasp whether or not the remaining count N is left unchanged (whether or not there is a clear operation) in the period immediately after the power is turned off and on. Specifically, in the period immediately after the power is turned off/on, the number of games up to the second time-saving gaming state cannot be specified from the number-of-games image GE. With the above configuration, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting whether or not the remaining number of times N will remain unchanged in the period immediately after the start of the game.

FIG. 14B is a diagram showing a specific example of the stationary notification image GI. The deferment notification image GI is displayed on condition that the remaining number of times N is deferred before and after the power is turned off/on. Also, the stationary notification image GI is displayed in the area RI of the screen shown in FIG. Specifically, the stationary notification image GI is the 51st game since the power was turned on (the game in which the number of the number of games image GE is added to "50"), or the 101st game after the power is turned on (the number of games image GE). number is added to "100").

According to the above configuration, it is notified that the remaining number of times N has been deferred by the deferment notification image GI. The number in the number-of-games image GE is added at the end of the game (at the time of receiving the confirmation command). Therefore, it can also be said that the upper position notification image GI is started to be displayed in a game in which the number of game times image GE is "50" at the start or in a game in which the number of game times image GE is "100" at the time of start. be. Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, "a game in which the number of game times image GE is "X" at the start" (a game in which the number of game number image GE is added to "X+1" at the end) is simply referred to as "game number image GE". The number may be described as "X" game".

In addition, the stationary notification image GI is displayed on the condition that the remaining number of times N is equal to or less than the numerical value "200" in the specific number of games. For example, in the 51st game since the power was turned on, if the remaining number of times N is equal to or less than "200", the stationary notification image GI is displayed in the game. On the other hand, in the 51st game since the power was turned on, if the remaining number of times N is greater than the numerical value "200", the stationary notification image GI is not displayed in the game. However, even if the stationary notification image GI is not displayed in the 51st game after the power is turned on, if the remaining number of times N is subtracted to the numerical value "200" or less in the 101st game after the power is turned on, 101 will be displayed after the power is turned on. A stationary notification image GI is displayed in the first game. It should be noted that the stationary notification image GI is displayed in a common manner regardless of whether it is displayed in the 51st game after the power is turned on or in the 101st game after the power is turned on.

Even in the 101st game after the power is turned on, if the remaining number of times N is greater than the numerical value "200", the stationary notification image GI is not displayed even if the remaining number of times N is left unchanged. Also, the stationary notification image GI is displayed for a predetermined period of time, and then disappears (see FIG. 14(d), which will be described later). Furthermore, if the stationary notification image GI is displayed in the 51st game after the power is turned on, it is not displayed in the 101st game after the power is turned on. A configuration in which a predetermined sound is output when the stationary notification image GI is displayed is preferable.

FIG. 14C is a diagram showing a specific example of the remaining count image GN. The remaining number image GN displays the actual remaining number of games until the second time-saving game state is started. That is, the remaining number image GN displays the current value of the remaining number N. FIG. The remaining number of times image GN is displayed, for example, in the area RN of the screen shown in FIG. 14(a). In this embodiment, both the number-of-games image GE and the number-of-games-to-remain image GN are displayed simultaneously (in parallel). However, the remaining number of times image GN is not displayed in the period immediately after the power is turned on. With the above configuration, the current value of the remaining number of times N can be kept secret in the period immediately after the power is turned on.

The remaining number image GN starts to be displayed from the game in which the stationary notification image GI is displayed, and is displayed in the subsequent normal mode and previous mode games. However, as described above, the stationary notification image GI may not be displayed even once. In the above case, the display of the remaining number of times image GN starts in the 101st game after the power is turned on. Note that the remaining number of times image GN may be temporarily hidden during a period in which a predetermined effect (for example, SP ready-to-win or SPSP ready-to-play) is executed.

FIG. 14D is a diagram for explaining a specific example of a period during which the stationary notification image GI is displayed and a period during which the remaining number of times image GN is displayed in a game in which the stationary notification image GI is displayed. . In FIG. 14(d), it is assumed that the game in which the stationary notification image GI is displayed starts at time ts and ends at time te.

As shown in FIG. 14(d), the stationary notification image GI starts to be displayed immediately after the game is started, and disappears after a predetermined time. At substantially the same time that the stationary notification image GI is hidden, the display of the remaining number of times image GN is started. The remaining number of times image GN is continuously displayed in subsequent games, and is hidden after the second time-saving game state is started. In the above configuration, the stationary notification image GI is displayed prior to the remaining number of times image GN. Therefore, after notifying that the remaining number of times N has been deferred by the deferment notification image GI, the actual remaining number of times N is notified by the remaining number of times image GN.

Suppose a contrast in which the remaining number of times image GN is displayed prior to the stationary notification image GI. Whether or not the number-of-games image N is left in place can be determined from the actual number of games played since the power was turned on (the number displayed by the number-of-games image GE) and the number displayed by the number-of-games image GN. For example, when the remaining number image GN displays a number other than "700" in the 101st game after the power is turned on, it is understood that the remaining number N is left unchanged. Therefore, in the above-described comparison, whether or not the remaining number of times N has been deferred is substantially notified before the stationary notification image GI is displayed. occurs. According to this embodiment, the above inconvenience is suppressed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14(d), the stationary notification image GI starts to be displayed in the opening period Pf of the game, and disappears before the opening period Pf ends. The opening period Pf described above is a predetermined period of time after the start of the game. Specifically, when the ready-to-win effect is executed in a game in which the stationary notification image GI can be displayed, the opening period Pf is a time shorter than the period from the start of the game until the ready-to-win effect is executed. According to the above configuration, the display period of the stationary notification image GI ends before the ready-to-win effect is started. Therefore, the inconvenience that the stationary notification image GI makes it difficult to draw attention to the image displayed in the ready-to-win effect is suppressed. Also, the opening period Pf is shorter than the shortest variation pattern determined in the game in which the stationary notification image GI can be displayed.

It should be noted that the display effects of the stationary notification image GI and the number-of-remaining-numbers image GN are executed even when a big win is won in the current game. Assume that in a game in which the remaining number of games image GN is scheduled to be displayed, the remaining number of games image GN is not displayed when a big win is won. In the above configuration, there is an inconvenience that the winning of the jackpot is perceived at the time when the display of the remaining number of times image GN is not started in the opening period Pf. Also, in a game in which the stationary notification image GI is scheduled to be displayed, the same inconvenience may occur in a configuration in which the stationary notification image GI is not displayed when a jackpot is won. According to the configuration of this embodiment, there is an advantage that the above inconvenience is suppressed.

FIGS. 15(a) to 15(d) are diagrams for explaining specific examples of when the stationary notification image GI and the remaining number of times image GN are displayed. FIGS. 15(a) to 15(d) show the remaining number of times N until the second time-saving game state at each point in time, in addition to the period during which each of the above images is displayed.

FIG. 15(a) shows the period when the stationary notification image GI and the remaining number of times image GN are displayed in the period from immediately after the jackpot game ends until the second time-saving game state starts. As shown in FIG. 15(a), the remaining number image GN is displayed immediately after the jackpot game ends. Also, the remaining number of times image GN is hidden when the second time-saving game state is started. However, when the second time-saving gaming state is started, if the number of reservations is a numerical value "0", the display of the remaining number of times image GN is continued (see FIG. 19 described later).

As shown in FIG. 15(a), the stationary notification image GI includes a game in which the number-of-games image GE displays the number "50" and a number-of-games image GE displays the number "100" in the period after the end of the jackpot game. is not displayed in any game, including games that display In the above configuration, even if the remaining number of times N is set, there is a case where the above image does not notify the fact even once. For example, when a jackpot game is won by the 50th game after the power is turned on, the stationary notification image GI is not displayed, and the remaining number of times N at power-on is not notified by the remaining number of times image GN. Therefore, it is not notified whether or not the remaining number of times N has been deferred.

FIG. 15(b) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the display period of each image in the period from immediately after power-on to the start of the second time-saving gaming state. In the specific example of FIG. 15(b), it is assumed that the remaining number of times N is deferred. Specifically, it is assumed that the remaining number of times N at power-on is a numerical value "X". Further, in the specific example of FIG. 15(b), the remaining number of times N (numerical value "X-50") in the game in which the number of games image GE displays the number "50" (the 51st game since the power was turned on) is the numerical value "200". ” Assume the following cases.

In the above specific example of FIG. 15(b), the stationary notification image GI and the remaining number of times image GN are displayed in the game in which the number of games image GE displays the numerical value "50". Specifically, the stationary notification image GI and the remaining number of times image GN are displayed in the initial period Pf described above. If the stationary notification image GI is displayed in a game in which the number-of-games image GE displays the number "50", the stationary notification image GI is not displayed in the game in which the number-of-games image GE displays the number "100". As shown in FIG. 15B, the stationary notification image GI is hidden before the beginning period Pf ends. On the other hand, the remaining number of times image GN is continuously displayed until the second time saving game state is started.

FIG. 15(c) is a diagram for explaining another specific example of the display period of each image in the period from immediately after power-on until the second time-saving game state starts. In the specific example of FIG. 15(c), it is assumed that the remaining number of times N is deferred, as in FIG. 15(b) described above. Specifically, when the power is turned on, the remaining number of times N is the numerical value "X", and the number of games image GE displays the number "100" (the 101st game after the power is turned on). −100”) is less than or equal to “200”. Further, in the above specific example, it is assumed that the remaining number of times N (numerical value "X-50") in the game in which the number-of-games image GE displays the number "50" is greater than the numerical value "200". In the above specific example of FIG. 15(c), in a game in which the number-of-games image GE displays the number "50", the stationary notification image GI and the number-of-games image GN remaining are not displayed, and the number-of-games image GE displays the number "100". is displayed, a stationary notification image GI and a remaining count image GN are displayed.

FIG. 15D is a diagram for explaining another specific example of the display period of each image in the period from immediately after power-on until the second time-saving gaming state starts. In the specific example of FIG. 15(d), it is assumed that the remaining number of times N is deferred, as in FIGS. 15(b) and 15(c). Specifically, when the power is turned on, the remaining number of times N is the numerical value "X", and the number of games image GE displays the number "100" (the 101st game after the power is turned on). −100”) is greater than the numerical value “200”. In the specific example of FIG. 15(d), in any game including the game in which the number of games image GE displays the number "50" and the game in which the number of games image GE displays the number "100", The notification image GI is not displayed. On the other hand, the remaining number image GN is started to be displayed in a game in which the game number image GE displays the number "100".

FIGS. 16(a) to 16(f) are diagrams for explaining each screen M (1 to 7) displayed at the start of the second time-saving gaming state. Although details will be described later, each screen M displayed at the start of the second time-saving gaming state changes depending on whether or not the table scenario S is set. Further, each screen M displayed at the start of the second time-saving gaming state also changes according to the type of the table scenario S that has been set. FIGS. 16A to 16F are schematic diagrams of screens M displayed during a period in which table scenario Sb2 among table scenarios S is set.

FIG. 16(a) is a schematic diagram of the screen M1 displayed immediately after the first game in the second time-saving game state is started. The screen M1 is displayed for a predetermined time after the start of the first game in the second time-saving game state. During the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, the effect mode immediately before the second time-saving game state is started becomes the previous mode. As described above, in the previous mode, the background image GHx, the effect symbol GAx, the pending image GBx, and the number-of-games image GE are displayed. As shown in FIG. 16(a), in the present embodiment, the above images displayed in the previous mode are continuously displayed even immediately after the start of the first game in the second time-saving game state.

Also, in the previous mode, the remaining number of times image GN is displayed. As shown in FIG. 16(a), the remaining number image GN is continuously displayed even immediately after the start of the first game in the second time saving game state. Specifically, the remaining number of times image GN displays the number "0" as the number of remaining games until the second time-saving gaming state is started. The number of the remaining number image GN changes color when the number of remaining games until the second time-saving gaming state is started is subtracted to a predetermined number (for example, 5 times) or less. For example, in a game in which the number of remaining games until the second time-saving gaming state is started is greater than a predetermined number of times, the number of the remaining number of times image GN is displayed in white, and the number of remaining games until the second time-saving gaming state is started. is equal to or less than a predetermined number of times, the numbers of the remaining number of times image GN are displayed in red.

As shown in FIG. 16a), when the first game in the second time-saving game state is started, a right-handed image GS1 is displayed. In addition, although it will be described in detail later, when the remaining number of times N is subtracted to the numerical value "0", regardless of whether the next game (the first game in the second time-saving game state) is immediately started, the It shifts to the 2 o'clock short game state. Specifically, it is assumed that the number of pending games is "0" at the time when the game in which the remaining number of times N is subtracted to the numerical value "0" is finished. In the above case, immediately after the transition to the second time-saving game state, it shifts to the customer waiting state. In the customer waiting state described above, the right-handed image GS1 is displayed.

FIG. 16(b) is a schematic diagram of the screen M2 displayed in the first game in the second time-saving game state. The screen M2 is displayed by switching from the screen M1 described above, and is displayed for a predetermined period of time. As shown in FIG. 16(b), the screen M2 displays a number-of-games image GE, a background image GHx, a small symbol Ga, and a pending image GBx, like the screen M1. However, when the screen M1 is switched to the screen M2, the remaining number of times image GN is hidden and the start notification image Gn is displayed. The start notification image Gn is an image for notifying that the second time-saving gaming state has started. For example, a message indicating that the second time-saving gaming state has started is displayed in the start notification image Gn. When the screen M1 is switched to the screen M2, the effect image GAx is hidden, and the start notification image Gn is displayed in the area where the effect image GAx was displayed (substantially the center of the screen).

FIG. 16(c) is a schematic diagram of the screen M3 displayed in the first game in the second time-saving game state. The screen M3 is displayed after being switched from the screen M2 described above, and is displayed for a predetermined period of time. As shown in FIG. 16(c), on the screen M3, each image including the small pattern Ga is displayed in the same manner as on the screen M2. Also, the effect image GAx is not displayed on the screen M3 (similar to the screen M2). However, the effect image GA may be displayed on the screen M2 and the screen M3.

As shown in FIG. 16(c), the start notification image Gn, the right shot image GS1, the hold image GBx, the number of games image GE, and the background image GHx displayed on the screen M2 are hidden on the screen M3. Specifically, shielding images GF (GF1, GF2) are displayed on the screen M3. The shielding image GF is an image that shields the background image GHx to make it difficult to see (including cases where it is substantially impossible). The shielding image GF of this embodiment shields substantially the entire area of the background image GHx. However, it is sufficient if the background image GHx is difficult to see when the shielding image GF is displayed, and the shielding image GF may shield part of the background image GHx.

The shielding image GF is an image representing a sliding door, and includes a left shielding image GF1 and a right shielding image GF2. The shielding image GF is displayed prior to the start notification image Gn, the right shot image GS1, the pending image GBx, the number of games image GE and the background image GHx (in front of each image). The left shielding image GF1 is displayed moving from the left side of the image display device 31 to the center side while the screen M2 is being displayed. Further, the right shielding image GF2 is displayed by moving from the right side of the image display device 31 to the center side while the screen M2 is being displayed. That is, when the screen M3 is displayed, the image display device 31 displays the operation of closing the fusuma. In the screen M3, the position of the right side of the left shielding image GF1 substantially matches the position of the left side of the right shielding image GF2. However, an image representing something other than the fusuma may be employed as the shielding image GF.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the right shot image GS1 is hidden on the screen M2. On the other hand, the right shot image GS2 is displayed on the screen M3. Like the right-handed image GS1, the right-handed image GS2 is an image for instructing the right-handed player to play the game. In the above configuration, the image display device 31 instructs to hit to the right on both the screen M2 and the screen M3. Note that the right-handed shot image GS1 may be displayed on both the screen M2 and the screen M3. Specifically, the right hitting image GS1 may be displayed in front of the shielding image GF, and the right hitting image GS1 may be displayed so as to be visible even in the period after the shielding image GF is displayed.

FIG. 16(d) is a schematic diagram of the screen M4 displayed in the first game in the second time-saving game state. The screen M4 is displayed after being switched from the screen M3 described above, and is displayed for a predetermined period of time. Specifically, the screen M4 is displayed by hiding the shielding image GF of the screen M3. For example, the left shielding image GF1 is moved to the right side of the image display device 31 and displayed, the right shielding image GF2 is moved to the left side of the image display device 31, and the shielding image GF is hidden. That is, when the screen M4 is displayed, the image display device 31 displays the operation of opening the fusuma.

As shown in FIG. 16(d), the number-of-games image GE displayed before the shielding image GF is displayed (before the sliding door is closed) (see FIG. 16(b) described above), the shielding image GF is hidden. It is not displayed even if it becomes (even if the fusuma is opened). That is, in the present embodiment, the number-of-games image GE is hidden by being shielded by the shielding image GF. If the number-of-games image GE is suddenly hidden, some players may feel unnatural. According to the configuration of this embodiment, there is an advantage that the above inconvenience can be suppressed. Further, as shown in FIG. 16(d), the effect symbol GA and the pending image GB are not displayed on the screen M4.

As shown in FIG. 16(d), the screen M4 displays various images including the right-handed image GS2 and the small symbol Ga (similar to the screen M3 and the like). Also, on the screen M4, a rush effect for notifying that the game will shift to the time saving mode B is executed. Specifically, the rush image GT is displayed on the screen M4. Rush image GT is an image for notifying that production mode shifts to time saving mode B, and the name of time saving mode B (“chance time” in the example of FIG. 16(b)) is displayed. As shown in FIG. 16(d), the background image GHz is displayed in the rush effect.

FIG. 16(e) is a schematic diagram of the screen M5 displayed in the first game in the second time-saving game state. The screen M5 is displayed for a predetermined time. Specifically, the screen M5 is displayed (instead of the screen M4) after the rush effect is executed, and the mode selection effect is executed on the screen M5. The time saving mode B of the present embodiment includes multiple types of production modes from the time saving mode B1 to the time saving mode B3. In the mode selection effect, by appropriately operating the effect button 8 and the cross key 40, the player can select the effect mode (B1 to B3). However, even if any of the time saving mode B1 to the time saving mode B3 is selected, the variation pattern determination table T in the time saving mode B is common. Specifically, the effect determined by the sub CPU 121 changes according to the effect mode selected in the mode selection effect, but the variation pattern determination table T referred to by the main CPU 111 does not change.

As shown in FIG. 16(e), a small symbol Ga is displayed in the mode selection effect. Also, in the mode selection effect, a right hitting image GS2 is displayed. That is, the right shot image GS2 is displayed over the entry effect and the mode selection effect. Also, a background image GHz (an example of a second background image) is displayed in the mode selection effect. However, the configuration may be such that a background image GH dedicated to the mode selection effect is provided. It should be noted that, as described above, the second time-saving gaming state, the case of starting via the jackpot game (after the table scenario is set), and the case of starting via the jackpot game (in the scenario unset period) be. Details will be described later, but when the second time-saving game state is started via the jackpot game, while the mode selection effect is executed (see FIG. 18 (a) described later), the second When the time saving game state is started, the mode selection effect is not executed (see FIG. 18(b) described later). As shown in FIG. 16(e), in the mode selection effect, the effect symbol GA and the pending image GB are not displayed.

FIG. 16(f) is a schematic diagram of the screen M6 displayed in the first game in the second time-saving game state. The screen M6 is displayed by switching from the screen M5 described above, and is displayed for a predetermined period of time. In the screen M6, an image including the small symbol Ga and the background image GHz is displayed, and the image including the effect symbol GA and the pending image GB is not displayed, as in the above-described screen M5 (mode selection effect). Note that the background image GH on the screen M6 can be changed as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 16(f), a right-handed shot image GS3 is displayed on the screen M6 instead of the right-handed shot image GS2. Like the right-handed image GS1 and the right-handed image GS2, the right-handed image GS3 is an image for notifying that the game should be played right-handed. In the present embodiment, among the right-handed images GS (GS1 to GS3 and GS4, which will be described later), when the right-handed image GS3 is displayed, the sound "right-handed" is reproduced, and the other right-handed images GS are displayed. The audio is not played back. However, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a voice saying "Right shot" is reproduced when the right shot image GS other than the right shot image GS3 is displayed.

FIG. 17(a) is a schematic diagram of the screen M7 during the time saving displayed in the second time saving game state. Although it will be described in detail later, the screen M7 during time saving is, for example, switched from the above screen M6 (see FIG. 16(f)) and displayed (see FIG. 18(a) described later), and is displayed at the beginning of the second time saving game state. is displayed at the end of the game.

As shown in FIG. 17(a), in the time-saving medium screen M7 (time-saving mode B), a small pattern Ga, a production pattern GAw, a right-handed image GS4, a background image GHw, a pending image GBw, a remaining time-saving image GJ and an active image GM Display each image containing . The production design GAw is the production design GA displayed in each game in the time saving mode B. As described above, immediately after the first game in the second time-saving game state is started, the effect symbol GAx (the effect symbol GA of the previous mode) is displayed. After that, the effect symbol GAw is displayed at the end of the game. That is, the performance symbol GAw starts to be displayed in the middle of the game. Therefore, the effect symbol GAw is variably displayed immediately after the display is started. The background image GHw (an example of the second background image) is the background image GH displayed in each game in the time saving mode B. The reserved design GBw is displayed in the time saving mode B, and the number of reserved designs GBw corresponding to the number of second reservations is displayed. Also, in each game in the time saving mode B, a right-handed image GS4 is displayed.

The time saving remaining image GJ displays the remaining number of times M of the time saving game state. However, the number of remaining times M stored in the main RAM 113 is subtracted by "1" when each game in the time-saving game state ends. On the other hand, the number of the time saving remaining image GJ is subtracted by "1" every time each game in the time saving game state is started. For example, assume that a game is started with the number of remaining times M being "X". In the above case, the number of the time saving remaining image GJ is subtracted from the number "X" to the number "X-1" immediately after the start of the game. After that, at the end of the game, the remaining count M stored in the main RAM 113 is subtracted from the numerical value "X-1". However, the update timing of the remaining number of times M stored in the main RAM 113 and the update timing of the time saving remaining image GJ may substantially coincide with each other.

As shown in FIG. 17( a ), the remaining time saving image GJ is displayed in the area RJ of the screen M7 during time saving. In addition, the specific example of FIG. 17(a) assumes a period immediately after the time saving remaining image GJ starts to be displayed in the first game in the second time saving game state. In the second and subsequent games in the second time-saving game state, the time at which the number of the remaining time-saving image GJ is subtracted is immediately after the start of the game. However, the display start timing of the time saving remaining image GJ in the first game in the second time saving game state is the final stage of the game after the rush effect or the like ends. That is, in the first game in the second time saving game state, the remaining time saving image GJ is displayed for the first time after the original time (immediately after the start of the game) at which the number of the remaining time saving image GJ is subtracted. From the above circumstances, the time saving remaining image GJ is the first game in the second time saving game state, and the number “999” obtained by subtracting the number “1” from the number of time saving times in the second time saving game state (1000 times) is displayed first. do.

The active image GM is an image for notifying that the current game state is the second time-saving game state. As described above, the production mode of the second time-saving game state is the time-saving mode B. However, even in the first time-saving game state, there is a case where the game moves to the time-saving mode B (see FIG. 11(a)). Therefore, if it is assumed that whether or not the second time-saving game state is not notified in the time-saving mode B, it becomes difficult to grasp whether the current game state is the second time-saving game state or the first time-saving game state. inconvenience can occur.

In this embodiment, the image GM during activation is displayed in the time saving mode B of the second time saving game state, and the image GM during activation is not displayed in the time saving mode B of the first time saving game state and the above-described gap game. Specifically, regardless of whether it is the scenario unset period or not, the in-activation image GM is displayed in the second time-saving game state. Further, regardless of the type of the table scenario S (Sb2 to Sb4), the active image GM is displayed in the second time-saving game state. Therefore, the above-mentioned inconvenience is suppressed.

FIG. 17(b) is a schematic diagram of the time saving middle screen M8 displayed in each game in the first time saving game state. Specifically, the time saving medium screen M8 is displayed in each game of the time saving mode A. FIG. As shown in FIG. 17(b), in the time saving mode A, images including a small pattern Ga, a performance pattern GAy, a pending image GBy, a background image GHy, a right shot image GS4 and a time saving remaining image GJ are displayed.

In the present embodiment described above, the remaining time saving image GJ is commonly displayed in the time saving mode A (first time saving game state) and the time saving mode B (second time saving game state). Specifically, in the time saving mode A, the remaining time saving image GJ is displayed in the region RJ of the image display device 31 as shown in FIG. 17(b). As described above, in the time saving mode B, the remaining time saving image GJ is displayed in the region RJ of the image display device 31 as shown in FIG. 17(a). Therefore, the time saving remaining image GJ is displayed in a common area (area RJ) in time saving mode A (first time saving game state) and time saving mode B (second time saving game state).

In this embodiment, the time saving mode A may directly shift to the time saving mode B. Temporarily, the structure which the area|region where the time saving remaining image GJ is displayed changes by the time saving mode A and the time saving mode B is assumed. In the above configuration, some players may lose sight of the remaining time saving image GJ immediately after the time saving mode B is started. According to the configuration of the present embodiment, the effect of suppressing the above inconvenience is exhibited.

However, in the configuration in which the time-saving mode A is directly shifted to the time-saving mode B, there may be a problem that some players do not notice that the time-saving mode B has started. In consideration of the above circumstances, the area where the remaining time saving image GJ is displayed may be intentionally made different between the time saving mode A and the time saving mode B. An example of the screen M7 during time saving in the second time saving game state of the modification adopting the above configuration is shown in FIG. 17(c). In the above modification, the time saving remaining image GJ is displayed in the region RJ in the first time saving game state, and the time saving remaining image GJ is displayed in the region RJ' in the second time saving game state. According to the above modification, it becomes easy to recognize that the time saving mode A ended and the time saving mode B started by changing the area where the remaining time saving image GJ is displayed. Therefore, the effect that the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suppressed is produced.

By the way, in the first time-saving game state, the remaining number of times N until the second time-saving game state is subtracted in the same manner as in the non-time-saving game state. Therefore, the remaining number image GN (see FIG. 14(c)) displaying the current value of the remaining number N may be displayed in the first time-saving game state. Similarly, the number-of-games image GE (see FIG. 14(a)) that allows the player to grasp the number of games up to the second time-saving game state may be displayed in the first time-saving game state. That is, a specific effect (subtraction display of the remaining number of times image GN, etc.) according to the remaining number of times N may be executed in the second time saving game state.

However, the second time-saving game state is started after the first time-saving game state ends. If the above-mentioned specific effect is executed in the first time-saving game state, some players will be conscious in the first time-saving game state that the jackpot will not be won until the second time-saving game state starts. Sometimes. In the above cases, there may be a problem that the player's motivation for playing the game is lowered. In consideration of the above circumstances, in the present embodiment, while the specific effect corresponding to the remaining number of times N is executed in the non-time-saving game state, the specific effect is not executed in the first time-saving game state. According to the above configuration, there is an advantage that the above inconvenience is suppressed.

FIGS. 18(a) to 18(c) are diagrams for explaining a specific example of a period during which each image (GF, GT, GH, GS) is displayed when the time saving mode B is started. In addition, in the specific examples of FIGS. 18(a) to 18(c), it is assumed that the jackpot is not won when the time saving mode B is started.

Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, the shielding image GF (see FIG. 16(c)), the rushing image GT (see FIG. 16(d)), and the right-handed image GS3 (see FIG. 16(f)) displayed at the start of the time-saving mode B ) are collectively referred to as the “starting image”. The start image described above is displayed in a period from when the second time saving game state starts until it switches to the time saving middle screen M7 (see FIG. 17A described above). In the present embodiment, the period from the start of the second time-saving gaming state to the switching to the time-saving middle screen M7 (the period in which the image at the start is displayed) is described as "start notification period Pz (1 to 3)". Sometimes. Although the details will be described later, depending on whether or not the table scenario S is set and the type of the table scenario S, the effect mode in the start notification period Pz changes.

FIG. 18(a) is a specific example in which the time saving mode B starts during the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set. In the above case, it shifts from the immediately preceding mode (low-probability non-time-saving game state) to the time-saving mode B (second time-saving game state). In the previous mode, the background image GHx is displayed. FIG. 18(a) shows the start time ts of the first game in the second time-saving game state and the end time te of the game.

As shown in FIG. 18(a), when shifting from the previous mode to the time-saving mode B, the screen M1 (see FIG. 16(a)) and the screen M2 (see FIG. 16(b)) are respectively displayed for a predetermined time. After that, the screen M3 is displayed and the shielding image GF is displayed. During the period in which the shielding image GF is displayed, the background image GH is shielded (not displayed). Also, after the shielding image GF is displayed for a predetermined time, a rush effect is executed in which the screen M4 (see FIG. 16(d)) is displayed. As described above, in the rush effect, the rush image GT is displayed, and the background image GH becomes the background image Gz.

As shown in FIG. 18(a), when the time saving mode B starts during the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, after the rush effect is executed, the mode selection effect is displayed on the screen M5 (see FIG. 16(e) described above). is executed. Also, the mode selection effect is executed for a predetermined time, and then the screen M6 is displayed (see FIG. 16(f)). A right shot image GS3 is displayed on the screen M6. As shown in FIG. 18A, the start notification period Pz1 when the time saving mode B starts in the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set is the period until switching to the time saving middle screen M7. During the start notification period Pz1 described above, the screens M1 to M6 are displayed, and the time during which each screen is displayed is predetermined. Therefore, the start notification period Pz1 ends at a predetermined time.

As described above, the game variation pattern is determined with reference to the variation pattern determination table Ts. In the game in which the variation pattern determination table Ts is referred to, only one variation pattern is determined when the result of the big win lottery is a loss. That is, the length of the period (hereinafter referred to as "variation period Px") during which the special figure is variably displayed in the variation pattern (loss) determined by the variation pattern determination table Ts is unchanged (fixed).

As shown in FIG. 18(a), the fluctuation period Px is longer than the start notification period Pz1. That is, the variable period Px is designed to have a length that allows execution of various effects including rush effects and mode selection effects. Similarly, in the game in which the variation pattern determination table Ts is referred to, the length of the variation pattern determined when the result of the big win lottery is a small win, and the variation pattern determined when the result of the big win lottery is a big win. is longer than the start notification period Pz1.

According to the above configuration, the start image displayed in the start notification period Pz1 is displayed in the first game in the time saving mode B (second time saving game state), and is not displayed in the second and subsequent games. Assume a configuration in which the start image displayed in the start notification period Pz1 is also displayed in the second and subsequent games in the time saving mode B. FIG. With the above configuration, a problem may occur in which the image displayed in the second and subsequent games in the time saving mode B becomes difficult to see (or cannot be displayed) as the starting image. According to the configuration of this embodiment, the above problems are suppressed.

However, as described above, in the period when the table scenario Sb is not set, the variation pattern determination table (Tbx) is common between the first game in the second time-saving game state and each game after the second time (Fig. 10 (b )reference). Therefore, in the first game in the second time-saving game state, a random variation pattern is determined in the same manner as in subsequent games. That is, in the scenario unset period, the length of the period (hereinafter referred to as "fluctuation period Py") during which the first game in the second time-saving gaming state is executed is variable.

In the above configuration, if the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set and the period in which the scenario is not set have the same length of the start notification period Pz, the first game in the second time-saving gaming state in the period in which the scenario is not set There is a possibility that the start notification period Pz will not end before the end of . In the above case, in the second and subsequent games in the second time-saving game state, there is an inconvenience that the image at the start is displayed. In consideration of the above circumstances, in the present embodiment, the start notification period Pz3 in the scenario unset period is set to be shorter than the start notification period Pz2 of the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set.

FIG. 18(b) is a specific example when the time saving mode B starts during the scenario unset period. In the above case, it shifts from the normal mode (low-probability non-time-saving game state) to the time-saving mode B (second time-saving game state). As described above, the background image GHx is displayed in the normal mode. FIG. 18(b) shows the start time ts of the first game in the second time-saving game state and the end time te of the game.

As shown in FIG. 18(b), when transitioning to the time saving mode B during the scenario unset period, the screen M1 and the screen M2 are displayed in the same manner as when transitioning to the time saving mode B during the period in which the above-described table scenario Sb2 is set. Each is displayed for a predetermined time, after which the screen M3 is displayed and the shielding image GF is displayed. Also, after the shielding image GF is displayed for a predetermined time, a rush effect is executed in which the screen M4 is displayed.

However, when transitioning to the time saving mode B during the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, after the mode selection effect is executed (after the screen M5 is displayed), the right shot image GS4 (screen M6) is displayed, but the scenario When shifting to the time-saving mode B in the unset period, the mode selection effect is omitted, and the right-handed image GS4 (screen M6) is displayed. That is, the start notification period Pz2 in the scenario unset period is compared with the start notification period Pz1 in the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, and the period in which the mode selection effect is executed is omitted.

In the above configuration, the start notification period Pz2 is shorter than the start notification period Pz1. Specifically, the start notification period Pz2 is designed to be shorter than the shortest variation pattern determined in the first game in the second time-saving gaming state. In this embodiment, when the game is played in the normal procedure, the number of second reservations is 0 at the start of the first game in the second time-saving game state. Therefore, when the second special figure is variably displayed in the first game in the second time-saving gaming state, the "long variation (loss)" (about 4 seconds) among the variation patterns is the shortest variation pattern. Also, when the first special figure is variably displayed in the first game in the second time-saving gaming state, the "special 1 loss (loss)" (about 7 seconds) among the variation patterns becomes the shortest variation pattern. Therefore, the start notification period Pz is designed, for example, to have a length shorter than about 4 seconds of "long variation (loss)".

As understood from the above description, according to the configuration of the present embodiment, the start notification period Pz2 ends before the first game in the second time-saving game state in the scenario unset period ends. In addition, the start notification period Pz2 is a time shorter than the shortest variation pattern (special figure 1 loss: about 7 seconds) among each variation pattern of the first special figure in the second time saving game state (for example, about 6 seconds) good.

Further, as understood from the above description, according to the present embodiment, when the background image GHz is displayed instead of the background image GHx at the start of the time saving mode B (second time saving game state), the shielding image GF can be displayed. According to the above configuration, by shielding the background image GHx at once, the player can grasp in a short period of time that the time saving mode A will end, and then by displaying the background image GHz at once, the time saving mode B It is possible to make the player grasp in a short period of time that the will start. That is, there is an advantage that it becomes easy to grasp that it shifted from time-saving mode A to time-saving mode B in a short period of time.

FIG. 18(c) is a specific example when the time saving mode B starts during the period in which the table scenario Sb4 is set. In the above case, it shifts to the time saving mode B immediately after the jackpot game ends. Specifically, when the ending period of the jackpot game ends, the first time-saving game state (799 times) is started, and the production mode shifts to the time-saving mode B. FIG. 18(c) shows the starting time ta and ending time tb of the ending period.

As shown in FIG. 18(c), when the ending period starts, a rush effect is executed in which the screen M4 (see FIG. 16(d)) is displayed. As described above, in the rush effect, the rush image GT is displayed, and the background image GH becomes the background image GHz. After the rush effect is executed, the mode selection effect is executed and the screen M5 (see FIG. 16(e) described above) is displayed. Also, the mode selection effect is executed for a predetermined time, and then the screen M6 is displayed (see FIG. 16(f)). A right shot image GS3 is displayed on the screen M6. In the specific example of FIG. 18(c), when the ending period (start notification period Pz3) ends, the time saving mode B (first time saving game state) is started, and the time saving middle screen M7 is displayed.

The length of the ending period when the table scenario Sb4 is set is predetermined. Specifically, the start notification period Pz3 when the time saving mode B starts during the period in which the table scenario Sb4 is set substantially coincides with the ending period. That is, the starting image displayed when the time saving mode B starts can be displayed in the ending period.

As can be understood from the above description, in the present embodiment, when shifting to the time saving mode B at the start of the first time saving game state (see FIG. 18 (c)) and the time saving mode B at the start of the second time saving game state The mode of production (start production) is different between the case of shifting to (FIG. 18(b)). For example, when shifting to the time saving mode B at the start of the second time saving game state, the shielding image GF is displayed, but when shifting to the time saving mode B at the start of the first time saving game state, the shielding image GF is not displayed. In addition, the start notification period Pz2 and the start notification period Pz3 are different in length. In the above configuration, it becomes easier to optimally set the effect when shifting to the time saving mode B compared to the structure in which the effect when shifting to the time saving mode B is uniform.

However, the start notification period Pz2 and the start notification period Pz3 may have the same length, or the shielding image GF may be displayed during the start notification period Pz3. In the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, the mode of production when shifting to the time saving mode A (first time saving game state) after the end of the jackpot game is different from the mode of production when shifting to the time saving mode B. do. Specifically, an effect for notifying that the time saving mode A starts is executed in the ending period. The ending period differs between when the time saving mode A starts and when the time saving mode B starts. Also, when the time saving mode A starts, the mode selection effect is not executed. In addition, the name of the time saving mode A is displayed in the rush effect when shifting to the time saving mode A.

By the way, in the configuration in which the remaining number of times N is subtracted at the end of the game, if the number of reservations is 0 at the end of the game, the customer waiting state starts immediately after the start of the second time-saving game state. Since the customer waiting state described above is the second time-saving game state, it is more advantageous for the player to play the game with the right hand than with the left hand. In consideration of the above circumstances, in the present embodiment, in the customer waiting state before the first game of the second time-saving game state is started, a configuration is adopted in which a right-handed stroke is instructed. The above configuration will be described in detail below.

FIG. 19(a) is a schematic diagram of the customer waiting screen Mx displayed when the customer waiting state is started at the time of shifting to the second time-saving gaming state. The specific example of FIG. 19(a) assumes that the table scenario Sb2 among the table scenarios S is set, as in FIG. 16(a) described above. In the above case, the background image GHx is displayed from the non-time-saving game state (previous mode) to the second time-saving game state (time-saving mode B). In the scenario unset period, if the customer is in a waiting state at the start of the second time-saving gaming state, the customer waiting screen Mx is displayed in the customer waiting state in the same manner as in the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set.

The customer waiting screen Mx shown in FIG. 19(a) is displayed when the number of reservations at the start of the second time-saving gaming state is zero. Therefore, in the customer waiting screen Mx, the effect symbol GAx and the small symbol Ga are stopped and displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 19A, the customer waiting screen Mx displays a number-of-games image GE and a remaining-number-of-games image GN, similarly to the screen M1. Further, a right-handed image GS1 is displayed on the customer waiting screen Mx, similarly to the screen M1. According to the above configuration, in the customer waiting state before the start of the first game in the second time-saving game state, the instruction to hit to the right is given.

FIG. 19B is a diagram for explaining the period in which each image (GF, GT, GH, GS) is displayed when the customer waiting state is started at the time of shifting to the second time-saving gaming state. be. FIG. 19(b) shows the end time te of the game when the remaining number of times N until the second time saving game state is subtracted to the numerical value "0", and the start time ts of the first game in the second time saving game state. be In the above specific example, the period Pw shown in FIG. 19B is the customer waiting state, and the customer waiting screen Mx (see FIG. 19A) is displayed during the period Pw.

As shown in FIG. 19B, during the period Pw in which the customer waiting screen Mx is displayed, the right-handed image GS1 is displayed and the background image GHx is displayed. After that, when the first game in the second time-saving gaming state is started, the number of reservations in the second time-saving gaming state is one or more (see above-described FIGS. 18(a) and 18(b)) as in the case , screen M1, screen M2, . . . are displayed. Specifically, during the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, the screens are displayed in order from the screen M1 to the screen M7 (see FIG. 18A). Further, during the scenario unset period, each screen (M1, M2, M3, M4, M6, M7) except the screen M5 is displayed in sequence (see FIG. 18(b)).

FIGS. 20(a) and 20(b) are diagrams for explaining the details of when the numbers in the remaining number image GN are updated. As described above, the remaining number of times image GN displays the remaining number of times N stored in the main RAM 113 . However, in the present embodiment, the timing at which the numbers in the remaining number of times image GN are decremented differs from the timing at which the remaining number of times N is decremented. The above configuration will be described in detail below. In addition, hereinafter, the timing for updating the number of the remaining number of times image GN may be simply referred to as "the timing of updating the remaining number of times image GN".

As described above, in the present embodiment, the remaining number N of the main RAM 113 is subtracted at the end of the game (when the special figure is stopped). Specifically, one game is provided with a variable period during which special symbols are variably displayed, and a fixed period during which special symbols are stopped and displayed after the variable period is over. The length of the fluctuation period in the game is variable according to the fluctuation pattern of the game. On the other hand, the fixed period in the game is a predetermined time (approximately 0.5 seconds). The main control board 110 (main CPU 111) transmits a pattern confirmation command to the sub CPU 121 at the start of the confirmation period. When the design confirmation command is received, the effect control board 120 (sub CPU 121) causes the image control board 150 to stop and display the effect symbol GA and the small pattern Ga until the finalization period ends. That is, the fixed period substantially coincides with the period during which the special symbols and the performance symbols GA are stopped and displayed.

FIG. 20A is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the update timing of the remaining count image GN. FIG. 20(a) shows the numbers of the remaining number of times image GN at each time displayed by the effect control board 120 (image control board 150), and the remaining number stored at each time by the main control board 110 (main RAM 113). A number N is indicated. In addition, FIG. 20(a) shows the game start time ts and the game end time te. Further, FIG. 20(a) shows time ta when the variation period in the game ends. The time ta described above can also be rephrased as the time when the fixed period starts.

As shown in FIG. 20( a ), at the start time ts of the game, the remaining number command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 120 . The remaining count command is a command that specifies the current value of the remaining count N. FIG. The effect control board 120 of the present embodiment restores the number of the remaining number of times image GN according to the remaining number of times command transmitted after the power is restored, when the power is turned off. In the specific example of FIG. 20(a), it is assumed that the remaining number of times N at the start of the game is a numerical value "X" (X≧2). The remaining number command transmitted at the start of the current game indicates the remaining number N updated (decremented) at the end of the previous game.

As shown in FIG. 20( a ), at time ta when the confirmation period starts, a symbol confirmation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 120 . When the design determination command is received, the performance control board 120 stops displaying the performance design GA and subtracts the number of the remaining number of times image GN. That is, it can be said that the number of the remaining number of times image GN is subtracted at approximately the same time as the time ta at which the fixed period starts. In the specific example of FIG. 20(a), the number of the remaining number of times image GN is displayed by subtracting from "X" to "X-1". However, the main control board 110 subtracts the remaining number N of the main RAM 113 at the time te when the fixed period ends. Therefore, immediately after the number of the remaining number of times image GN is subtracted to "X-1", the remaining number of times N in the main RAM 113 is the numerical value "X" as shown in FIG. 20(a).

Let us assume a comparison in which the numbers in the remaining number of times image GN are subtracted at the end of the fixed period. In the above comparison, it can also be said that the number in the remaining number image GN is subtracted after the game ends. However, for example, when the state shifts to the customer waiting state after the game ends, some players stop paying attention to the screen of the image display device 31 (including the remaining number of times image GN) at the end time ta of the game and end the game. It may happen. In the above case, the player may not be able to visually recognize the subtraction display of the numbers in the number-of-remaining image GB. According to this embodiment, since the number of remaining times image GB is subtracted and displayed before the end of the game, there is an advantage that the above inconvenience is suppressed.

FIG. 20(b) is a diagram for explaining another specific example of the update timing of the remaining count image GN. FIG. 20(b) shows, in the same manner as in FIG. 20(a), the number of the remaining number of times image GN at each time point, the remaining number of times N stored in the main RAM 113 at each time point, the game start time ts, the game start time ts, A time ta at which the fluctuation period ends in and a time te at which the game ends are shown. Also, FIG. 20(b) shows the game state at each time point. In the specific example of FIG. 20(b), it is assumed that the remaining number of times N is subtracted to the numerical value "0" at the end time te of the game. Therefore, the second time-saving game state is started from the end time te of the game.

As shown in FIG. 20(b), even in a game in which the number of remaining times N is subtracted from the numerical value "0", the number of the remaining number of times image GN is displayed at the timing of receiving the symbol determination command, as in other games. is subtracted. That is, at time ta when the fixed period is started, the number of remaining times image GN displays the number "0". Further, when the determination period ends after the number "0" is displayed in the remaining number image GN, the remaining number N is subtracted from the number "0" and the second time saving game state is started.

In the above configuration, before the second time-saving game state is started, the number of remaining times image GN displays the number "0". However, some players may misunderstand that the second time-saving gaming state has started at time ta when the remaining number of times image GN displays the number "0". Considering the above circumstances, in the game in which the second time-saving game state is started, the time when the remaining number of times N is subtracted without subtracting the number of the remaining image GN at the start of the fixed period (the second time-saving game state is At the start time), the number of the remaining number of times image GN may be subtracted. Specifically, after the remaining number of times N is subtracted to the numerical value "0", the timing of receiving the customer waiting command, or the command that specifies that the first game in the second time saving game state has started (for example , variation pattern specification command) may be used to display the number "0" in the remaining number image GN. It should be noted that in each game, the number in the number of remaining times image GN may be subtracted at the end of the fixed period.

FIGS. 21(a), 21(b-1), and 21(b-2) are for explaining the display of the effect executing means (for example, the image display device 31) in the period before and after the power failure occurs. is a diagram. As described above, the production mode (display mode of the image display device 31) in a specific period corresponds to the variation pattern determination table referred to in that period. In the present embodiment, the image display device 31 may be controlled to an effect mode that does not correspond to the variation pattern determination table during the period immediately after the power is turned off. The above configuration will be described in detail below.

FIG. 21(a) is a schematic diagram of a restoration screen displayed when power is restored. As shown in FIG. 21(a), the recovery screen displays a message indicating that recovery is in progress after the power failure. A background image GHf is also displayed on the recovery screen. The background image GHf is a dedicated background image GH that is displayed when power is restored, and is, for example, a white (single color) image. In the specific example of FIG. 21(a), it is assumed that the power is restored during the period when the right-handed lamp 28 is lit. In the above case, as shown in FIG. 21(a), the right shot image GS is displayed on the recovery screen. Note that an image other than the background image GHf and the right-handed image GS may be displayed. For example, the number-of-holds image GD (see FIG. 14A described above) may be displayed on the restoration screen.

FIG. 21(b-1) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode at each point in time before and after the power failure and the variation pattern determination table T to be referred to. FIG. 21(b-1) assumes a case where the power supply is interrupted in the jackpot game. FIG. 21(b-1) shows time ta when the power supply is cut off and time tb when the power supply is restarted. In addition, in the specific example of FIG. 21 (b-1), the jackpot game ends at time tc, shifts to the customer waiting state (holding number at the time of jackpot game end = 0), and the first game starts at time td Assume the case.

In this embodiment, when the power is restored from the power interruption, a power interruption restoration command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 120 . For example, the main CPU 111 transmits a power failure recovery command after completing the initialization process when the power is turned on. From the power failure recovery command, whether or not the special figure is fluctuating, the number of pending and the game state are specified. Specifically, from the power failure recovery command, it is specified which one of the jackpot game, the small game, the low probability non-time saving game state, the high probability time saving game state, the first time saving game state and the second time saving game state be done. For example, in the specific example of FIG. 21(b-1), at the power failure recovery time tb, a power failure recovery command specifying that the current gaming state is the jackpot game is transmitted.

As described above, in the jackpot game, the right hitting lamp 28 lights up. Therefore, when the gaming state specified by the power failure recovery command is the jackpot game, the right-handed image GS is displayed on the recovery screen. Note that the type of the right hitting image GS displayed on the recovery screen can be changed as appropriate. For example, even if the game state specified by the power failure recovery command is either the jackpot game or the time-saving game state, the common right-handed image GS may be displayed on the recovery screen. Further, the right hitting image GS that is originally displayed in the game state specified by the power failure recovery command may be displayed on the recovery screen.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the big win game, various images including the current number of rounds and stop-displayed big win effect symbols are displayed. However, the current number of rounds and the jackpot effect pattern cannot be specified from the power failure recovery command. Therefore, when the power is cut off in the big win game and then recovered from the power cut, the image that should be originally displayed in the big win game cannot be completely recovered. In consideration of the above circumstances, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21 (b-1), when the power supply is shut off and restored in the jackpot game, the recovery screen is displayed until the jackpot game ends. . However, when the power is cut off in the big hit game and then recovered from the power cut, the screen displayed in the big hit game may be restored. In the above case, the screen of the jackpot game after the power is restored is displayed by omitting the image that cannot be restored (for example, the image indicating the number of rounds).

Further, in the specific example of FIG. 21(b-1), it is assumed that the variation pattern determination table Tax is referred to after the jackpot game ends. That is, in the specific example of FIG. 21(b-1), it is assumed that the special symbol B4 is stop-displayed as the jackpot symbol and the table scenario Sb4 is set. As described above, the production mode corresponding to the variation pattern determination table Tax is the time saving mode B. Therefore, usually, the period during which the variation pattern determination table Tax is referred to is the time saving mode B.

However, the type of variation pattern determination table T (table scenario S) referred to after the end of the jackpot game is not specified from the power failure recovery command. In addition, the first time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game can shift to both the time-saving mode A and the time-saving mode B (for example, see FIGS. 11(a) and 11(b)). Therefore, in the period immediately after the power is turned off, the performance control board 120 side cannot specify whether the performance mode in the first time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game should be the time-saving mode A or the time-saving mode B.例文帳に追加

When a variation pattern specification command is received, the variation pattern determination table referred to on the main control board 110 side is specified from the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command. That is, the original production mode is specified from the variation pattern specification command. In this embodiment, the original production mode may not be specified on the production control board 120 side until the fluctuation pattern specification command is first received after recovery from power failure.

In the specific example of FIG. 21(b-1), after the jackpot state ends, the state shifts to the customer waiting state. Also, the first time the variation pattern designation command is received after the end of the big win state is time td when the first game is started after the end of the big win game. In the above specific example, in the customer waiting state from the time tc when the jackpot game ends to the time td when the game is started, it is impossible to specify whether the time saving mode A or the time saving mode B should be set on the performance control board 120 side.

Temporarily, when it is not possible to specify on the side of the performance control board 120 whether the time saving mode A or the time saving mode B should be used, a contrast in which each performance executing means is controlled in the time saving mode B is assumed. As described above, in the time saving mode A, there is a possibility that the first time saving game state ends in 100 times. On the other hand, in the time saving mode B, the first time saving game state continues up to 799 times. Therefore, in the above-described comparison, the first time-saving gaming state may end after 100 times even though the game has transitioned to the time-saving mode B. In the above cases, some players may lose their desire to play games.

In consideration of the above circumstances, in the present embodiment, if it is not possible to specify whether the production control board 120 side should be the time saving mode A or the time saving mode B in the first time saving game state, each production execution means in the time saving mode A (image display device 31, etc.). According to the configuration of the present embodiment described above, the first time-saving game state does not end after 100 times even though the game has shifted to the time-saving mode B. Therefore, compared with the above-mentioned comparison, there is an advantage that the inconvenience of losing the player's desire to play is suppressed.

As described above, the original production mode is specified from the variation pattern specification command. In this embodiment, when the original production mode can be specified on the production control board 120 side, the production mode is changed to the original production mode. For example, in the specific example of FIG. 21(b-1), the variation pattern designation command is received at time td. From the above variation pattern specification command, it is specified that the original production mode is the time saving mode B. Therefore, the presentation mode is switched from the time saving mode A to the time saving mode B at time td. In the specific example of FIG. 21 (b-1), when it is assumed that the original production mode is the time saving mode A (when the variation pattern determination table Ta1 is referred to), before and after receiving the variation pattern designation command, The production mode does not change in the time saving mode A.

FIG. 21(b-2) is a diagram for explaining another specific example of the presentation mode at each point in the period before and after the power failure and the variation pattern determination table to be referred to. FIG. 21(b-2) assumes a case where a power failure occurs during a game in the time saving mode B (a game in which the variation pattern determination table Tax or the variation pattern determination table Tbx is referred to). Specifically, in FIG. 21 (b-2), the game is started at time ts in the time saving mode B, the power supply is interrupted at time ta during the game, and the power supply is restarted at time tb. Assume the case. In the specific example of FIG. 21(b-2), it is assumed that the game ends at time tc, then shifts to the customer waiting state, and a new game starts at time td.

In the above specific example of FIG. 21(b-2), the original production mode cannot be specified on the production control board 120 side during the period from the time tb when the power is recovered from the power failure until the new time td is displayed. Specifically, from the time tb when the power failure is restored to the time tc when the game interrupted by the power failure is completed, in addition to the original performance mode, the variation pattern in the game and the performance symbol GA to be stopped and displayed cannot be specified. . In consideration of the above circumstances, the above recovery screen is displayed during the period from when the power failure is restored to when the game interrupted by the power failure ends.

In the specific example of FIG. 21 (b-2), in the customer waiting state from time tc to time td when a new game is started, since the original production mode cannot be specified on the production control board 120 side, the time saving mode A Each effect executing means is controlled. Further, in the specific example of FIG. 21 (b-2), when the variation pattern designation command is received at time td, the production mode is switched from the time saving mode A to the time saving mode B.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the power is turned off in the time-saving gaming state, when the variation pattern designation command is received after that, the mode is switched to the original production mode. By the way, as described above, the remaining number of times M of the time saving game state stored by the main control board 110 side is displayed by the time saving remaining image GJ. However, the command specifying the remaining number of times M of the time saving game state stored by the main control board 110 side is not transmitted during the time saving game state after the power failure is restored. Therefore, when power failure occurs in the time saving game state, the remaining number of times M cannot be displayed in the time saving remaining image GJ during the time saving game state after the power failure is restored. In the present embodiment, the remaining time saving image GJ in which the numerical portion is omitted is displayed during the time saving game state (first time saving game state, second time saving game state) after power failure is restored.

FIGS. 22(a) to 22(d) are diagrams for explaining another specific example of the production mode at each point in time before and after the power failure occurs. From FIG. 22(a) to FIG. 22(d), in addition to the effect mode at each time point, the game state at that time point is shown.

FIG. 22(a) is a specific example in the case where the power is cut off at the start of the second time-saving gaming state. FIG. 22(a) assumes a case where the second time-saving gaming state is started during the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set. In the above case, the effect mode immediately before the second time-saving game state is started becomes the previous mode. In addition, FIG. 22(a) assumes that the number of reservations is 0 at the time ta when the last game in the non-time-saving game state (the 800th game from the jackpot game) ends, and the state shifts to the customer waiting state do. The customer waiting state described above is the second time-saving game state, and the right-handed image GS1 is displayed as described above with reference to FIG. 19(a).

FIG. 22(a) assumes a case where a power cut occurs at time tb during the customer waiting state immediately after the second time-saving gaming state is started. It is also assumed that the power is restored from the power failure at time tc thereafter. In the above case, the recovery screen is displayed for a predetermined time from time tc. Moreover, if a recovery screen is displayed, each production|presentation execution means containing the image display apparatus 31 will be controlled by time saving mode B after that. In addition, it is good also as a structure controlled by the time saving mode B with the opportunity which received the power failure recovery command.

Specifically, in the customer waiting state immediately after the power is restored from the power interruption, the screen M7 during time saving described above (see FIG. 17A) is displayed. The time-saving middle screen M7 originally displays the start notification image Gn (see FIG. 16(b)), displays the shielding image GF (see FIG. 16(c)), and executes a rush effect (see FIG. 16 ( d)), the mode selection effect is executed (see FIG. 16E), and the right-handed image GS3 is displayed (see FIG. ”) is completed.

In the specific example of FIG. 22(a), it is assumed that the first game in the second time-saving gaming state is started at time d. In the above case, the period during which rush effects and the like are executed starts at time td, and then the screen M7 during time saving is displayed. If the power is not cut off, the background image GHx (background image GH of the previous mode) is displayed when the start notification image Gn is displayed (see FIG. 16B described above). On the other hand, in the specific example of FIG. 22(a) in which the power is cut off, the background image GHz (background image GH of the previous mode) is displayed when the start notification image Gn is displayed.

FIG. 22(b) is another specific example in the case where a power cut occurs at the start of the second time-saving gaming state. FIG. 22(b) is similar to FIG. 22(a) described above. It is assumed that the state is shifted to the customer waiting state. Moreover, FIG.22(b) assumes the case where power supply interruption occurs at the time tb during the customer waiting state immediately after the 2nd time saving game state was started, and the power supply is restored from the power supply interruption at the subsequent time tc.

While FIG. 22(a) above shows a specific example in which the second time-saving gaming state is started during the period in which the table scenario S is set, FIG. A specific example of starting a game state is shown. In the specific example of FIG. 22(b) above, the effect mode immediately before the second time-saving gaming state is started is the normal mode. Moreover, in the specific example of FIG.22(b), in the period after the time tc when a power interruption is restored, screen M7 during time saving of time saving mode B is displayed (similar to the specific example of FIG.22(a)).

In the specific example of FIG. 22(b), it is assumed that the first game in the second time-saving gaming state is started at time td. As described above, when the power is not turned off, when the second time-saving game state is started in the scenario unset period, a rush effect or the like in which the mode selection effect is omitted is executed (see FIG. 18(b)). . However, in the scenario unset period, if the power is cut off in the customer waiting state from the start of the second time-saving game state to the start of the first game, the rush when the second time-saving game state starts All of the production is omitted (cancelled).

FIG. 22(c) is another specific example in the case where a power cut occurs at the start of the second time-saving gaming state. In the specific example of FIG. 22(c), it is assumed that the power is cut off in the first game in the second time-saving game state. Both the case in which the table scenario Sb2 is set and the case in which the scenario is not set will be described below with reference to FIG. 22(c).

The specific example of FIG. 22(c) assumes that the first game in the second time-saving game state is started at time ta, and then the power is cut off at time tb before the game ends. As described above, in the first game in the second time-saving game state, when the table scenario Sb2 is set, rush effects and the like are executed. In addition, in the first game in the second time-saving game state, part of the rush effect and the like is executed in the case of the scenario unset period.

As shown in FIG. 22(c), the restoration screen is displayed in a period after time tc when the power failure is restored. In other words, the rush effect or the like that has been executed at the time point tb when the power is turned off is canceled. FIG. 22(c) assumes a case where the first game in the second time-saving gaming state ends at time td after the power is restored. In the above case, the recovery screen is hidden at time td, and each effect executing means (image display device 31, etc.) is controlled to the time saving mode B. Specifically, the restoration screen is switched to the screen M7 during time saving.

In the present embodiment, when the power is turned off in the second time-saving game state (including the first game), the subsequent second time-saving game state is controlled to the time-saving mode B1 from the time-saving mode B1 to the time-saving mode B3. . That is, regardless of the time saving mode B selected on the screen M5, the time saving mode B1 is set after the power is restored. Even if the power is cut off before the time saving mode B is selected in the mode selection performance after the first game in the second time saving game state is started, the time saving mode B1 is set after the power is restored. However, if the power cut occurs in the customer waiting state before the start of the first game in the second time-saving gaming state (for example, in the case of FIG. 22 (a) described above), the time-saving mode selected in the subsequent mode selection effect Move to B. It should be noted that, during the period after time td, a configuration may be adopted in which the interrupted rush effect or the like can be executed.

FIG. 22(d) is another specific example in the case where the power is cut off at the start of the second time-saving gaming state. In the specific example of FIG. 22(d), it is assumed that the power is cut off in the game immediately before the gap game. That is, it is assumed that the power is cut off in the final game of the first time-saving game state of 799 times. Specifically, in the specific example of FIG. 22(d), when the 799th game in the first time-saving game state is started at time ta, and then the power is cut off at time tb before the game ends assume. Further, in the specific example of FIG. 22(d), it is assumed that the power failure is restored at time tc, and the game that was being executed at the time of power failure is terminated at time td. In the above case, the recovery screen is displayed during the period from time tc to time td.

As shown in FIG. 22(d), at the end time td of the final game of the first time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state ends and shifts to the non-time-saving game state. As described above, when power interruption does not occur, the production mode of the gap game becomes the time saving mode B. That is, the effect mode in a series of periods of the last game in the first time-saving game state, the gap game, and the first game in the second time-saving game state becomes the time-saving mode B. On the other hand, when a power cut occurs in the final game of the first time-saving game state, the effect mode becomes the normal mode until the second special figure is variably displayed after the end of the game.

In the specific example of FIG. 22(d), it is assumed that the pending number is 0 at the end time td of the final game in the first time-saving game state in which the power supply has been cut off. In the above case, the customer waiting state starts from time td. In the customer waiting state described above, the production mode becomes the normal mode. In addition, the customer waiting state is a non-time-saving gaming state, and the second special figure cannot be variably displayed in principle. In the specific example of FIG. 22(d), it is assumed that the variable display of the first special figure is started at time te. That is, it is assumed that the gap game in which the first special figure is variably displayed is started from time te. Also, in the specific example of FIG. 22(d), it is assumed that the gap game ends at time tf. In the above case, the second time-saving game state is started from time tf.

In this embodiment, when a power cut occurs in the final game of the first time-saving game state, the effect mode becomes the normal mode until the second special figure is variably displayed after the end of the game. Therefore, at time tf when the second time-saving gaming state is started, in principle, the production mode is the normal mode. In the specific example of FIG. 22(d), it is assumed that the variable display of the second special figure is started at time tg. In the above cases, the mode shifts to time mode B from time tg. In addition, when the first special figure is variably displayed in the game next to the gap game, the production mode of the game is the normal mode. Also, if the power is cut off during a gap game, the right-handed image GS is not displayed on the recovery screen. After that, when the gap game ends, the time saving mode B is controlled even in the case of shifting to the customer waiting state or in the case of the variable display of the special figure.

FIG. 23(a) is a diagram for explaining the mode of the image (number-of-games image GE) and the lamp (effect lamp 33) when the power is turned off. FIG. 23(a) shows numbers displayed by the number-of-games image GE before and after the power is turned off. In addition, FIG. 23(a) shows the mode of the effect lamp 33 at each time point. Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, among the modes (light emission modes) of the effect lamp 33, the mode in a normal game may be referred to as a "normal mode". The normal mode is variable according to the game state and the effect executed in each game.

In the specific example of FIG. 23(a), it is assumed that the power is cut off at time ta when the number of games image GE displays the number "X", and the power is restored at time tb after that. In the above case, the recovery screen is displayed from time tb, and the recovery screen is hidden at time tc thereafter. As shown in FIG. 23(a), in the present embodiment, the effect lamp 33 is displayed in the recovery mode during the period in which the recovery screen is displayed. In the specific example of FIG. 23(a), it is assumed that the number "X" is less than 799 and the game state at time ta is a low probability non-time-saving game state. In addition, as the time tc in FIG. 23(a), when the time ta is in the customer waiting state, it is assumed that a predetermined time has passed from the time tb, and when the time ta is a special figure fluctuation period , is assumed to be the end of the variable period.

In the specific example of FIG. 23(a), it is assumed that the remaining number of times N until the second time-saving game state is greater than the numerical value "0" at the time tc when the recovery screen display period ends. Specifically, it is assumed that the gaming state after time tc is a non-time-saving gaming state. As a case where the remaining number of times N is greater than the numerical value "0" at time tc, it is assumed that the clearing operation is executed after the power failure occurs until the power is restored, and the remaining number of times N is initialized to the initial value "800". be done. As another case where the remaining number of times N is greater than the numerical value "0" at time tc, it is assumed that the remaining number of times N greater than the numerical value "1" is left unchanged before and after the power is turned off. As described above, the number-of-games image GE displays the number "0" when the power is restored, regardless of whether or not the remaining number of times N is set before and after the power interruption.

In this embodiment, the second time-saving game state is started when the remaining number of times N is subtracted from the numerical value "1" to the numerical value "0". In addition, in the period after the remaining number of times N is subtracted to the numerical value "0", the remaining number of times N does not change from the numerical value "0" until the clear operation is executed or the jackpot game is won. In the above configuration, during the period after the remaining number of times N is decremented to the numerical value "0", the second time-saving game state is not restarted until the clearing operation is executed or the jackpot game is won. Specifically, it is assumed that the game is executed 1000 times in the second time-saving game state, and the game is shifted to the non-time-saving game state. In the non-time saving game state after the above second time saving game state, even if the game is executed 800 times, the second time saving game state is not started again.

Temporarily, during the period when the remaining number of times N is "0", the period of the low-probability non-time-saving game state after the second time-saving game state ends (hereinafter, "activated period"), the number of the game number image GE is Assume a contrast ratio that starts at "0" and is incremented for each game. Further, in the above comparison, when the power is turned off/on during the activated period, the number of games image GE displays the number "0" after the power is restored, and then the number of the number of games image GE is added for each game. shall be displayed. In the above comparison, the number-of-games image GE may be added to the number "800" in the activated period even though the second time-saving gaming state is not started. Therefore, depending on the player, there may be a problem that the motivation for the game is lowered. In consideration of the above circumstances, the present embodiment employs a configuration capable of informing whether or not it is the activated period. The above configuration will be described in detail below.

FIG. 23(b) is a schematic diagram of the screen Mh displayed when the power is turned off/on during the activated period. On the screen Mh, each image (effect symbol GA, etc.) similar to the screen (see FIG. 14(a) described above) in the normal mode before the second time-saving game state is started (unactivated) is displayed. However, in the period in which the second time-saving gaming state is not activated, the number-of-games image GE displays a number indicating the number of games played since the power was turned on or the number of games played since the jackpot game, but the number-of-games image GE on the screen Mh displays the numbers. do not display Specifically, when the power is turned off/on during the activated period, as shown in FIG. 23(b), the number-of-games image GE displays symbols "???" instead of numbers.

FIG. 23(c) is a schematic diagram of the number-of-games image GE in the activated period after the second time-saving gaming state ends. The number-of-games image GE shown in FIG. 23(c) is obtained by omitting numbers from the number-of-games image GE displayed in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state other than the activated period. According to the above configuration, the player is substantially notified of whether or not it is the activated period.

FIG. 23(d) is a diagram for explaining another specific example of the aspect of the number-of-games image GE and the effect lamp 33 when power is cut off. FIG. 23(d) shows the numbers displayed by the number-of-games image GE at each time point and the mode of the effect lamp 33, as in FIG. 23(a) described above. In the specific example of FIG. 23(d), it is assumed that the second time-saving gaming state is started at time ta, and the last (1000th) game of the second time-saving gaming state ends at time tb thereafter. In the above case, the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state after time tb becomes the activated period. In the above case, the number-of-games image GE (see FIG. 23(c) described above) that does not display numbers is displayed in the activated period after time tb.

In the specific example of FIG. 23(d), as shown in FIG. , when the power is turned on, the recovery screen is displayed for a predetermined period of time. Moreover, during the period in which the recovery screen is displayed, the effect lamp 33 is displayed in the recovery mode. In the specific example of FIG. 23(d), the recovery screen is displayed until time te, and then the screen Mh described above is displayed. As shown in FIG. 23(d), in the activated period after time te when the screen Mh is displayed, the number-of-games image GE displays symbols "???" instead of numbers. In addition, during the period when the symbol “???” is displayed in the number-of-games image GE, the effect lamp 33 is displayed in a warning mode. A normal game can be executed in the activated period in which the symbol "???" is displayed in the number-of-games image GE. However, even during a period in which various effects are performed in the game, the effect lamp 33 continues to be displayed in a warning mode, not in a mode (normal mode) corresponding to the effect.

In the present embodiment, the remaining number of times N until the second time-saving gaming state is initialized to the numerical value "800", the display of the symbol "???" in the number of games image GE ends, Addition display of numbers is performed. In addition, at the opportunity when the remaining number of times N until the second time-saving game state is initialized to the numerical value "800", the effect lamp 33 switches from the warning mode to the normal mode. For example, when the performance lamp 33 is in the warning mode, the administrator of the gaming machine 1 can switch the performance lamp 33 to the normal mode by executing the clear operation.

As described above, in the present embodiment, an example of the configuration of the present invention that "when the power is turned on, the notification means can be controlled in a special manner when the number of determinations specified from the information reaches the specific number of times". , the remaining number of times N reaches the numerical value "0" (the number of jackpot lotteries reaches 800 times), and the game state notified by the power failure restoration command from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 120 at the time of power restoration. When it is a low probability non-time-saving game state, the notification means (ramp 33 for production, the image display device 31) has adopted a controllable configuration in a special mode (warning mode, display of symbols "???").

FIG. 24(a) is a diagram for explaining each image displayed in the non-time-saving gaming state immediately after the time-saving gaming state ends. As described above, the production mode immediately after the non-time-saving gaming state is started becomes the normal mode. As shown in FIG. 24(a), in the non-time-saving game state immediately after the time-saving game state ends, each image (production pattern GAx, etc.) displayed in the normal mode is displayed. Further, in the non-time-saving game state immediately after the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) ends, in addition to the above images, the left-handed image GL is displayed.

The left-handed image GL is an image for notifying that the game should be played left-handed. As described above, in the time-saving gaming state, it is more advantageous to play the game with the right hand than with the left hand, and the right-handed image GS (right-handed lamp 28) instructs that the player should play with the right hand. On the other hand, in the non-time-saving gaming state, playing the game with the left hand is more advantageous than playing with the right hand. Therefore, when shifting from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state, it is preferable to have a configuration in which it is notified that the game should be played with the left hand (that the game should be switched from the right hand to the left hand). In consideration of the above circumstances, the left-hand shot image GL is displayed immediately after the time-saving game state ends.

FIG. 24(b) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the period during which the left-handed shot image GL is displayed. The left-handed image GL is normally displayed for a predetermined time after transitioning to the non-time-saving gaming state. Hereinafter, the period from the transition to the non-time-saving gaming state to the elapse of the time is referred to as "period Th". FIG. 24(b) shows the above period Th.

FIG. 24(b) shows the screen (effect mode) displayed at each time point and whether or not the left-hand shot image GL is displayed. The specific example of FIG. 24(b) assumes a case where the second time-saving gaming state ends during the scenario setting period. FIG. 24(b) shows the period of the final game in the second time-saving game state. In the final game of the second time-saving game state, the same effect as in other games (effect for notifying the success or failure of a big hit) is executed, and then the above-described end effect (see FIG. 45(b)) is executed. Sometimes. In the specific example of FIG. 24(b), the left shot image GL is displayed for the period Th.

FIG. 24(c) is a diagram for explaining another specific example of the period during which the left-handed shot image GL is displayed. In the specific example of FIG. 24(c), it is assumed that the power is cut off in the final game of the second time-saving game state. Specifically, it is assumed that the final game in the second time-saving game state is started at time ts, and then the power is cut off at time ta (before the end effect), and the power is restored at time tb. . Further, it is assumed that the final game in the second time-saving game state is resumed from time tb and ends at time te.

In the above specific example of FIG. 24(c), the recovery screen (see FIG. 21(a)) is displayed from time tb to time te. Also, the left-hand shot image GL is displayed for a period Th starting from the time tb when the final game ends. However, as can be seen from FIG. 24(c), when the power is cut off in the final game in the second time-saving game state, the ending effect that should be executed after that is omitted. It should be noted that, similarly, when the power is cut off in the final game in the first time-saving game state, the ending effect that should be executed in the final game is omitted.

FIG. 24D is a diagram for explaining another specific example of the period during which the left-handed shot image GL is displayed. In the specific example of FIG. 24(d), it is assumed that the power supply is interrupted during the period Th. Specifically, it is assumed that power is interrupted at time ta in period Th, and the power is restored at time tb thereafter. In the above case, the display of the left shot image GL is stopped. Specifically, even if the power failure is restored before the period Th elapses, the left-handed image GL is not displayed on the restoration screen and the normal mode screen displayed thereafter.

FIGS. 25(a-1) and 25(a-2) are diagrams for explaining another specific example of the customer waiting screen Mx. Above-mentioned FIG. 19(a) demonstrated the customer waiting screen Mx displayed in the customer waiting state at the time of the start of the 2nd time saving game state. FIG. 25(a-1) and FIG. 25(a-2) are specific examples of the customer waiting screen Mx (1, 2) displayed in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state.

FIG. 25(a-1) is a schematic diagram of the customer waiting screen Mx1. In the customer waiting screen Mx1, various images (including effect symbols GA) displayed in the normal mode and the previous mode are displayed in the same way as the customer waiting screen Mx described with reference to FIG. 19(a). Further, in the customer waiting image Mx1, in addition to the above images, a loading notification image GK is displayed. The installed notification image GK is an image for notifying that the second time-saving gaming state is provided. For example, the installation notification image GK displays a message "second time-saving installation".

FIG. 25(a-1) is a schematic diagram of the customer waiting screen Mx2. In the customer waiting screen Mx2, various images displayed in the normal mode and the previous mode are displayed in the same way as the customer waiting screen Mx and the customer waiting screen Mx1 described with reference to FIG. 19(a). However, in the customer waiting screen Mx2, the effect image GA is hidden and a demo movie is displayed instead of the background image GHx. The demo movie includes, for example, a movie that is displayed in reach rendering. Further, on the customer waiting screen Mx2, in addition to the above images, an installation notification image GK is displayed (similar to the customer waiting screen Mx1).

In this embodiment, in the customer waiting state, the customer waiting screen Mx1 and the customer waiting screen Mx2 are alternately displayed. Specifically, when the customer waiting screen Mx1 is displayed for a predetermined time, the customer waiting screen Mx1 switches to the customer waiting screen Mx2. After that, when the customer waiting screen Mx2 is displayed for a predetermined time, the customer waiting screen Mx2 switches to the customer waiting screen Mx1. In the above configuration, in the customer waiting state (non-gaming period), it is notified that the gaming machine 1 can shift to the second time-saving gaming state. Therefore, there is an advantage that the player can confirm whether or not it is possible to shift to the second time-saving gaming state before playing the game. Note that the installation notification image GK may be displayed on one of the customer waiting screen Mx1 and the customer waiting screen Mx2, and may be hidden on the other.

However, for example, in order to grasp whether or not to confirm the necessity of the clear operation, the administrator of the gaming machine 1 determines whether the power of the gaming machine 1 can be shifted to the second time-saving gaming state. You may want to check the status. However, the customer waiting screen Mx1 and the customer waiting screen Mx2 are not displayed when the gaming machine 1 is powered off. Therefore, when the gaming machine 1 is powered off, it cannot be confirmed whether or not it is possible to shift to the second time-saving gaming state depending on the installed notification image GK.

In consideration of the above circumstances, it is preferable to have a configuration including a display member that displays (is described) a message that indicates that the second time-saving gaming state is provided. According to the configuration including the display member described above, it is possible to grasp whether or not the gaming machine 1 can shift to the second time-saving gaming state even when the power is shut off. A modified example in which a display member is employed will be described below with reference to FIGS. 25(b-1) and 25(b-2).

FIG. 25(b-1) is a diagram for explaining a modification when a display member is employed. FIG. 25(b-1) shows an excerpt of an area corresponding to the area Rx in the gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment shown in FIG. The game machine 1 includes members including an outer frame 2, an inner frame 3, a glass frame 4, etc. (hereinafter referred to as "frame members"), a game board 10 detachable from the frame members, a main control board 110, an effect control board 120, and the like. (hereinafter referred to as "board member"). In the modified example of FIG. 25(b-1), it is assumed that a frame member is adopted as the display member. Concretely, a message of “second time-saving installation” is displayed (described) near the right-side production lamp 33 among the two production lamps 33 .

FIG. 25(b-2) is a diagram for explaining another modification when a display member is employed. FIG. 25(b-2) shows an excerpt of the area corresponding to the area Ry shown in FIG. 1 in the gaming machine 1 in the modified example. In the modified example of FIG. 25(b-2), it is assumed that the board member is employed as the display member. Specifically, a message "second time saving installation" is displayed below the big winning opening 16 in the game area. According to each of the modifications described above, it is possible to grasp from the display member whether or not it is possible to shift to the second time-saving gaming state during the period in which the gaming machine 1 is not powered on. However, the area where the message indicating that the game can be shifted to the second time-saving gaming state can be changed as appropriate.

By the way, there is a situation that the message indicating that the second time-saving gaming state is installed is more likely to be visually recognized from a distant place as the game machine 1 is located on the upper end side. In the modified example of FIG. 25(b-1) described above, the message is displayed above the center of the frame member (gaming machine 1). Therefore, there is an advantage that the message can be easily recognized even from a remote location.

In addition, there is a circumstance that a player during a game tends to pay attention to the starting ports (13, 14) of the board members. The starting ports (13, 14) are located below the center of the board member. That is, there is a situation in which the player tends to pay attention to the lower part of the board member from the center. In the modification of FIG. 25(b-2) described above, the message indicating that the second time-saving gaming state is installed is displayed below the center of the board member. Therefore, for example, compared with the configuration in which the message is displayed above the center of the board member, the modified example of FIG. 25(b-2) has the advantage of making the player's attention to the message more easily.

<Preliminary judgment table for special symbols>
FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a pre-determination table for pre-determining the result of the jackpot lottery. When the game ball enters the first starting winning port 13 or the second starting winning port 14 (at the time of starting winning), winning information is generated by the preliminary determination table.

The winning information described above is generated in order to determine in advance the result of the jackpot lottery. Specifically, the winning information includes the type of special symbol display device (the type of the start opening detection switch that detects that the game ball has entered the start opening), the type of special symbol, the game state, the random value for reach determination, and the It is generated based on the random number for special symbol variation. Also, a start winning designation command specifying the generated winning information is generated and transmitted to the effect control board 120 . By the start winning designation command indicating the above winning information, the result of preliminary judgment (losing, big win, small win), the type of special design, and the variation pattern (whether or not reach occurs) can be discriminated before the start of variation of special symbols. Winning information (starting winning designation command) of the present embodiment is referred to, for example, when determining a so-called look-ahead effect (suspended change effect).

In the advance determination table shown in FIG. 26, as winning information for the first special symbol display device 20, winning information a (1, 2), winning information b (1 to 4), winning information c (1 to 4), winning Winning information including information d1 and winning information e1 is set. Also, as winning information for the second special symbol display device 21, winning information a (3, 4), winning information b (5-8), winning information c (5-8), winning information d (1, 2) , prize information e(1,2), prize information f and prize information g are set.

For example, if the winning information a1 or the winning information a3 is selected at the start winning, the effect control board 120 executes the effect for about 40000 ms in the game started by the starting winning. In the above production, after the normal reach production is executed, it becomes a long hit.

When the prize winning information b1 or the prize winning information b5 is selected at the time of starting winning, the effect of about 60000 ms is executed by the effect control board 120 in the game started by the starting winning. In the above production, the SP reach 1 is executed after the normal reach production is executed, resulting in a long win.

When the winning information b2 or the winning information b6 is selected at the start winning, the effect control board 120 executes the effect for about 60000 ms in the game started by the starting winning. In the above production, the SP reach 2 is executed after the normal reach production is executed, resulting in a long win.

When the winning information c1 or the winning information c5 is selected at the start winning, the effect control board 120 executes the effect for about 70000ms in the game started by the starting winning. In the above effects, after the normal reach effect is executed, the SPSP reach effect 1 is executed directly or via the SP reach effect, resulting in a long win.

When the winning information c2 or the winning information c6 is selected at the start winning, the effect control board 120 executes the effect for about 70000 ms in the game started by the starting winning. In the above effects, after the normal ready-to-win effect is executed, the SP ready-to-win effect 2 is executed via the SP ready-to-win effect or directly to correspond to the long win effect.

When the prize winning information d1 or the prize winning information d2 is selected at the start winning prize, the effect control board 120 executes a small win or short win effect for about 20000 ms in the game started by the starting win.

Winning information e1, Winning information a2, Winning information b3, Winning information b4, Winning information c3, Winning information c4, Winning information e2, Winning information a4, Winning information b7, Winning information b8, Winning information c7, The winning information c8 and the winning information f are determined when the big hit lottery based on the starting winning that determined the winning information is lost.

As shown in FIG. 26, in the present embodiment, in the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state), winning information is not set when the game ball wins the first start port 13 . Specifically, in the time-saving gaming state, the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 20 (a combination of a random number for special symbol determination and a random number for symbols), a random number for reach determination, and a random number for special symbol variation However, winning information is not set when a game ball wins in the first start port 13.例文帳に追加Further, in the time-saving game state, when the game ball has won the first start port 13, the start winning designation command is not generated.

Next, the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment will be described.
<Main processing of the main control board>
FIG. 27 is a flowchart for explaining the main processing by the main control board 110. FIG. When power is supplied from the power supply board 170, a system reset occurs in the main CPU 111, and the main CPU 111 performs the following main processing.

When the main processing is started, the main CPU 111 executes initialization processing (S10). In the initialization process, main CPU 111 executes a startup program and initializes a predetermined storage area of main RAM 113 . For example, the initialization process sets the stack pointer appropriately. Note that in the initialization process, each piece of information (such as the number of normal outs) for displaying the base value described above is not initialized. Further, in the initialization process, the game state (high accuracy flag, time saving flag) and the remaining number M of the time saving game state are not initialized. In addition, the remaining number of times N until the time-saving gaming state is not initialized in the initialization process.

After executing the initialization process, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the clear button 30 is operated (S20). When determining that the clear button 30 has not been operated (S20: No), the main CPU 111 advances the process to the game random number update process (S60). On the other hand, when determining that the clear button 30 has been operated (S20: Yes), the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the setting key device 115 has been rotated to a specific position (S30). That is, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the setting change switch 115a is in the ON state. When determining that the setting key device 115 has been rotated (S30: Yes), the main CPU 111 executes setting change processing (S40).

In the above configuration, if both the setting key device 115 and the clear button 30 are operated when the power is turned on, the setting change process is executed. That is, the setting change mode described above is started. In the setting change process, an operation for changing the setting value (operation of the clear button 30) is accepted. When the setting change switch 115a is turned off, the setting value displayed by the base display 114 is stored in the main RAM 113, and the setting change process ends.

In the setting change process of this embodiment, various information in the main RAM 113 is initialized. For example, in the setting change process, the game state is initialized to a low-probability non-time-saving game state. Specifically, the game state storage area of the main RAM 113 stores a high probability flag and a time saving flag. The high probability flag is set to the ON state in the high probability game state, and is set to the OFF state in the low probability game state. In addition, the time saving flag is set to the ON state in the time saving game state, and is set to the OFF state in the non-time saving game state. In the setting change process, the high accuracy flag and the time saving flag are initialized to the OFF state.

Further, in the setting change process, the remaining number of times M of the time saving game state is initialized to a numerical value "0", and the initial value "800" is set to the remaining number of times N until the second time saving game state. In the above configuration, in other words, the number of remaining games until the second time-saving game state is activated is initialized in the setting change process. After completing the setting change process, the main CPU 111 advances the process to the game random number update process.

In step S30 described above, when determining that the setting key device 115 has not been rotated (S30: No), the main CPU 111 executes the clear operation processing. In the clear operation time process, similarly to the above-described setting change process, the high accuracy flag and the time saving flag are initialized to the OFF state. Further, in the clear operation process, the remaining number of times M of the time saving game state is initialized to a numerical value "0", and the remaining number of times N is initialized to a numerical value "800". Note that in the setting change process and the clear operation process, each information for displaying the base value described above is not initialized. Each piece of information for displaying the base value is not initialized except when an error requiring a cold start (for example, a backup error) occurs.

In the above configuration, the area of the main RAM 113 to be initialized may be common or different between the setting change process and the clear operation process. Also, a setting confirmation mode may be provided in which the current setting values are displayed on the base display 114 although the setting values cannot be changed. For example, when the setting key device 115 is rotated to a specific position after the process proceeds to step S60, the process may be changed to the setting confirmation mode.

After executing the clear operation process, the main CPU 111 executes game random number update process (S60). In the game random number update process described above, the special symbol variation random number and reach determination random number are updated. The game random number updating process described above is repeatedly executed until a predetermined interruption occurs.

<Timer interrupt processing of the main control board>
FIG. 28 is a flowchart for explaining timer interrupt processing by the main control board 110. As shown in FIG. A reset clock pulse generation circuit provided on the main control board 110 generates a clock pulse every predetermined period (4 ms), thereby executing the timer interrupt processing described below.

When the above timer interrupt processing is executed, in step S101, the main CPU 111 saves the information stored in the register to the stack area. After executing step S101, the main CPU 111 executes time control processing (S102). In the above time control process, the main CPU 111 updates the special symbol time counter, updates the special game timer counter such as the opening time of the special electric accessory, and updates the normal symbol time counter that defines the fluctuation time of the normal symbol display device 22. Various timer counters are updated, such as renewal, renewal of a general electric open time counter that defines the open time of the second start port 14 . Specifically, the main CPU 111 subtracts 1 from the special symbol time counter, the special game timer counter, the normal symbol time counter, and the normal electric opening time counter.

After executing the time control process, the main CPU 111 executes random number update process (S103). In the random number update process, the main CPU 111 updates the random number for special symbol determination, the random number for big win symbol, the random number for small win symbol, and the random number for hit determination. Specifically, the numerical value "1" is added to each random number counter indicating each random number value.

After executing the random number update process, the main CPU 111 executes an initial random number counter update process (step S104). In this embodiment, when the random number is added up to the maximum value, the random number is set to the value of the initial random number counter. In the initial random number counter update processing, the main CPU 111 controls an initial random number counter for special symbol determination indicating an initial random number for special symbol determination, an initial random number counter for big winning symbols indicating an initial random number for big winning symbols, and an initial random number counter for small winning symbols. A numerical value "1" is added to each of the small winning symbol initial random number counters indicating the initial random number.

After executing the initial random number counter update process, the main CPU 111 executes an input control process (S105). In the input control process, the main CPU 111 controls the first starting opening detection switch 13a, the second starting opening detection switch 14a, the gate detection switch 15a, the big winning opening detection switches (16a, 17a), the general winning opening detection switch 18a, and the out ball. It is determined whether or not there is an input to each switch of the detection switch 19a.

After executing the input control process, the main CPU 111 executes a special symbol special electric control process (S106) for controlling the special symbol display devices (20, 21) and the special electric accessories (opening/closing door 16b, movable piece 17b). Execute. In addition, the main CPU 111 executes the general-purpose general electric control processing (S107) after executing the special-design special electric control processing. In the normal pattern normal electric control process, the normal symbol display device 22 and the normal electric accessories (opening/closing door 14b) are controlled.

After executing the general/universal electric power control process, the main CPU 111 executes a payout control process (S108). In the payout control process, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the special winning opening 16, the first starting opening 13, the second starting opening 14, or the general winning opening 18. Also, in the payout control process, when determining that a game ball has won a winning hole, the main CPU 111 transmits to the payout control board 130 a payout number designation command corresponding to the winning hole.

Specifically, the general winning opening prize ball counter, the big winning opening prize ball counter, and the starting opening prize ball counter are checked, and a payout number designation command corresponding to each winning opening is transmitted to the payout control board 130 . After that, predetermined data is subtracted from the prize ball counter corresponding to the transmitted number-of-payout designation command to update the prize ball counter.

After executing the payout control process, the main CPU 111 executes a data creation process (S109). In the data creation process, external information data (such as information indicating that the jackpot is in progress) to be transmitted to the outside of the gaming machine 1, starting opening opening/closing solenoid data that defines the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing door 14b (second starting opening 14), opening/closing door 16b and movable piece 17b (large winning opening) opening and closing solenoid data that defines the opening and closing pattern, special symbol display device data that defines the display pattern of the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21, Ordinary design display device data that defines the display pattern of the ordinary design display device 22 is created.

After executing the data creation process, the main CPU 111 executes an output control process (S110). In the output control process, the main CPU 111 outputs various data (starting port opening/closing solenoid data, etc.) created in step S109 via the port. The main CPU 111 also executes a command transmission process for transmitting the command set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 113 . For example, the above-described start winning designation command is stored in the above performance transmission data storage area.

After executing the output control process, the main CPU 111 executes a counting process (S111). In the counting process described above, the number of prize balls and the number of outs are counted in order to calculate the base value B of the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 111, in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, when a game ball enters the general winning hole 18 (when the game ball is detected by the general winning hole detection switch 18a), the base calculation prize ball counter A numerical value "10" (the number of winning balls corresponding to the general winning opening 18) is added to the (normal number of winning balls) in the counting process.

Similarly, in the low probability non-time-saving gaming state, when the game ball wins the first start port 13, the number "3", when the game ball wins the second start port 14, the number "3", the first big winning port 16 When the game ball wins, the numerical value "15" is added to the winning ball counter for base calculation. On the other hand, except for the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, the base calculation prize ball counter is not added.

When a game ball is detected by the out ball detection switch 19a, the main CPU 111 adds a numerical value "1" to the out counter for base calculation (the number of normal outs) in the counting process of the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state. On the other hand, the out-counter for base calculation is not added except for the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state. Further, when a game ball is detected by the out ball detection switch 19a, the numerical value "1" is added to the total out counter in the counting process regardless of the game state.

After executing the counting process, the main CPU 111 executes a base display process (S112). In the base display process, a base value is calculated from the number of normal winning balls and the number of normal outs counted in the counting process described above, and displayed on the base display 114 . After executing the base display process, the main CPU 111 restores the information saved in step S101 to the register of the main CPU 111 (S113).

<Input control processing>
FIG. 29 is a flowchart for explaining the input control processing (S105 in FIG. 12 described above) by the main control board 110. FIG. After starting the input control process, the main CPU 111 executes a general winning hole detection switch input process (S121). In the general winning hole detection switch input process described above, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is input from the general winning hole detection switch 18a. That is, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning hole 18 . When the detection signal is input from the general winning hole detection switch 18a, the main CPU 111 adds predetermined data to the general winning hole prize ball counter to update it.

After executing the general winning opening detection switch input process, the main CPU 111 executes the big winning opening detection switch input process (S122). In the big winning hole detection switch input process, the main CPU 111 determines whether a detection signal from the big winning hole detection switches (16a, 17a) is input. That is, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the big winning opening (16, 17). The main CPU 111 adds predetermined data to the big winning hole prize ball counter when a detection signal is input from the big winning hole detection switch.

After executing the big winning opening detection switch input process, the main CPU 111 executes the first start opening detection switch input process (S123). In the first starting port detection switch input process, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the first starting port detection switch 13a. That is, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the first start hole 13 . When it is determined that the game ball has entered the first starting hole 13 in the first starting hole detection switch input process, predetermined data for judging a big hit is set.

After executing the first starting hole detection switch input process, the main CPU 111 executes the second starting hole detection switch input process. In the second starting port detection switch input process, the main CPU 111 determines whether a detection signal has been input from the second starting port detection switch 14a. That is, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting port 14 . When it is determined that the game ball has entered the second start hole 14 in the above-described second start hole detection switch input process, a big hit is determined in the same manner as when the game ball enters the first start hole 13. Predetermined data is set to do so.

After executing the second starting port detection switch input process, the main CPU 111 executes gate detection switch input process. In the gate detection switch input process, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the gate detection switch 15a. That is, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal symbol gate 15 . When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the normal pattern gate 15 in the above gate detection switch input processing, predetermined data for performing the normal pattern lottery is set.

<First start port detection switch input processing>
FIG. 30 is a flow chart for explaining the first starting port detection switch input process (S123 in FIG. 29 described above) by the main control board 110. FIG. When the first starting port detection switch input process is started, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the first starting port detection switch 13a (S131). When determining that the detection signal is not input from the first starting port detection switch 13a (S131: No), the main CPU 111 terminates the first starting port detection switch input process.

When determining that a detection signal has been input from the first starting opening detection switch 13a (S131: Yes), the main CPU 111 updates the starting opening prize ball counter (S132). Specifically, the main CPU 111 adds the number of prize balls corresponding to the first starting hole 13 (for example, the numerical value "3") to the starting hole prize ball counter.

After updating the starting prize ball counter, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the reserved number set in the first special symbol reserved number (U1) storage area is less than 4 (S133). When the number of reservations set in the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area is not less than 4 (S133: No), that is, when the number of reservations is 4 (U1=4), the main CPU 111 performs the first start End the mouth detection switch input process.

When the number of reservations set in the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area is less than 4 (S133: Yes), the main CPU 111 acquires various random numbers. Specifically, the main CPU 111 acquires a special symbol determination random number value (S134), acquires a big win symbol random number value (S135), acquires a small win symbol random number value (S136), and acquires a game random number value. Numerical values (random number for special symbol variation and random number for reach determination) are acquired (S137).

Each random number value obtained in steps S134 to S137 is stored in the first special symbol storage area (first to fourth storage sections). Specifically, the above-described first special symbol storage area includes the first storage section to the fourth storage section. The main CPU 111 searches for empty storage units in order from the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit, and stores each acquired random number value in the empty storage units. Also, after acquiring each random number value, the main CPU 111 adds the number "1" to the first special symbol reserved number (U1) storage area (S138).

After adding the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area, the main CPU 111 executes a preliminary determination process (S139). In the pre-determination process, the main CPU 111 determines each random number obtained in steps S134 to S137 based on the pre-determination table (see FIG. 26 described above) corresponding to the current gaming state.

When it is determined that the game ball has entered the second starting hole 14 in the above-described second starting hole detection switch input process, the same process as the first starting hole detection switch input process is performed. However, in the above-described first starting port detection switch input process, the first special symbol reserved number (U1) storage area is added, while in the second starting port detection switch input process, the second special symbol reserved number (U2) Storage space is added. Also, in the second starting opening detection switch input process, each acquired random number value is stored in the second special symbol storage area. That is, the first starting opening detection switch input process and the second starting opening detection switch input process differ only in the updated storage area (special symbol reservation number storage area, special symbol storage area), and the other processes are in principle common. . However, in the first starting opening detection switch input process, the starting winning designation command is not transmitted in the time saving game state, and in the second starting opening detection switch input process, the starting winning designation command is transmitted even in the time saving game state. are also different.

<Pre-judgment processing>
FIG. 31 is a flow chart for explaining the pre-determination process by the main control board 110. FIG. The advance determination process of FIG. 31 is executed in both the above-described first starting opening detection switch input process and second starting opening detection switch input process. That is, the above preliminary determination processing is executed both when the game ball enters the first start hole 13 and when the game ball enters the second start hole 14 .

In the preliminary determination process, the above-described winning information (see FIG. 26) is generated, and a starting winning designation command specifying the winning information can be transmitted to the effect control board 120 . According to the start winning designation command, a look-ahead effect (for example, pending change effect) can be executed on the effect control board 120 side. However, as described above, winning information is not determined when the game ball enters the first start port 13 in the time-saving gaming state. In the above configuration, the look-ahead effect when the game ball has won the first start hole 13 is substantially prohibited in the time-saving game state.

Specifically, when the pre-determination process is started, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the current pre-determination process has been executed with the opportunity of winning a game ball into the first start hole 13. (S151). When it is determined that the preliminary determination process has been executed when the game ball has entered the first start port 13 (S151: Yes), the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the time-saving gaming state (S152). ). When determining that the game is in the time-saving gaming state (S152: Yes), the main CPU 111 terminates the preliminary determination process without generating winning information (omitting S161, which will be described later). As described above, the look-ahead effect is executed based on the winning information. Therefore, according to the present embodiment described above, the look-ahead effect when the game ball has won the first start hole 13 is substantially prohibited in the time-saving game state.

When determining that it is not in the time-saving gaming state (S152: No), the main CPU 111 executes a jackpot provisional determination process (S153). In the big hit provisional determination process, the main CPU 111 uses the special symbol determination random number value written in the special symbol reservation storage area in accordance with the start win this time to perform the big hit determination process (described later) of the game started by the start win. In S207 of FIG. 33), it is provisionally determined whether a big win, a small win, or a loss is won.

When "No" is determined in the above-described step S151, that is, when the pre-determination process is executed with the opportunity that the game ball has entered the second starting port 14, the main CPU 111 omits the above-described step S152. Then, the process after the big hit temporary determination process (S153) is executed. In the above configuration, when the game ball wins to the second start port 14, winning information is generated regardless of whether it is a time-saving game state or a non-time-saving game state (S161 described later is executed) . That is, when the game ball enters the second start port 14, the look-ahead effect can be executed regardless of whether it is in the time-saving game state or in the non-time-saving game state.

After executing the big-hit temporary determination process, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the big-hit temporary determination process has temporarily determined a big hit (S154). When the main CPU 111 temporarily determines that it is a big hit (step S154: Yes), the main CPU 111 executes a big win symbol temporary determination process (S155). In the jackpot pattern provisional determination processing, the jackpot pattern (stop pattern data) to be stopped in the game started by the start prize is provisionally determined by using the jackpot pattern random number acquired according to the start prize of this time. After executing the big hit symbol temporary determination process, the main CPU 111 proceeds to the variation pattern temporary determination process (S158).

On the other hand, when it is not provisionally determined to win a big hit in the big win provisional determination process (step S154: No), the main CPU 111 determines whether or not it is provisionally determined to win a small win (S156). When it is provisionally determined that a small hit will be won (S156: Yes), the main CPU 111 executes a small winning symbol provisional determination process (S157). In the small-hit symbol provisional determination process, a small-hit symbol (stop symbol data) to be stopped in the game started by the start winning is provisionally determined by using the small-hit symbol random number obtained in response to the current start winning. be judged. After executing the small winning symbol temporary determination process, the main CPU 111 proceeds to the variation pattern temporary determination process (S159). If it is determined to be "No" in the above-described step S156, that is, if it is temporarily determined to be a loss in the big hit temporary determination process, the main CPU 111 does not execute the symbol temporary determination process (above-mentioned S155, S157). The process proceeds to temporary determination processing S158.

In the variation pattern provisional determination process (S158), the main CPU 111 acquires the game state, the result of the temporary jackpot determination process, the result of the jackpot pattern provisional decision process, the result of the small win pattern provisional decision process, and the current start winning. Using the random number for special symbol variation and the random number for reach determination, the variation pattern of the special symbol is provisionally determined. After that, the main CPU 111 generates winning information corresponding to the variation pattern provisionally determined in the variation pattern provisional determination process (S159). In addition, a start winning designation command corresponding to the winning information is set in the effect transmission data storage area (S160), and the preliminary determination process is terminated.

By the above preliminary determination processing, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 13 or the second starting hole 14, the winning information can be transmitted to the effect control board 120 as a starting winning designation command. Therefore, the sub CPU 121 of the effect control board 120 that has received the starting winning designation command analyzes the starting winning designation command, and predetermines the special symbol variation triggered by this starting winning prize. Effect (read-ahead effect) can be executed.

However, this pre-determining process is only determined according to the game state at the time when the game ball enters the starting holes 13 and 14 . Therefore, if the game state changes before processing the first or second suspension reserved by the ball entry, the result of the jackpot determination process described later may differ from the result of the prior determination process. There is

<Special special train control processing>
FIG. 32 is a flowchart for explaining the special figure special electric control process (S106 in FIG. 12 described above) by the main control board 110. FIG. When the special figure special electric control processing is started, the main CPU 111 loads the current value of the special figure special electric processing data (0 to 5) (S181), and refers to the branch address from the loaded special figure special electric processing data (S182).

For example, when the special symbol special electric processing data is "0", the main CPU 111 executes a special symbol storage determination process (step S183). Although it will be described in detail later, in the special symbol storage determination process, the number of reservations (U1, U2) is subtracted, the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display device and the fluctuation time of the special symbol display device are set, and the special symbol display device Variable display is started. When the variable display of the special symbol display device is started, "1" is set to the special symbol special electric processing data.

When the special symbol special electric processing data is "1", the main CPU 111 executes special symbol variation processing (S184). In the special symbol variation process, when the variation time of the special symbol set in the last special symbol storage determination process has elapsed, the special symbol set in the special symbol storage determination process is displayed on the special symbol display device (20, 21). stop display. Also, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the special symbol special electric processing data is set to "2".

When the special symbol special electric processing data is "2", the main CPU 111 executes the special symbol stop processing (S185). In the special symbol stop time processing, the main CPU 111 stops and displays the special symbols displayed in the above-described special symbol variation processing for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds). Thereafter, the main CPU 111 sets "3" to the special symbol special electric processing data, and sets the opening command and the opening time for the big win if the stopped and displayed special symbol is a big win symbol. Similarly, if the stop-displayed special symbol is a small winning symbol, the main CPU 111 sets the special symbol special electric processing data to "4" and sets the opening command and the opening time for the small winning. Further, the main CPU 111 sets "0" to the special symbol special electric processing data if the stopped and displayed special symbol is a lost symbol.

When the special symbol special electric processing data is "3", that is, when the big-hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the main CPU 111 executes the big-hit game process (step S186). In the jackpot game processing, after the opening of the jackpot (hereinafter referred to as "opening period") ends, the jackpot 16 is opened according to the jackpot opening/closing solenoid data (opening pattern of the jackpot 16). That is, the above-mentioned round is started after the opening period. The big winning opening opening/closing solenoid data used in the big winning game is selected according to the big winning pattern.

After all rounds are finished, ending control (wait control) is performed for a predetermined period of time. In addition, in this embodiment, the period during which the ending control is executed may be referred to as "ending period". Also, the period from the end of the opening period to the start of the ending period may be referred to as a "round period" (a period including multiple rounds and intervals). When the ending period ends, "5" is set to the special figure special electric processing data.

When the special symbol special electric processing data is "4", that is, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the previous special symbol stopping processing, the main CPU 111 executes the small winning game processing (step S187). In the small-hit game process, small-hit opening control is executed, and after that, the big-hit opening 16 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, "1.8 seconds") according to the big-hit opening/closing solenoid data for the small winning. After that, the ending control is executed for a predetermined period, and "0" is set to the special figure special electric processing data. After executing the small winning game process, the main CPU 111 advances the process to the transition determination process (S225). In the transition determination process, it is determined whether or not the conditions for starting the second time-saving gaming state are met, and whether or not the conditions for ending the time-saving gaming state are met.

When the special figure special electric processing data is "5", the main CPU 111 executes special game end processing (S188). In the special game end process, the main CPU 111 changes the game state after the big hit game to a high probability short working time game state or a low probability short working time game state (second 1 o'clock short game state). Specifically, when shifting to the first time-saving game state after the end of the big hit, the first time-saving flag is changed to the ON state. Further, when shifting to the first time-saving game state after the end of the big win, the initial value "100" or "799" is set to the remaining number M of the first time-saving game state according to the big win pattern. After setting the game state after the jackpot game, the main CPU 111 sets the special figure special electric processing data to "0". In addition, when it shifts to high probability game state (high probability time saving game state), high probability flag changes to ON state.

<Special symbol memory determination process>
FIG. 33 is a flow chart for explaining the special symbol storage determination process (S183 in FIG. 32 described above) by the main control board 110. FIG. When the special symbol storage determination process is started, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the special symbols are being variably displayed (S201). If the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner (special symbol time counter ≠ 0) (S201: Yes), the special symbol storage determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if the special symbols are not being variably displayed (S201: No), the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the second special symbol reserved number (U2) storage area is 1 or more (S202).

When the second special symbol reserved number (U2) storage area is not 1 or more (S202: No), the main CPU 111 shifts the process to step S204, and the second special symbol reserved number (U2) storage area is 1 or more. If there is (S202: Yes), the process proceeds to step S203. In the above configuration, the second special symbol storage area is preferentially processed over the first special symbol storage area. In step S203, the main CPU 111 subtracts "1" from the value stored in the second special symbol reservation number (U2) storage area.

In step S204, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the first special symbol reserved number (U1) storage area is "1" or more. When the first special symbol reserved number (U1) storage area is not "1" or more (S204: No), the process is moved to step S215, and when the first special symbol reserved number (U1) storage area is "1" or more (S204: Yes), the process moves to step S205.

In step S205, the main CPU 111 subtracts "1" from the value of the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area. After that, in step S206, the main CPU 111 stores the random number (random number for special symbol determination, A combination of a random number for big-hit design, a random number for small-hit design, a random number for reach determination, and a random number for special design variation.) and shift processing of the start winning designation command. Specifically, the predetermined random number value and the start winning designation command stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit in the first special symbol storage area or the second special symbol storage area are stored in the storage unit one before shift to

For example, the random number value and the start winning designation command stored in the first storage section are shifted to the determination storage area (0th storage section). In addition, the predetermined random number value and the starting winning designation command stored in the first storage section are written in the determination storage area (0th storage section) and written in the determination storage area (0th storage section). The data is erased from the special symbol reserve storage area. That is, the random number value and the start winning designation command used in the previous game are erased. Also, the MODE of the start winning designation command is processed so as to correspond to the storage area after the shift.

After subtracting the pending number, the main CPU 111 executes a big hit determination process (S207). In the big-hit determination process, the main CPU 111 uses the data (random number for special symbol determination, random number for big-hit symbol, small-hit A big hit determination process is executed based on the symbol random number).

When a big win is won in the above-mentioned big win determination processing, the big win symbols to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display devices 20 and 21 are determined. Also, when winning a small win, a special special pattern for a small win is determined, and in the case of a loss, a special pattern for losing is determined.

After executing the big hit determination process, the main CPU 111 executes a variation pattern determination process (S208). In the variation pattern determination process, a variation pattern determination table based on the current gaming state is used to determine the variation pattern. Specifically, the variation pattern is determined from the variation pattern determination table according to the random number for special symbol determination, the random number for big win symbol, the random number for reach determination, and the random number for special symbol variation.

After executing the variation pattern determination process, the main CPU 111 sets a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the variation pattern determination process in the effect transmission data storage area (S209). Further, the main CPU 111 confirms the game state at the start of the variation, and sets a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the effect transmission data storage area (S210).

After setting the game state designation command, the main CPU 111 starts variable display of special symbols on the special symbol display devices 20 and 21 (S211). Specifically, when the first reservation (U1) is subtracted in this special symbol memory determination process, the first special symbol display device 20 starts the variable display, and the second reservation is performed in this special symbol memory determination process. When (U2) is subtracted, the second special symbol display device 21 starts the variable display. After starting the variable display of the special symbols on the special symbol display device, the main CPU 111 sets the special symbol time counter to a variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in step S208 (S212).

After setting the variable time, the main CPU 111 sets the customer waiting determination flag to "00H" (S213). That is, the customer waiting determination flag is cleared. The above customer waiting determination flag becomes "00H" during the variable display of the special symbols and during the special game. On the other hand, in other cases (non-gaming period), the customer waiting determination flag becomes "01H". When the customer waiting determination flag is "01H", the effect control board 120 is notified that it is a non-game period by a customer waiting command. After clearing the customer waiting determination flag, the main CPU 111 sets the special symbol special electric processing data to "1" (S214), and terminates the special symbol storage determination process.

In step S204 described above, if it is determined that the first suspension (U1) is "0", that is, if neither the first suspension (U1) nor the second suspension (U2) is stored, the main CPU 111 , determines whether or not the customer waiting determination flag is set to "01H" (S215).

When the customer waiting determination flag is set to 01H (S215: Yes), the main CPU 111 terminates the special symbol storage determination process. On the other hand, if the customer waiting determination flag is not set to "01H" (S215: No), the main CPU 111 shifts the process to step S216. In step S216, the main CPU 111 sets the customer waiting determination flag to 01H so as not to set the customer waiting command repeatedly in step S217, which will be described later. In step S217, the main CPU 111 sets a customer waiting command in the effect transmission data storage area, and terminates the special symbol storage determination process.

<Special symbol memory determination process>
FIG. 34(a) is a flowchart for explaining the special symbol stop processing (S185 in FIG. 32 described above) by the main control board 110. FIG. The special symbol stop time process described above is executed immediately after the variable display of the special symbols is stopped.

When the special symbol stop processing is started, the main CPU 111 sets a symbol confirmation command in the effect transmission data storage area (S220). After setting the symbol confirmation command, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the confirmation period has passed (S221). The determination period described above is provided so that the player can recognize that the special symbols have been stopped and displayed in the current game. The determination period is, for example, approximately 0.5 seconds. The variable display of the special figure in the next game is prohibited until the above fixed period ends. Specifically, step S221 is repeatedly executed until the fixed period ends (S221: No), and when the fixed period ends (S221: Yes), it becomes possible to shift to the subsequent steps.

When the determination period ends, the main CPU 111 sets a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the effect transmission data storage area (S222). After setting the game state designation command, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the special symbol stopped in the current game is a big-hit symbol or a small-hit symbol (hereinafter collectively referred to as "hit symbol"). S223). When the main CPU 111 determines that the symbol is a winning symbol (S223: Yes), the main CPU 111 executes a winning preparation process (S224) and ends the special symbol stopping process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning symbol is not a winning symbol (S223: Yes), the main CPU 111 executes the transition determination process (S225) and ends the special symbol stop time process.

FIG. 34(b) is a flowchart of the winning preparation process. When the winning preparation process is started, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the special symbol stopped in the current game is a big winning symbol (S230). When determining that the symbol is a big hit (S230: Yes), the main CPU 111 sets the special figure special electric processing data to "3" (big hit game processing) (S231). In addition, the main CPU 111 executes a jackpot initialization process (S233). On the other hand, if it is determined in step S230 that the symbol is not a big hit (S230: No), the main CPU 111 sets the special figure special electric processing data to "4" (small winning game processing) (S232).

In the jackpot time initialization process, various information is initialized. For example, in the jackpot time initialization process, the high probability flag which is turned ON in the high probability game state is changed to the OFF state, and shifts to the low probability game state. In addition, the time-saving flag, which is ON in the time-saving game state, is changed to the OFF state, and the remaining number of times M indicating the number of remaining games in the time-saving game state is initialized to a numerical value "0", and the state is shifted to a non-time-saving game state. do.

In the jackpot time initialization process, the remaining number of times N until the second time-saving game state is initialized. In addition, in the present embodiment, the remaining number of times N is not initialized in principle except when the above-described clear operation processing by the operation of the clear button or the trigger of the start of the jackpot game is started. For example, when the remaining number of times N reaches the operation number of times n (numerical value "0"), the game moves to the second time-saving gaming state, but the remaining number of times N is not initialized. In the above configuration, the number of times that can be shifted to the second time-saving game state is one in the period from the current jackpot game to the next jackpot game.

After executing the jackpot initializing process, the main CPU 111 executes a winning start preparation process (S234). In the winning start preparation process, for example, the opening pattern of the big winning openings (16, 17) in the big winning game is determined according to the special symbol (type of big winning). In addition, the opening pattern of the big winning openings (16, 17) in the small winning game is set. After that, the main CPU 111 issues an opening designation command according to the type of win (first probability variable length win, first probability variable short win, first normal long win, second probability variable length win, small win). (S235), the opening time corresponding to the type of winning is set (S236), and the winning preparation process is terminated.

FIG. 35(a) is a flow chart of the migration determination process. When the transition determination process is started, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the remaining number of times N is a numerical value "0" (S240). When it is determined that the remaining number of times N is the numerical value "0" (S240: Yes), that is, when the second time-saving game state is in progress or during the activated period, the main CPU 111 executes the time-saving end determination process (S245). After that, the transition determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when determining that the number of remaining times N is not "0" (S240: No), the main CPU 111 determines whether or not it is in the low probability gaming state (S241). In addition, in the above-described step S240, in the game in the high probability time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state or the low probability non-time-saving game state other than the activated period, "No" is determined in the above-described step S240.

When determining that it is not in the low probability gaming state (S241: No), the main CPU 111 sets the special figure special electric processing data to "0" (S246), and terminates the transition determination process. On the other hand, when determining that the game is in the low-probability gaming state (S241: Yes), the main CPU 111 subtracts the numerical value "1" from the remaining number of times N (S242). After that, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the remaining number of times N subtracted in step S242 is a numerical value "0" (S243). When determining that the remaining number of times N after the subtraction is not "0" (S243: No), the main CPU 111 executes the time saving end determination process, then sets the special figure special electric processing data to "0", and determines the transition. End the process. On the other hand, when determining that the remaining number of times N after the subtraction is "0" (S243: Yes), the main CPU 111 executes the second time reduction transition process (S244), and then sets the special figure special electric processing data to "0". ”, and ends the transition determination process. In the second time-saving transition processing, the numerical value "1000" is set to the remaining number of times M of the time-saving game state, the second time-saving flag is set to the ON state, and the second time-saving game state is started. In the process at the time of 2nd time reduction transition, the variation pattern determination table T is set according to the kind of table scenario Sb set. However, in the scenario unset period, the variation pattern determination table Tbx is set.

Note that the transition determination process can be changed as appropriate. FIG. 35(c) is a flow chart of the transition determination process in the modified example. In the modification of FIG. 35(c), when the transition determination process is started, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the game is in the low-probability gaming state (S241 described above). When determining that the game is not in the low-probability gaming state (S241: No), the main CPU 111 executes the above-described time-saving end determination process (S245) and terminates the transition determination process. On the other hand, when determining that the game is in the low-probability gaming state (S241: Yes), the main CPU 111 subtracts the number "1" from the remaining number N (above-mentioned S242), and the remaining number N after the subtraction is "0" or less. (S247). If the remaining number of times N after the subtraction is greater than the numerical value "0" (S247: No), the main CPU 111 executes the time saving end determination process and ends the shift determination process. In addition, as a game determined as "No" in step S247, a game in the first time-saving game state or low probability non-time-saving game state (however, N≧1 after subtraction) is assumed. On the other hand, when the remaining number of times N is equal to or less than the numerical value "0" (S247: Yes), the main CPU 111 sets the remaining number of times N to the numerical value "0". In addition, as a game that is determined to be "Yes" in step S247, a game in a low-probability non-time-saving game state in which the remaining number of times N is subtracted to the numerical value "0" (a game in which the next game is the second time-saving game state) , a game in the second time-saving game state, and a game in the activated period are assumed.

After executing step S248, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the transition flag is ON (S249). The transition flag is provided to identify whether or not the transition to the second time-saving gaming state has been completed. Specifically, the transition flag is changed to the OFF state at the time of winning the jackpot game or at the time of the clear operation, and is changed to the ON state at the opportunity of shifting to the second time-saving game state. In the above configuration, the shift flag is OFF during the period from the end of the jackpot game to the transition to the second time-saving game state, and is ON during the second time-saving game state and the activated period. When the main CPU 111 determines that the shift completion flag is ON (S249: Yes), the main CPU 111 executes the time saving end determination process and ends the shift determination process. On the other hand, when determining that the transition flag is not ON (S249: No), the main CPU 111 executes the above-described second time-saving transition process (S244) and ends the transition determination process. It should be noted that, according to the above configuration, it is determined as "Yes" in step S249 is a game in a low-probability non-time-saving game state in which the remaining number of times N is subtracted to the numerical value "0".

FIG.35(b) is a flowchart for demonstrating a time saving completion|finish determination process. When starting the time saving end determination process, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the remaining number of times M of the time saving game state is a numerical value “0” (S250). The remaining number M is stored in the main RAM 113 and indicates the remaining number of times in the first time-saving game state or the second time-saving game state. That is, in the present embodiment, the remaining number of times in the first time-saving game state and the remaining number of times in the second time-saving game state are stored as common data. In the above configuration, there is an advantage that the amount of data is reduced compared to the configuration in which the number of remaining times of each time-saving game state is stored as separate data.

When determining that the remaining number of times M is "0" (S250: Yes), the main CPU 111 terminates the time saving end determination process. On the other hand, when determining that the remaining number M is not "0" (S250: No), the main CPU 111 subtracts "1" from the remaining number M (S251). After that, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the remaining number of times M after the subtraction is "0" (S252). If the remaining count M after the subtraction is not "0" (S252: No), the main CPU 111 terminates the time saving end determination process. On the other hand, when the remaining number of times M after the subtraction is the numerical value "0" (S252: Yes), the main CPU 111 performs time saving end processing (S253).
After delegating the execution, end the time saving end determination process. In the time-saving end processing, for example, the time-saving flag is changed to the OFF state, and the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state or second time-saving game state) ends. In the process at the time of 2nd time reduction transition, the variation pattern determination table T is set according to the kind of table scenario Sb set. However, in the scenario unset period, the variation pattern determination table Tn1 is set.

FIG. 36(a) is a flow chart of the general/universal electric power control process. When starting the general electric power control process, the main CPU 111 loads the current value of the general electric power processing data (0 to 3) (S401), and refers to the branch address from the loaded general electric power processing data ( S402).

For example, when the general pattern general electric processing data is "0", the main CPU 111 executes the general pattern storage determination process (step S403). In the normal symbol memory determination process, a normal pattern lottery (hit determination process) is executed with a probability corresponding to whether it is a time-saving game state or a non-time-saving game state. In addition, the normal pattern to be stopped and displayed is determined according to the result of the normal drawing lottery. Furthermore, depending on the current game state (time-saving game state, non-time-saving game state), the normal pattern fluctuation time and the operation mode of the open/close door 14b (second start port 14) are determined by lottery. When the normal pattern lottery is executed, the main CPU 111 changes the normal pattern general electric processing data to "1" when ending the normal symbol storage determination process.

When the normal pattern normal electric processing data is "1", the main CPU 111 executes normal symbol variation processing (S404). In the normal design variation process, the normal design is variably displayed in the variation time determined in the normal design memory determination process. The main CPU 111 changes the normal pattern/general electric processing data to "2" when ending the normal symbol variation processing.

When the normal pattern normal electric processing data is "2", the main CPU 111 executes normal symbol stop processing (S405). In the normal design stop process, the normal design determined in the normal design memory determination process is stopped and displayed for at least a predetermined wait period (for example, about 0.5 seconds). When ending the normal symbol stop processing, the main CPU 111 changes the normal pattern normal electric processing data to “3”.

When the general/universal electric power processing data is "3", the main CPU 111 executes the opening/closing control process (S405). In the open/close control process, when the open symbol is stopped and displayed in the normal symbol stop process, the open/close door 14b is opened and closed in the operation mode determined in the normal symbol storage determination process. When ending the opening/closing control process, the main CPU 111 changes the general/universal/universal electrical process data to "0".

FIG. 36(b) is a flow chart of normal symbol memory determination processing. The normal symbol storage determination process described above is executed in the above-described normal pattern normal electric control process.

When the main CPU 111 starts the normal symbol storage determination process, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the normal symbol reserved number G (the number of reserved normal symbol lotteries) is greater than or equal to "1" (S410). When determining that the normal symbol reserved number G is not equal to or greater than the numerical value "1" (G=0) (S410: No), the main CPU 111 terminates the normal symbol storage determination process. On the other hand, when determining that the number G of reserved normal symbols is greater than or equal to "1" (S410: Yes), the main CPU 111 subtracts the number "1" from the reserved number G of normal symbols (S411), and shifts the storage area. (S412).

Specifically, when the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 15, a hit determination random number value is acquired and stored in the normal symbol reservation storage area. The normal symbol reservation storage area includes storage sections from a first storage section to a fourth storage section. When the main CPU 111 acquires the random number value for winning judgment, it preferentially stores the random number value for winning judgment in order from the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit among the free storage units. In the above-described step S412, the hit determination random number value stored in the first storage section is stored (shifted) to the determination storage area (0th storage section) of the normal symbol reservation storage area. In addition, the hit determination random number value stored in the second storage unit to the fourth storage unit is stored in the first storage unit to the third storage unit.

When the hit determination random number value is stored in the determination storage area, the main CPU 111 determines the hit determination random number value according to the game state (time-saving game state, non-time-saving game state) (S413). Specifically, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the numerical value defined in the above-described hit determination table (see FIG. 6B) matches the hit determination random number value. After that, the main CPU 111 determines the normal symbols to be stopped and displayed using the normal symbol determination table (see FIGS. 7(b-1) and 7(b-2)) according to the gaming state (S414). .

Further, the main CPU 111 randomly determines the variation time according to the game state (S415), and randomly determines the operation mode of the opening/closing door 14b according to the normal symbols and game state determined in step S414 (S416). The opening/closing door 14b operates (opens/closes) in the operation mode determined in S416 in the operating state. After determining the operation mode of the open/close door 14b, the main CPU 111 changes the normal pattern/general electric processing data to "1" (S417), and terminates the normal pattern storage determination process.

Next, processing executed by the sub CPU 121 of the effect control board 120 will be described. As described above, when the effect control board 120 receives the variation pattern designation command from the main control board 110, the effect corresponding to the variation pattern designation command is determined by lottery and executed.

<Main processing of production control board>
FIG. 37(a) is a flow chart for explaining the main processing by the effect control board. In step S510, the sub CPU 121 performs initialization processing. In the initialization process, the sub CPU 121 reads a program for executing the main process from the sub ROM 122 and initializes the sub RAM 123 .

After executing the initialization process, the sub CPU 121 executes a recovery notification process (S520). In the restoration notification process, a process for notifying whether or not the second time-saving gaming state has already been activated is executed. After executing the restoration notification process, the sub CPU 121 executes the effect random number update process (S530). In the effect random number update process, the sub CPU 121 updates various random numbers stored in the sub RAM 123 . The effect random value update process is repeatedly executed until the interrupt process is executed.

FIG. 37(b) is a flowchart of the notification process at the time of restoration. When the restoration notification process is started, the sub CPU 121 determines whether or not the game state at the end of display of the power restoration screen is the high-probability game state or the jackpot game (S521). When determining that the game is in a high-probability game state or a jackpot game (S521: Yes), the sub CPU 121 determines to control the effect lamp 33 in a normal mode (a mode corresponding to the game state) (S524). End the notification process. On the other hand, when determining that the game is not in the high-probability game state or the jackpot game (S521: No), the sub CPU 121 determines whether or not the remaining number of times M at the end of displaying the power restoration screen is the numerical value "0" (S522). ). When determining that the number of remaining times M is not "0" (S522: No), the sub CPU 121 determines to control the effect lamp 33 in the normal mode (S525), and terminates the restoration notification process. On the other hand, when determining that the number of remaining times M is "0" (S522: Yes), the sub CPU 121 determines whether or not the number of remaining times N is "0" at the end of displaying the recovery screen (S523). ).

If the sub CPU 121 determines that the remaining number of times N at the end of displaying the recovery screen is not the number "0" (S523: No), the sub CPU 121 determines to display the number "0" in the number of games image GE (S524), It decides to control the effect lamp 33 in the normal mode, and terminates the notification process at the time of restoration. On the other hand, in step S523 described above, if it is determined that the number of remaining times N at the end of display of the recovery screen is the numerical value "0" (S523: Yes), the sub CPU 121 puts the symbols "???" It decides to display (S526), decides to control the effect lamp 33 in a warning mode (S527), and ends the restoration time notification process.

<Timer interrupt processing of production control board>
FIG. 38 is a flowchart for explaining timer interrupt processing. The sub CPU 121 executes timer interrupt processing approximately every 2 milliseconds. When the timer interrupt process is started, the sub CPU 121 saves the information stored in the register to the stack area (S601).

After saving various information to the stack area, the sub CPU 121 updates various timer counters used in the effect control board 120 (S602). After updating the timer counter, the sub CPU 121 executes command analysis processing (S603). In the command analysis process, the sub CPU 121 analyzes commands in the receive buffer of the sub RAM 123 .

After executing the command analysis process, the sub CPU 121 executes the effect input control process (S604). Although the details will be described later, in the effect input control process, control according to the operation of the effect button 8 is executed. After executing the effect input control processing, the sub CPU 121 executes data output processing (S605) for transmitting various data set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 123 to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140. In step S<b>606 , the sub CPU 121 restores the information saved in step S<b>601 to the register of the sub CPU 121 .

<Command analysis processing>
39 and 40 are flowcharts for explaining the command analysis process (S603 in FIG. 38). As shown in FIG. 39, when the command analysis process is started, the sub CPU 121 determines whether a command has been received (S611). If there is no command in the reception buffer (No in step S611), the sub CPU 121 ends the command analysis process, and if there is a command in the reception buffer (Yes in step S611), the process proceeds to step S621.

In step S621, the sub CPU 121 confirms whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a customer waiting command. If the command stored in the reception buffer is a customer waiting command (Yes in step S621), the sub CPU 121 shifts the process to step S622, and if not a customer waiting command (No in step S621), the process proceeds to step S631. to move.

In step S622, the sub CPU 121 performs a customer waiting effect pattern determination process for determining a customer waiting effect pattern. Specifically, a customer waiting performance pattern is determined, the determined customer waiting performance pattern is set in a performance pattern storage area, and information on the determined customer waiting performance pattern is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140. Therefore, data based on the determined customer waiting effect pattern is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 123 .

In step S631, the sub CPU 121 confirms whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is the starting winning designation command. If the command stored in the reception buffer is the start winning designation command (Yes in step S631), the sub CPU 121 shifts the process to step S632, and if not the starting winning designation command (No in step S631), step S641. to process.

In step S632, the sub CPU 121 analyzes the received starting winning designation command and executes pending storage processing corresponding to the starting winning designation command. Information related to the big hit, the small hit, the loss, and the variation pattern provisionally determined by the preliminary determination process is associated with the starting winning designation command. In the reservation storage process, information (winning information) about the newly reserved first reservation (U1) or second reservation (U2) is stored in a predetermined storage area of the sub RAM 123 .

In step S633, the sub CPU 121 executes pending change effect determination processing. In the pending change effect determination process, the sub CPU 121 determines whether or not to execute a pending change effect, which will be described later, in accordance with a start winning designation command (winning information). The pending change effect is a so-called look-ahead effect, in which a pending image GB (see FIG. 29(a)), which will be described later, is displayed in one of a plurality of special modes (blue, red, gold, rainbow). Specifically, in the pending change effect, the mode of the pending image GB may change step by step to the final special mode (for example, changing from blue to red). The sub CPU 121 determines in advance the timing (scenario) at which the final special mode and the mode of the pending image GB will change when determining the execution of the pending change effect.

In step S641, the sub CPU 121 confirms whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a variation pattern designation command. If the command stored in the reception buffer is a variation pattern designation command (Yes in step S641), the sub CPU 121 shifts the process to step S642, and if it is not a variation pattern designation command (No in step S641), step S651. to process.

In step S642, the sub CPU 121 performs a variation performance pattern determination process for determining one variation performance pattern from among a plurality of variation performance patterns based on the received variation pattern designation command.

In step S643, the sub CPU 121 shifts the reserved display data stored in the first reserved storage area and the second reserved storage area and the data corresponding to the start winning designation command, and information of the reserved display data after shifting. to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140.

In step S651, the sub CPU 121 confirms whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is the effect symbol designation command. If the command stored in the reception buffer is a production design designation command (Yes in step S651), the sub CPU 121 shifts the process to step S652, and if it is not a production design designation command (No in step S651), step S661. to process.

In step S652, the sub CPU 121 performs a performance symbol determination process for determining a performance symbol GA to be stopped and displayed on the image display device 31 based on the content of the received performance symbol designation command. Specifically, the performance design designation command is analyzed, the performance design data constituting the combination of the performance design GA is determined according to the presence or absence of the big win and the type of the big win, and the design command based on the determined performance design data is issued. Set in the production pattern storage area.

In step S661, the sub CPU 121 confirms whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is the pattern confirmation command. If the command stored in the reception buffer is a pattern confirmation command (Yes at step S661), the sub CPU 121 shifts the process to step S662, and if not a pattern confirmation command (No at step S661), the process proceeds to step S671. to move. In step S662, the sub CPU 121 performs effect symbol stop processing of setting a symbol stop command for stopping and displaying the temporarily stopped effect symbol GA in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 123. FIG.

In step S671, the sub CPU 121 confirms whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is the general pattern fluctuation pattern specification command. If the command stored in the reception buffer is a normal pattern fluctuation pattern designation command (Yes in step S671), the sub CPU 121 moves the process to step S672, and if it is not a normal pattern fluctuation pattern designation command (No in step S671) ), and the process proceeds to step S681 in FIG. In step S672, the sub CPU 121 performs a normal pattern fluctuation production pattern determination process for determining one normal pattern fluctuation production pattern from among a plurality of general pattern fluctuation production patterns based on the received general pattern fluctuation pattern specification command.

As shown in FIG. 40, in step S681, the sub CPU 121 confirms whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is the long release start command. If the command stored in the reception buffer is the long open start command (Yes in step S681), the sub CPU 121 shifts the process to step S682, and if not the long open start command (No in step S681), step S700. to process. In step S682, the sub CPU 121 performs a long open effect process. Here, a notification effect is executed to notify the player that the second starting port 14 is opened for a long time (4.2 seconds) in the non-time-saving game state.

In step S691, the sub CPU 121 confirms whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is the normal symbol determination command. If the command stored in the reception buffer is a normal design determination command (Yes at step S691), the sub CPU 121 shifts the process to step S692, and if it is not a normal design determination command (No at step S691), step S700. to process. In step S692, the sub CPU 121 stores the performance symbol data corresponding to the received normal symbol confirmation command and the symbol stop command for stopping and displaying the normal symbol performance symbols in the sub RAM 123 in order to stop and display the normal symbol performance symbols. Normal design fluctuation stop processing to be set in the transmission buffer is performed.

At step S700, the sub CPU 121 determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a gaming state designation command. If the command stored in the reception buffer is the game state designation command (Yes in step S700), the sub CPU 121 shifts the process to step S701, and if not the game state designation command (No in step S700), step S711. to process.

In step S<b>701 , the sub CPU 121 executes game state setting processing for setting the game state based on the received game state designation command in the game state storage area of the sub RAM 123 . In step S711, the sub CPU 121 confirms whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is the opening command. If the command stored in the reception buffer is an opening command (Yes at step S711), the sub CPU 121 shifts the process to step S712, and if not an opening command (No at step S711), shifts the process to step S721. .

In step S712, the sub CPU 121 performs a winning start effect pattern determination process for determining a winning start effect pattern. Specifically, the winning start effect pattern is determined based on the opening command, the determined winning start effect pattern is set in the effect pattern storage area, and the information of the determined winning start effect pattern is transferred to the image control board 150 and the lamp control. In order to transmit to the substrate 140 , data based on the determined winning start effect pattern is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 123 .

In step S721, the sub CPU 121 confirms whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a big winning opening designation command indicating the start of a big winning round game. If the command stored in the reception buffer is a command for opening a large winning opening (Yes in step S721), the sub CPU 121 shifts the process to step S722, and if it is not a command for opening a large winning opening (No in step S721). ), and the process proceeds to step S731.

In step S722, the sub CPU 121 performs in-round effect pattern determination processing for determining a jackpot effect pattern. Specifically, based on the big winning opening opening designation command having information about how many times the round game is to be started, the during-round production pattern is determined for each round to be started. Then, the determined in-round effect pattern is set in the effect pattern storage area, and the corresponding data is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 123 in order to transmit the information of the effect pattern to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140.例文帳に追加.

In step S731, the sub CPU 121 confirms whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a round end designation command. If the command stored in the reception buffer is a round end designation command (Yes in step S731), the sub CPU 121 shifts the process to step S732. to process. In step S732, the sub CPU 121 performs a pause effect pattern determination process for determining the effect pattern between rounds.

In step S741, the sub CPU 121 confirms whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is the ending command. If the command stored in the reception buffer is an ending command (Yes at step S741), the sub CPU 121 shifts the process to step S742, and if not an ending command (No at step S741), shifts the process to step S751. .

In step S742, the sub CPU 121 performs a winning end effect pattern determination process for determining a winning end effect pattern. Specifically, a winning end performance pattern is determined based on the ending command, the determined winning end performance pattern is set in the performance pattern storage area, and information on the determined winning end performance pattern is transmitted to the image control board 150 and lamp control. In order to transmit to the board 140 , data based on the determined winning end effect pattern is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 123 .

In step S751, the sub CPU 121 confirms whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is the command to enter the big winning hole. The above big winning hole entry ball command is transmitted from the main control board 110 when the game ball wins the big winning hole. If the command stored in the reception buffer is the command for entering a large winning slot (Yes in step S751), the sub CPU 121 shifts the process to step S752, and if not the command for entering a large winning slot (No in step S751). ) to terminate the command analysis process. In step S<b>752 , the sub CPU 121 executes a large winning game entry command transmission process for transmitting a game game entry command to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 . In the above big winning game entry command transmission process, the big game game entry command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 123 .

<Production input control processing>
FIG. 41 is a flow chart for explaining effect input control processing by the effect control board. First, in step S831, the sub CPU 121 determines, based on the effect button detection command from the lamp control board 140, whether or not there is a valid effect button detection signal from the effect button detection switch 8a. Here, if the sub CPU 121 determines that there is no effect button detection signal (No in step S831), it ends the process, and if it determines that there is a effect button detection signal (Yes in step S831), Go to processing.

In step S<b>832 , the sub CPU 121 determines whether or not the button operation effect executable flag=01 is set in the storage area of the sub RAM 123 . Here, if the button operation effect executable flag=01 is not set (No in step S832), the sub CPU 121 ends the processing, and if the button operation effect executable flag=01 is set (step Yes at S832), the process proceeds to step S833.

It should be noted that the button operation effect executable flag is for determining whether or not the state is such that the effect corresponding to the button operation can be executed based on the fact that the button operation has been performed. , the effect corresponding to the operation can be executed, and if the flag is "00", it indicates that the effect corresponding to the operation cannot be executed. A flag "01" is set in accordance with the start of , and a flag "00" is set when the performance button 8 is operated or the effective operation period ends without the performance button 8 being operated.

In step S833, the sub CPU 121 sets a button operation effect execution command in the transmission buffer. This command is a command for causing the image control board 150 to execute an effect corresponding to the operation of the effect button 8 . Here, the sub CPU 121 transmits the command set in the transmission buffer to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in step S605 (see FIG. 22) after the effect input control process. The image control board 150 operates the image display device 31 and the audio output device 34 based on the received command, and the lamp control board 140 operates the effect movable body 32 and the effect lamp 33 based on the received command.

Next, the image control board 150 will be described. In the image control board 150, when a command for effect is received from the effect control board 120, the host CPU 151 reads out an audio output device control program from the host ROM 153 based on the received command for effect, and outputs sound in the audio output device 34. , the host CPU 151 reads the animation control program from the host ROM 153 and controls image display on the image display device 31 .

Here, processing executed by the host CPU 151 in the image control board 150 will be described.

<Host CPU main processing>
FIG. 42 is a flowchart for explaining main processing by the image control board. When power is supplied from the power board 170, a system reset occurs in the host CPU 151, and the host CPU 151 performs the following main processing. First, in step S901, the host CPU 151 performs initialization processing. In this process, the host CPU 151 loads the main processing program from the host ROM 153 and instructs the initialization of various modules of the host CPU 151 and the VDP 200 in response to power-on.

In step S902, the host CPU 151 performs effect pattern designation command analysis processing for analyzing the effect pattern designation command transmitted from the effect control board 120 (the command stored in the reception buffer of the host RAM 152). In addition, when the image control board 150 receives a command transmitted from the effect control board 120, a command reception interruption process of the image control board 150 (not shown) occurs, and the received command is stored in the reception buffer.

The effect pattern specification command analysis process confirms whether or not the effect pattern specification command (+effect control command) is stored in the reception buffer. If the effect pattern designation command is not stored in the reception buffer, the process proceeds directly to step S903. If an effect pattern designation command (+ effect control command) is stored in the reception buffer, a new effect pattern designation command is read, and one or more animation groups to be executed are determined based on the read effect pattern designation command. At the same time, an animation pattern is determined from each animation group. Then, when the animation pattern is determined, the read effect pattern designation command is erased from the transmission buffer.

In step S903, the host CPU 151 performs animation control processing. In this process, the addresses of various animation scenes are updated based on the "scene switching counter", "wait frame", and "frame counter" updated in step S921, which will be described later, and the animation pattern determined in step S902. do.

In step S904, the host CPU 151 extracts the display list from the display information (sprite identification number, display position, etc.) of one frame of the animation scene at the updated address according to the priority (drawing order) of the animation group to which the animation scene belongs. will be generated. Then, when the generation of the display list is completed, the host CPU 151 outputs the display list to the VDP 200 . The display list output here is stored in the display list storage area 156 a of the VRAM 156 via the CPU I/F 203 in the VDP 200 .

In step S905, the host CPU 151 determines whether or not the FB switching flag=01. Here, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 43(b), the FB switching flag is set to FB switching flag=01. That is, in step S905, it is determined whether or not the previous rendering has been completed. If the FB switching flag=01 (Yes in step S905), the host CPU 151 shifts the process to step S906, and if the FB switching flag=00 (No in step S905), waits until the FB switching flag=01. do.

In step S906, the host CPU 151 sets the FB switching flag=00 (turns off the FB switching flag), and shifts the process to step S906. In step S907, the host CPU 151 performs drawing execution start processing. In this process, the drawing execution start data is set in the drawing register in order to instruct the VDP 200 to execute drawing for the display list that has already been output. That is, execution of drawing for the display list output in step S904 is instructed. After that, the processing of steps S902 to S907 is repeated until a predetermined interrupt occurs.

<Interrupt processing of the image control board>
Interrupt processing of the image control board 150 will be described with reference to FIG. The interrupt processing of the image control board 150 includes at least a drawing end interrupt processing that is performed when a drawing end interrupt signal is input and a V blank interrupt processing that is performed when a V blank interrupt signal is input. there is

<Host CPU rendering end interrupt processing>
FIG. 43(a) is a flowchart for explaining drawing end interrupt processing by the image control board. The VDP 200 outputs a drawing end interrupt signal to the host CPU 151 via the CPU I/F 203 when drawing of a predetermined unit of frames (one frame) is completed. When the drawing end interrupt signal is input from the VDP 200, the host CPU 151 executes drawing end interrupt processing. In the drawing end interrupt process, in step S911, the host CPU 151 sets the drawing end flag=01 (turns on the drawing end flag), and terminates the current drawing end interrupt process. That is, the drawing end flag is turned on each time drawing ends.

<Host CPU V blank interrupt processing>
FIG. 43(b) is a flow chart for explaining V-blank interrupt processing by the image control board. The VDP 200 outputs a V blank interrupt signal (vertical synchronization signal) to the host CPU 151 via the CPU I/F 203 every 1/60 second (about 16.6 ms). When the host CPU 151 receives the V blank interrupt signal from the VDP 200, the host CPU 151 executes V blank interrupt processing.

In step S921, the host CPU 151 performs processing for updating various counters such as a "scene switching counter", a "wait frame", and a "frame counter". In step S922, the host CPU 151 determines whether or not the rendering end flag=01. That is, it is determined whether or not the rendering of the predetermined unit of frames has been completed. If the drawing end flag = 01 (Yes in step S922), the host CPU 151 shifts the process to step S923, and if the drawing end flag = 01 (No in step S922), ends the current V blank interrupt processing do. That is, even if the V-blank interrupt signal is input, if the drawing is not completed, the processing after step S923 is not performed.

In step S923, the host CPU 151 sets the drawing end flag=00 (turns off the drawing end flag). In step S924, the host CPU 151 instructs the memory controller 209 of the VDP 200 to switch between the "display frame buffer" and the "drawing frame buffer". In step S925, the host CPU 151 sets the FB switching flag to 01 (turns on the FB switching flag), cancels the standby state in step S905 (see FIG. 42), and terminates the current V blank interrupt processing. do.

Next, the outline of the lamp control board 140 will be briefly described. When the command for effect is received from the effect control board 120, the lamp control board 140 reads out the effect movable body operation program based on the received command for effect, controls the operation of the effect movable body 32, and receives the command. A performance lighting device control program is read based on a performance command, and the performance lamp 33 and the light guide 60 are controlled. Further, when the lamp control board 140 receives a command for the effect button from the image control board 150 via the effect control board 120, it reads out the operation program for the effect button based on the received command for the effect button, and executes the effect button. 8 is controlled.

FIG. 44 is a conceptual diagram of an example of a variable effect pattern determination table. The sub CPU 412 refers to the variable effect pattern determination table and determines the variable effect pattern in the above-described variable effect pattern determination process.

In the present embodiment, a variable effect pattern determination table is provided for each game state (low probability non-time-saving game state, low probability time-saving game state, high probability time-saving game state). The specific example of FIG. 44 shows a variable effect pattern determination table referred to in the low probability non-time-saving gaming state. 44 is referred to by the sub CPU 121 when a variation pattern is determined by the main CPU 111 using the variation pattern determination table shown in FIG.

Specifically, in the variable effect pattern determination process, the variable effect pattern is determined by lottery according to the variation pattern determined by the main CPU 111 (variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command) and the random number for effect. be. The effect random number has a random number range of "0 to 99" and is obtained by the sub CPU 121 when the variable effect pattern determination process is started. For example, when the main CPU 111 determines the variation pattern a1x and any one of the numbers "0 to 50" is acquired as the random number for effect, the variation pattern 1 is determined.

FIG. 44 shows an overview of the effect configuration of each variable effect pattern. For example, in variable production pattern 1, normal production is executed when a game is started, and then normal ready-to-win is executed. On the other hand, in the variable effect pattern 2, when the game is started, the normal effect is executed, and after that, the normal reach is executed after the pseudo-continuous effect is executed. In the pseudo continuous effect described above, the image display device 31 temporarily stops (temporarily stops) the effect symbol GA that has been variably displayed, and variably displays it again. The above pseudo-continuous effect may be executed multiple times in one game (fluctuation). For example, in the variation performance pattern 5, the pseudo-continuous performance is performed twice, and in the variation performance pattern 14, the pseudo-continuous performance is performed three times.

<Second embodiment>
Other embodiments of the invention are described below. Note that, in each embodiment illustrated below, elements having the same action and function as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the reference numerals used in the description of the first embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.

FIG. 45(a) and FIG. 45(b) are diagrams for explaining the end effect executed when the time saving game state (first time saving game state, second time saving game state) ends. In the end production, it is informed that the time saving game state is ended. Also, the end effect includes a first end effect (see FIG. 45(a)) and a second end effect (see FIG. 45(b)). Although the details will be described later, when the time-saving gaming state ends, either the first end effect or the second end effect may be executed.

FIG. 45(a) is a schematic diagram of a specific example of the screen displayed in the first end effect. As shown in FIG. 45(a), in the first end effect, various images including a small symbol Ga, a right-handed image GS4, a fourth symbol GC, a pending number image GD, and an end image GP1 are displayed. Also, in the first end effect, the effect symbol GA is hidden. The first end effect described above is executed in the final game in the time-saving game state. In addition, as described above, in the last game of the first time-saving game state (100 times), the judge effect is executed. When the judgment performance is executed in the last game in the time-saving game state, the first end performance is executed after the judgment performance is executed.

The end time image GP1 in the second embodiment displays the number of winning times of the jackpot game and the number of winning game balls in a specific period. For example, after the jackpot game is completed, the state is shifted to the first time-saving game state, the jackpot game is won again in the first time-saving game state, and then the game is executed 100 times after the second jackpot game, and the first time-saving game state is performed. is terminated. In the above case, the image GP1 at the end shows the number of winnings of the jackpot game (twice) and the number of wins in the period (specific period) from the first jackpot win to the end of the second first time-saving game state. Display the number of game balls played. Moreover, image GP1 at the time of completion|finish displays the message to the effect that the name of time saving mode and this time saving mode are complete|finished.

FIG. 45(b) is a schematic diagram of a specific example of the screen displayed in the second end effect. As shown in FIG. 45(b), in the second end effect, various images including a small symbol Ga, a right-handed image GS4, a fourth symbol GC, a number-of-holds image GD, and an end image GP2 are displayed. Also, in the second end effect, the effect symbol GA is hidden. The second end effect described above is executed in the final game of the second time-saving game state among the time-saving game states.

Image GP2 at the time of termination in 2nd Embodiment displays the message to the effect that the name of time saving mode and this time saving mode are complete|finished. In addition, although the end image GP1 described above displays the number of times the jackpot game was won and the number of game balls obtained during a specific period, the end image GP2 does not display the above information. Although the details will be described later, the end image GP2 is displayed when the second time-saving game state is started from the normal mode and the second time-saving game state ends without winning the jackpot game.

FIGS. 46(a) to 46(e) are diagrams for explaining a specific example of when the ending effect is executed. FIGS. 46(a) to 46(e) show the game state and variation pattern determination table T at each point in time, in addition to the timing at which the end effect is executed.

FIG. 46(a) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of when the first ending effect is executed among the ending effects. In the specific example of FIG. 46(a), it is assumed that the first time-saving game state is started 100 times after the end of the jackpot game, and the first time-saving game state ends. As described above, in the first time-saving game state (100 times), the variation pattern determination table Ta1 is referred to in each game at the beginning, the variation pattern determination table Ta2 is referred to in each game at the end, and the variation pattern is determined in the last game. Table Tj1 is referenced. In the second embodiment, in the game in which the variation pattern determination table Tj1 is referred to, the first end effect is executed after the judge effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 46(a), the variation pattern determination table Tn1 is referred to in the game after the first time-saving game state ends.

FIG. 46(b) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of when the second ending effect is executed among the ending effects. In the specific example of FIG. 46(b), it is assumed that the first time-saving game state is started 100 times after the end of the jackpot game, then the game is executed 700 times, and the second time-saving game state is started. That is, it is assumed that the second time-saving gaming state is started during the scenario setting period. In the above case, in the first game in the second time-saving game state, the variation pattern determination table Ts is referred to, and various effects including rush effects and mode selection effects are executed.

In the specific example of FIG. 46(b), it is assumed that the second time-saving game state ends without winning the jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 46(b), the variation pattern determination table Te1 is referred to in the final game of the second time-saving game state during the scenario setting period. In the game in which the variation pattern determination table Te1 is referred to, the second end effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 46(b), the variation pattern determination table Tn1 is referred to in the game after the second time-saving game state in the scenario setting period ends.

It is assumed that the first end effect is executed when the second time-saving gaming state ends. In the above configuration, it is notified that the jackpot game won in the second time-saving game state is 0 times. Also, the base value of the time-saving game state is smaller than one. Therefore, in the first end effect when the second time-saving gaming state ends, an excessively small number of acquired game balls is notified. Therefore, some players may find the first end effect annoying. In the second end effect of the second embodiment, the number of winning times of the big hit game and the number of winning game balls are not notified. According to the above configuration, there is an advantage that the above inconvenience is suppressed.

FIG. 46(c) is a specific example in which the end effect is not executed when the time saving game state ends. FIG. 46(c) is a specific example when the second time-saving gaming state is started during the scenario unset period. In the second embodiment, the end effect is not executed when the second time-saving game state in the scenario unset period ends. In addition, in the above-described first embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the variation pattern determination table Tbx is referred to in the second time-saving gaming state of the scenario unset period. In the second embodiment, the variation pattern determination table Tax referred to in the second time-saving gaming state of the scenario setting period is also referred to in the second time-saving gaming state of the scenario setting period.

As shown in FIG. 46(c), in the second time-saving game state of the scenario unset period, the variation pattern determination table Tax is referred to in all games (including the final game). Also, the game in which the variation pattern determination table Tax is referred to ends in a relatively short time. Therefore, if the end performance is executed in the final game of the second time-shortened game state in the period in which the scenario is not set, the time of the end performance is too short, and the player cannot grasp the contents of the end performance. According to the configuration of the second embodiment, the above problems are easily suppressed. As shown in FIG. 46(c), the variation pattern determination table Tn1 is referred to in the game after the second time-saving game state in the scenario unset period ends.

Further, according to the configuration of the second embodiment, in the scenario setting period, the variation pattern determination table Te1 is referred to in the last game of the second time-saving gaming state, and the variation pattern determination table Tn1 is referred to in the next game of the game. (See FIG. 46(b)). On the other hand, in the scenario unset period, the variation pattern determination table Tax is referred to in the last game of the second time saving game state, and the variation pattern determination table Tn1 is referred to in the next game of the game (see FIG. 46 (c) ). That is, between the scenario setting period and the scenario unset period, the variation pattern that can be determined at the end of the second time-saving gaming state (the last game of the second time-saving gaming state, the next game of the game) may be different. be. According to the above configuration, there is an advantage that the variation pattern at the end of the second time-saving gaming state is rich in variety, and the amusement of the game is improved.

FIG.46(d) is a specific example when the 2nd time saving game state is started in the scenario unset period similarly to above-mentioned FIG.46(c). However, in the specific example of FIG. 46(c), it is assumed that the jackpot is not won in the second time-saving game state, whereas in the specific example of FIG. 46(d), the jackpot is won in the second time-saving game state Assume the case. Specifically, in the specific example of FIG. 46(d), it is assumed that a jackpot is won in the second time-saving game state, the table scenario Sb2 is set, and the state shifts to the first time-saving game state (100). In the above case, when the first time-saving gaming state ends, the first end effect is executed.

As can be understood from the above description, in the present embodiment, if the jackpot is not won in the second time-saving gaming state, the first end effect is not executed (see FIG. 46(c)), and in the second time-saving gaming state When the jackpot is won, the first end effect is executed (see FIG. 46(d)). According to the above configuration, for example, compared to a configuration in which the first end effect is not executed uniformly when the time-saving game state ends after shifting to the second time-saving game state, the interest of the effect is improved. There are advantages.

FIG. 46(e) is a diagram for explaining another specific example of when the ending effect is executed. FIG. 46(e) assumes that table scenario Sb4 is set. In the above case, the first time-saving game state continues over 799 games, and the second time-saving game state is started via the gap game. In addition, a series of periods of the first time-saving game state, the gap game, and the second time-saving game state become the time-saving mode B. In addition, in the first embodiment, the variation pattern determination table Tax is referred to in the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state, and the variation pattern determination table Tnc is referred to in the gap game. In the second embodiment, the variation pattern determination table Tax is commonly referred to during a series of periods of the first time-saving gaming state, the gap game, and the second time-saving gaming state. However, even in the gap game of the second embodiment, the variation pattern determination table T different from the variation pattern determination table Tax may be referred to.

In the specific example of FIG. 46(e), the end effect is not executed at the end of the first time-saving game state (799 times). According to the above configuration, the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state are set as a series of time-saving game states, for example, compared with the configuration in which the end effect is executed in the final game or the gap game of the first time-saving game state. This makes it easier for the player to recognize. However, in the specific example of FIG. 46(e), the end effect may be executed in the final game or the gap game in the first time-saving game state.

As shown in FIG. 46(e), in the last game in the second time-saving game state, the variation pattern determination table Te2 is referred to, and the second end effect is executed. That is, during the period in which the table scenario Sb4 is set, the first end effect is not executed when the second time-saving gaming state ends (the final game of the second time-saving gaming state or the next game of the game). Also during the period in which the table scenario Sb3 is set, the second end effect is executed when the second time-saving game state ends, and the first end effect is not executed. However, during the period in which the table scenario Sb3 or the table scenario Sb4 is set, the first end effect may be executed when the second time-saving gaming state ends. Moreover, in the above period, it may be configured such that the end effect (including the second end effect) is not executed when the second time-saving gaming state ends.

In addition, the scenario setting period and the scenario unset period, at the end of the second time-reduced gaming state (the final game of the second time-reduced gaming state or the next game of the game) may have a common variation pattern. may be According to the above configuration, in the scenario setting period and the scenario unset period, compared with the configuration in which the variation pattern that can be determined at the end of the second time-saving gaming state is not common, the variation pattern determination table T There is an advantage that the number of types can be reduced.

FIG. 46(f) is a diagram for explaining a modification adopting a configuration in which the variation pattern that can be determined at the end of the second time-saving gaming state may be common between the scenario setting period and the scenario non-setting period. is. The specific example of FIG. 46(f) assumes the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, as in FIG. 46(b) of the second embodiment. In this modification, the variation pattern determination table referred to during the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set is different from that in the second embodiment, and the variation pattern determination table ( type, order) are the same as in the second embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 46(f), in the modification, the period during which the table scenario Sb2 is set and the period during which the scenario is not set (see FIG. 46(c)), the variation pattern of the final game in the second time-saving gaming state The determination table (Tax) is common, and the variation pattern determination table (Tn1) of the game next to the final game in the second time-saving game state is common. According to the above modified example, there is an advantage that the number of types of variation pattern determination tables can be reduced as compared with, for example, the second embodiment.

<Third Embodiment>
In the third embodiment, as in the first embodiment, a plurality of types of time-saving gaming states are provided. Specifically, the time-saving gaming state of the third embodiment includes a third time-saving gaming state in addition to the first time-saving gaming state and the second time-saving gaming state described above. In the third time-saving game state, a predetermined special pattern (time-saving pattern to be described later) shifts to the opportunity when it is stop-displayed in the low-probability non-time-saving game state. In the third embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, the opening mode of the second starting port 14 is common in each time-saving gaming state. However, in each time-saving game state, the opening mode of the second starting port 14 may be different.

In the third embodiment, each time-saving gaming state has a different time-saving number of times. Specifically, the number of times of time saving in the first time saving game state is 100 times. As in the first embodiment, according to the special symbol (jackpot symbol) stopped and displayed when the jackpot game is started, the number of times of time saving in the first time saving game state after that may be different. Further, the number of times of time saving in the first time saving game state is not limited to 100 times, and may be 101 times or more, or may be 99 times or less. The number of times of time saving in the second time saving game state is 1000 times. Also, the number of times of time reduction in the third game state is 100 times or 1000 times.

<Jackpot Judgment Table>
FIGS. 47(a-1) and 47(a-2) are conceptual diagrams of an example of the big hit determination table in the third embodiment. Specifically, FIG. 47 (a-1) determines whether the stop result of the special symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 20 is a big hit, a small hit, a third time reduction, or a loss (big hit lottery). It is a big hit determination table A that is referred to when playing. FIG. 47(b-2) is a big hit determination table B referred to when determining the stop result of the special symbol variation in the second special symbol display device 21. FIG. It should be noted that the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21 have different winning probabilities of small hits, and the same big win probabilities. Also, the winning probability of the third time saving is different between the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21 . Specifically, the first special symbol display device 20 wins the third time saving, but the second special symbol display device 21 does not win the third time saving.

In the big hit determination table in the third embodiment, there are a special symbol determination random number that is a "big hit", a special symbol determination random number that is a "small hit", and a special symbol determination random number that is a "third time reduction". Numerical values are specified. In the jackpot lottery, the random number value for special symbol determination obtained when the game ball enters the start hole is compared with the random number value for special symbol determination defined in the jackpot determination table. Win a small hit or the third short time. The jackpot determination tables (A, B) shown in FIGS. 47(a-1) and 47(a-2) are, similarly to the first embodiment, based on the low-probability random number determination table and the high-probability random number determination table. Configured. The main CPU 111 determines one of "big win", "minor win", "third short time", and "losing" based on the selected table and the extracted random number for special symbol determination.

For example, according to the low-probability random number determination table shown in FIG. 47(a-1), two special symbol determination random numbers are determined to be "big hit". On the other hand, according to the high-probability random number determination table, 20 special symbol determination random numbers are determined to be "big hits". In addition, in the big hit determination table of FIG. 6 (a-1), whether the random number determination table at low probability or the random number determination table at high probability is used, the four special symbol determination random numbers are "small hit". , and one special symbol determination random number is determined to be "third time saving". If a random number that is not determined as a "big hit", a "small hit", or a "third time reduction", it is determined as "losing".

The big hit determination table A and the big hit determination table B have different special symbol determination random numbers determined as the third time saving. Specifically, in the big hit determination table A, one special symbol determination random number is determined to be the third time saving, but the big hit determination table B does not include the special symbol determination random number determined to be the third time saving. . In the above configuration, when the game ball wins the first starting port 13, it can be won in the third time saving, but when the game ball wins the second starting port 14, it does not win the third time saving. However, when the game ball wins the second starting port 14, it may be configured to be able to win in the third time saving. In the above configuration, when the game ball wins in the second start port 14 than when the game ball wins in the first start port 13, the winning probability of the third time saving is preferably low.

<Hit Judgment Table>
FIG. 47(b) is a conceptual diagram of an example of a hit determination table that is referred to when determining whether or not the stop result of the normal symbol variation is a hit in the normal pattern lottery. The hit determination table shown in FIG. 47(b) is composed of a non-time-saving game state random number determination table and a time-saving game state random number determination table. The random number determination table during the time saving game state described above is commonly referred to in the first time saving game state, the second time saving game state and the third time saving game state.

<Design decision table>
FIGS. 48(a-1) to 48(a-4) are conceptual diagrams of a special symbol determination table for determining special symbols (stop symbols) to be stopped and displayed in each game. The special symbol determination table in the third embodiment includes a time-saving symbol determination table in addition to a big-hit symbol determination table, a small-hit symbol determination table, and a losing symbol determination table. The time saving pattern determination table is referred to when determining the stop pattern (time saving pattern) when the third time saving pattern is won in the jackpot lottery. The big-hit symbol determination table, the small-hit symbol determination table, and the losing symbol determination table are configured in the same manner as in the first embodiment.

FIG. 48(a-4) is a conceptual diagram of an example of the time saving pattern determination table. The main CPU 111 refers to the time saving symbol random number when winning the third time saving game. The random number range of the time saving symbol random number is a numerical value "0 to 99". For example, when winning the third time reduction triggered by winning the first start port 13, the main CPU 111, if the obtained random number for time reduction symbol is "0" to "70", "21" as the stop symbol data ” (special symbol J1) is determined. In the above case, the special symbol J1 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20 as shown in FIG. 48(a-4). Further, when the stop symbol data "21" is determined, as shown in FIG. 48(a-4), the effect symbol designation commands "E0H" and "11H" are generated.

As shown in FIG. 48 (a-4), winning the third time reduction triggered by winning the first start port 13, and if the random number for the time reduction symbol obtained is "71" to "99" , "22" (special symbol J2) is determined as the stop symbol data. In the above case, the special symbol J2 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20 . Further, when the stop symbol data "22" is determined, as shown in FIG. 48(a-4), effect symbol designation commands "E0H" and "12H" are generated.

When the special symbol J1 or the special symbol J2 is stop-displayed, the game moves to the third time-saving game state. Specifically, when the special symbol J1 is stopped and displayed, the game moves to the third time-saving game state of 100 times. Further, when the special symbol J2 is stopped and displayed, the game moves to the third time-saving game state of 1000 times.

FIGS. 48(b-1) and 48(b-2) are conceptual diagrams of an example of a normal symbol determination table. The normal symbol determination table is used when determining the normal symbols to be stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22 . The normal symbol determination table described above is commonly used in each game state (non-time-saving game state, first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state, and third time-saving game state).

<Variation pattern determination table for non-time-saving gaming state>
FIG. 49 is a conceptual diagram of an example of a variation pattern determination table used in a low-probability non-time-saving gaming state in the third embodiment. In the above variation pattern determination table, as the variation patterns of the special symbols of the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21, variation pattern a (1x to 3x), variation pattern b (1x to 6x), variation Any one of pattern c (1x to 6x), variation pattern dx, variation pattern ex, variation pattern fx, variation pattern g and variation pattern h (1x, 2x) is determined.

However, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the ready-to-win effect is always executed in the variation pattern in which the big-hit symbol, the small-hit symbol, or the time-saving symbol among the special symbols is stop-displayed. However, it may be configured such that the ready-to-win effect may not be executed in the variation pattern in which the small winning symbol or the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed among the special symbols. Therefore, when the special symbol corresponding to the big win, the small win or the third short time is stopped and displayed, the reach determination random number value is not used in determining the variation pattern.

When the special symbol J1 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20, the variation pattern h1x is determined if the special symbol variation random number is any of the numerical values "0 to 49". Also, if the random number for special symbol variation is any of the numerical values "50 to 99", the variation pattern h2x is determined.

In the fluctuation pattern h1x, the first special symbol display device 20 is variably displayed over about 40000 ms. Further, in the variation pattern h1x, the image display device 31 executes a normal reach effect, and notifies the shift to the third time saving. Similarly, in the fluctuation pattern h2x, the first special symbol display device 20 is variably displayed over approximately 60000 ms. Moreover, in the fluctuation pattern h2x, the normal reach effect and the SP reach 1 are executed in the image display device 31, and the transition to the third time reduction is notified.

When the special symbol J2 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20, if the random number for special symbol variation is any of the numerical values "0 to 49", the variation pattern h1x is determined. Also, if the random number for special symbol variation is any of the numerical values "50 to 99", the above variation pattern h2x is determined. In addition, in the present embodiment, the special pattern J1 and the special pattern J2 have a common variation pattern that can be determined, but they may be different. In addition, the variation pattern h2x may be determined more easily when the special symbol J2 is stopped and displayed than when the special symbol J1 is stopped and displayed.

<Variation pattern determination table for time saving gaming state>
FIG. 50 is a conceptual diagram of an example of a variation pattern determination table used in a low-probability time-saving gaming state in the third embodiment. The above variation pattern determination table is used in the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state. As shown in FIG. 50, in the above variation pattern determination table, as the variation pattern of the special symbols of the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21, the variation pattern a (1y to 3y), the variation pattern b ( 1y to 6y), variation pattern c (1y to 6y), variation pattern dy, variation pattern ey, variation pattern f (1y, 2y), variation pattern g and variation pattern h (1y, 2y) is determined. .

By the way, as described above, in the third embodiment, when the time saving pattern is stop-displayed in the low probability non-time saving game state, the game state is shifted to the third time saving game state. On the other hand, in the high-probability game state or the time-saving game state, when the time-saving design is stop-displayed, it does not shift to the third time-saving game state. That is, in the game state other than the low-probability non-time-saving game state, the time-saving design is invalid.

Temporarily, when an invalid time-saving design is stopped and displayed, a variation pattern longer than normal variation (normal reach, variation in which SP reach 1 is not executed) is likely to be selected in the same way as when an effective time-saving design is stopped and displayed. Assume configuration. In the above configuration, some players may feel annoyed by the fluctuation of the special symbols until the invalid time-saving symbols are stop-displayed.

In consideration of the above circumstances, the third embodiment adopts a configuration that suppresses the above-described inconvenience. Specifically, as described above with reference to FIG. 8, when the time saving pattern (special pattern J1, special pattern J2) is stop-displayed in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, the variation pattern h1x or the variation pattern h2x is determined. be. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9, in the low-probability time-saving gaming state, when the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed, the variation pattern h1y or the variation pattern h2y is determined instead of the variation pattern h1x or the variation pattern h2x.

In the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state in which the time-saving design is effective, the variation time of the variation pattern h1x is about 40000 ms, and the variation time of the variation pattern h2x is about 60000 ms. On the other hand, the variation time of the variation pattern h1y is about 2000 ms, and the variation time of the variation pattern h2y is about 2000 ms in the low-probability time-saving gaming state in which the time-saving design is invalid.

In the above configuration, the variation time of the special symbol display device when the invalid time-saving design is stop-displayed is shorter than the variation time of the special design display device when the valid time-saving design is stop-displayed. Therefore, regardless of whether the time-saving design is effective or ineffective, the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suppressed as compared with the configuration in which the fluctuation time of the special design display device is common.

In the third embodiment, in addition to the low-probability time-saving gaming state, the fluctuation time of the special symbol display device when the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is configured to be shorter than the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state. be. In addition, when an invalid time-saving design is stop-displayed, a longer (or equivalent length) variation pattern may be determined than when an effective time-saving design is stop-displayed.

<Preliminary judgment table for special symbols>
FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a pre-determination table for pre-determining the result of the jackpot lottery in the third embodiment. When the game ball wins the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14 (at the time of starting winning), winning information is generated by the preliminary determination table (similar to the first embodiment). By the start winning designation command indicating the above winning information, the result of preliminary judgment (loss, big hit, small hit, third time reduction), type of special design, fluctuation pattern (whether or not reach occurs) before the start of fluctuation of special design can be discriminated. Winning information (starting winning designation command) of the third embodiment is referred to, for example, when determining a so-called look-ahead effect (a pending change effect to be described later).

In the advance determination table shown in FIG. 51, as winning information for the first special symbol display device 20, winning information a (1, 2), winning information b (1 to 4), winning information c (1 to 4), winning Winning information including information d1 and winning information e1 is set. Also, as winning information for the second special symbol display device 21, winning information a (3, 4), winning information b (5-8), winning information c (5-8), winning information d (1, 2) , winning information e(1,2), winning information f, winning information g, and winning information h(1,2) are set.

When the prize information h1 is selected at the time of starting winning, in the game started by the starting winning, the effect control board 120 executes time saving transition effect 1 of about 40000 ms. When the winning information h2 is selected at the time of starting winning, the effect control board 120 executes time saving transition effect 2 of about 60000 ms in the game started by the starting winning. When winning information h (1, 2) is selected at the start winning, a special symbol J (time saving symbol) is determined in the game started by the starting winning.

As shown in FIG. 51, in the third embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, in the time saving game state (first time saving game state, second time saving game state, third time saving game state), at the first start port 13 Winning information is not set when a game ball wins. Specifically, in the time-saving gaming state, the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 20 (a combination of a random number for special symbol determination and a random number for symbols), a random number for reach determination, and a random number for special symbol variation However, winning information is not set when a game ball wins in the first start port 13.例文帳に追加Further, in the time-saving game state, when the game ball has won the first start port 13, the start winning designation command is not generated.

<Pre-judgment processing>
FIG. 52 is a flowchart for explaining pre-determination processing by the main control board 110 in the third embodiment. The advance determination process of FIG. 52 is executed in both the above-described first starting opening detection switch input process and second starting opening detection switch input process. That is, the above preliminary determination processing is executed both when the game ball enters the first start hole 13 and when the game ball enters the second start hole 14 .

When the pre-determination process is started, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the current pre-determination process was executed when a game ball entered the first start hole 13 (S1151). When it is determined that the preliminary determination process has been executed when the game ball has entered the first start port 13 (S1151: Yes), the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the time-saving gaming state (S1152). ). When determining that the game is in the time-saving gaming state (S1152: Yes), the main CPU 111 terminates the preliminary determination process without generating winning information (omitting S1161, which will be described later).

When determining that it is not in the time-saving gaming state (S1152: No), the main CPU 111 executes a big hit provisional determination process (S1153). In the big hit provisional determination process, the main CPU 111 uses the special symbol determination random number value written in the special symbol reservation storage area in response to the start win, in the big hit determination process of the game started by the start win. It is tentatively determined whether the player wins a big win, wins a small win, wins in the third short time, or loses.

When "No" is determined in the above-described step S1151, that is, when the pre-determination process is executed with the opportunity that the game ball has entered the second start hole 14, the main CPU 111 omits the above-described step S1152. Then, the process after the big hit temporary determination process (S1153) is executed. In the above configuration, when the game ball wins to the second start port 14, winning information is generated regardless of whether it is a time-saving game state or a non-time-saving game state (S1161 described later is executed) . That is, when the game ball enters the second start port 14, the look-ahead effect can be executed regardless of whether it is in the time-saving game state or in the non-time-saving game state.

After executing the big hit temporary determination process, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the big hit is temporarily determined in the big hit temporary determination process (S1154). When the main CPU 111 temporarily determines a big hit (step S1154: Yes), the main CPU 111 executes a big win symbol temporary determination process (S1155). In the jackpot pattern provisional determination processing, the jackpot pattern (stop pattern data) to be stopped in the game started by the start prize is provisionally determined by using the jackpot pattern random number acquired according to the start prize of this time. After executing the big hit symbol temporary determination process, the main CPU 111 proceeds to the variation pattern temporary determination process (S1160).

On the other hand, when it is not provisionally determined that the jackpot will be won in the jackpot provisional determination process (step S1154: No), the main CPU 111 determines whether or not it is provisionally determined that the winning is the third short time (S1156). When it is provisionally determined that the third time saving win is made (S1156: Yes), the main CPU 111 executes time saving symbol provisional determination processing (S1157). In the time-saving design temporary determination process, the time-saving design (stop design data) to be stopped in the game started by the start-up winning is temporarily determined using the time-saving design random number value acquired in response to this start-up winning. . After executing the time saving pattern provisional determination process, the main CPU 111 proceeds to the variation pattern provisional determination process (S1160).

If it is not provisionally determined that the game will be won in the third short time in the big hit provisional determination process (step S1156: No), the main CPU 111 determines whether or not it is provisionally determined that a small win will be won (S1158). When it is provisionally determined that a small hit will be won (S1158: Yes), the main CPU 111 executes a small winning symbol provisional determination process (S1159). In the small-hit symbol provisional determination process, a small-hit symbol (stop symbol data) to be stopped in the game started by the start winning is provisionally determined by using the small-hit symbol random number obtained in response to the current start winning. be judged. After executing the small hit symbol temporary determination process, the main CPU 111 proceeds to the variation pattern temporary determination process (S1160). When it is determined as "No" in the above-described step S1158, that is, when it is temporarily determined as a loss in the big hit temporary determination process, the main CPU 111 does not execute the symbol temporary determination process (above-mentioned S1155, S1157, S1159). The flow shifts to variation pattern provisional determination processing S1160.

In the variation pattern provisional determination process (S1160), the main CPU 111 determines the game state, the result of the temporary jackpot determination process, the result of the jackpot pattern provisional determination process, the result of the time reduction pattern provisional determination process, the result of the small winning pattern provisional determination process, the current Using the random number for special symbol variation and the random number for reach determination obtained in accordance with the start winning, the variation pattern of the special symbol is provisionally determined. After that, the main CPU 111 generates winning information corresponding to the variation pattern provisionally determined in the variation pattern provisional determination process (S1161). In addition, a start winning designation command corresponding to the winning information is set in the effect transmission data storage area (S1162), and the preliminary determination process is terminated.

By the above preliminary determination processing, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 13 or the second starting hole 14, the winning information can be transmitted to the effect control board 120 as a starting winning designation command. Therefore, the sub CPU 121 of the effect control board 120 that has received the starting winning designation command analyzes the starting winning designation command, and predetermines the special symbol variation triggered by this starting winning prize. Effect (read-ahead effect) can be executed.

<Processing when special symbols are stopped>
FIG. 53 is a flowchart for explaining special symbol stop processing by the main control board 110 in the third embodiment. When the special symbol stop time process is started, the main CPU 111 executes the second time reduction transition determination process (S1231). In the second time reduction transition determination process, it is determined whether or not the opportunity for transition to the second time reduction gaming state has been established. As described above, it is possible to shift to the second time-saving game state when the jackpot is not won over a predetermined number of times in the jackpot lottery in the low-probability game state.

In the third embodiment, for the sake of explanation, the number of times a big hit has not been won in the big-hit determination process from the transition to the low-probability gaming state to the present time may be described as "cumulative number of times m". The accumulated count m is counted by a counter provided in the main RAM 113, for example. When the above accumulated number of times m reaches a predetermined number of times (hereinafter "operating number of times n"), the game moves to the second time-saving game state. The number of operations n in the third embodiment is "800". It should be noted that the number of operations n can be appropriately changed.

In the third embodiment, the cumulative number of times m is added even when a small hit or a third time-saving win is made in addition to the case where a loss is determined in the big hit determination process. In addition, the cumulative number of times m is added in both the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state and the low-probability time-saving gaming state. That is, the cumulative number of times m is added in all the games other than the high-probability game state among the games in which the jackpot is not won. In the second time-saving transition determination process, when determining that the opportunity to shift to the second time-saving gaming state has been established, the main CPU 111 shifts the gaming state to the second time-saving gaming state.

After executing the second time reduction transition determination process, the main CPU 111 executes a third time reduction transition determination process (S1232). In the third time reduction transition determination process, it is determined whether or not the opportunity for transition to the third time reduction gaming state has been established. As described above, it becomes possible to shift to the third time-saving game state when the time-saving design is stop-displayed in the low-probability non-time-saving game state. In the third time-saving transition determination process, when determining that the opportunity to shift to the third time-saving gaming state has been established, the main CPU 111 shifts the gaming state to the third time-saving gaming state.

After executing the third time reduction transition determination process, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the fixed period has elapsed (S1233). The determination period described above is provided so that the player can recognize that the special symbol has been stopped and displayed in the current game. The determination period is, for example, approximately 0.5 seconds. The variable display of the special symbols in the next game is prohibited until the above fixed period ends. Specifically, step S1233 is repeatedly executed until the fixed period ends (S1233: No), and when the fixed period ends (S1233: Yes), it becomes possible to shift to the subsequent steps.

When the fixed period ends, the main CPU 111 executes a time saving end determination process (S1234). In the time-saving end determination process, it is determined whether or not the time-saving gaming state end opportunity has been established. Specifically, in the time saving end determination process, it is determined whether or not the number of games in the time saving game state has reached the time saving number of times. When it is determined that the number of games in the time saving game state has reached the number of time saving games, the time saving game state ends. After completing the time saving end determination process, the main CPU 111 sets a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the effect transmission data storage area (S1235).

After setting the game state designation command, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the special symbol stopped in the current game is a jackpot symbol (S1236). When the main CPU 111 determines that the symbol is a big hit (S1236: Yes), the main CPU 111 sets the special figure special electric processing data to "3" (big hit game processing) (S1237). In addition, the main CPU 111 executes a jackpot initialization process (S1238).

In the jackpot time initialization process, various information is initialized. For example, in the jackpot time initialization process, the high probability flag which is turned ON in the high probability game state is changed to the OFF state, and shifts to the low probability game state. In addition, the time-saving flag, which is ON in the time-saving game state, is changed to the OFF state, and the remaining number of times M indicating the number of remaining games in the time-saving game state is initialized to a numerical value "0", and the state is shifted to a non-time-saving game state. do.

Although it will be described later in detail, the time saving flag is the first time saving flag that turns ON in the first time saving game state, the second time saving flag that turns ON in the second time saving game state, and the third time saving game state. Including the third time-saving flag to be in the state. In the jackpot time initialization process, all the time saving flags are changed to the OFF state. Further, the remaining number of times M of the time saving game state is stored in a separate counter for each time saving game state. Specifically, the remaining number of times M1 of the first time-saving game state, the remaining number of times M2 of the second time-saving game state, and the remaining number of times M3 of the third time-saving game state are stored separately. In the jackpot initializing process, all the remaining numbers M are initialized to a numerical value "0".

In the jackpot time initialization process, the above-described accumulated number m (the number of hits) is initialized. In addition, in the third embodiment, in principle, the cumulative number of times m is not initialized except when the clear operation processing by the operation of the above-described clear button or when the jackpot game is started. For example, when the accumulated number of times m reaches the operation number of times n, the game moves to the second time-saving game state, but the accumulated number of times m is not initialized. In addition, the cumulative number of times m is not initialized even when the third short time winning or the small winning is won. Although it will be described in detail later, in the above configuration, the number of times that can be shifted to the second time-saving game state is one time in the period from this big win game to the next big win game.

After executing the jackpot initializing process, the main CPU 111 executes a jackpot start preparation process (S1239). In the big-hit start preparation process, for example, the opening pattern of the big-win openings (16, 17) in the big-hit game is determined according to the special symbol (type of big-hit). After that, the main CPU 111 sets an opening designation command corresponding to the type of jackpot in the performance transmission data storage area (S1240), sets an opening time corresponding to the type of jackpot (S1241), and performs special symbol stop processing. finish.

In the above-described step S1236, when it is determined that the special symbol stopped in the current game is not the big winning symbol (S1236: No), the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the stopped special symbol is the small winning symbol (S1242). ). When the small winning symbol stops (S1242: Yes), the main CPU 111 sets the special symbol special electric processing data to "4" (S1243), and terminates the special symbol stopping process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol stopped in this game is not a small winning symbol (S1242: No), that is, if the losing symbol or the time saving symbol stops, the special symbol special electric processing data is set to "0" ( S1244), the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

Fig.54 (a) is a flowchart of a 2nd time reduction transition determination process (S1231 of above-mentioned FIG.53). As described above, the second time reduction transition determination process is executed when the special symbol stops.

When the second time reduction transition determination process is started, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not a big hit has been won in the current game (S1261). When determining that the jackpot has been won (S1261: Yes), the main CPU 111 terminates the second time reduction transition determination process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the big hit has not been won (won any of the loss, small win, and third time reduction) (S1261: No), the main CPU 111 enters a low probability game state (low probability time reduction game state or low probability (S1262). When determining that it is not in the low-probability gaming state (it is in the high-probability gaming state) (S1261: Yes), the main CPU 111 terminates the second time reduction transition determination process.

When determining that the game is in the low-probability gaming state (S1262: Yes), the main CPU 111 adds a numerical value "1" to the total number m (S1263). Specifically, the second time-saving transition determination process shown in FIG. is executed in both cases. Therefore, in a game in a low-probability game state in which a big hit is not won, the cumulative number of times m is added regardless of the special symbol display device (20, 21) in which the special symbols are stopped.

After adding the cumulative number m, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the cumulative number m matches the numerical value "800" (S1264). That is, it is determined whether or not the number of operations n (n=800) at which the second time-saving gaming state operates coincides with the cumulative number of times m. When determining that the total number of times m does not match the number of times of operation n (S1264: No), the main CPU 111 terminates the second time reduction transition determination process.

When determining that the cumulative number of times m matches the number of times of operation n (S1264: Yes), the main CPU 111 stores the initial value "1000" as the remaining number of times M2 of the second time-saving gaming state (S1265). After storing the initial value of the remaining number of times M2, the main CPU 111 updates the second time saving flag to the ON state (S1266), and ends the second time saving transition determination process.

In the third embodiment, in the game after the second time-saving game state is activated, the cumulative number m is continuously updated from the number of operations n. Specifically, the accumulated count m is not initialized in principle except when the above-described clear button is operated to process the clear operation or when the jackpot game is won. In the above configuration, during the period from the end of the current big win game to the start of the next big win game, it is only once that the cumulative number m is determined to match the actuation number n. That is, during the period from the end of the current jackpot game to the start of the next jackpot game, the number of times the game can be shifted to the second time-saving game state is one.

FIG.54(b) is a flowchart of the 3rd time reduction transition determination process (S1232 of above-mentioned FIG.53) which main CPU111 performs. A 3rd time saving transition determination process is performed immediately after the above-mentioned 2nd time saving determination process. When the third time reduction transition determination process is started, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the current game is in the low probability non-time reduction game state (S1281). When determining that it is not the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state (S1281: No), the main CPU 111 terminates the third time-saving transition determination process.

When determining that it is in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state (S1281: Yes), the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the special symbol stopped in the current game is the special symbol J1 (time-saving design) (S1282). . When determining that the special symbol J1 has been stopped (S1282: Yes), the main CPU 111 stores the initial value "100" as the remaining number M3 of the third time-saving game state (1S283).

When determining that the special symbol J1 has not been stopped (S1282: No), the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the special symbol J2 (another time-saving symbol) has been stopped (S1284). When it is determined that the special symbol J2 has not been stopped (S1284: No), that is, when it is determined that none of the time saving symbols (J1, J2) has been stopped, the main CPU 111 terminates the third time saving transition determination process. .

On the other hand, when determining that the special symbol J2 has been stopped (S1284: Yes), the main CPU 111 stores the initial value "1000" as the remaining number M3 of the third time-saving game state (S1285). In step S1283 or step S1285 described above, after storing the initial value of the remaining number of times M3 of the third time saving game state, the main CPU 111 changes the third time saving flag to the ON state (S1286). After that, the main CPU 111 terminates the third time reduction transition determination process.

FIG.54(c) is a flowchart of the time reduction completion|finish determination process (S1234 of above-mentioned FIG.53) which main CPU111 performs. In the time saving end determination process, when the end opportunity of the time saving game state (first time saving game state, second time saving game state, third time saving game state) is established, a time saving flag corresponding to the time saving game state (first time saving flag , second time-saving flag, and third time-saving flag) are changed to the OFF state. In addition, as described above, when the jackpot game is started, all the time-saving flags are uniformly changed to the OFF state (see S1238 in FIG. 53 described above).

When the time saving end determination process is started, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the first time saving flag is ON, that is, whether or not the game is in the first time saving game state (S1301). When determining that the first time saving flag is not ON (S1301: No), the main CPU 111 proceeds to step S1305. On the other hand, when determining that the first time saving flag is ON (S1301: Yes), the main CPU 111 subtracts the numerical value "1" from the remaining number M1 of the first time saving game state (S1302). After that, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the remaining count M1 has been decremented to the numerical value "0" (S1303).

When determining that the remaining number of times M1 is "0" (S1303: Yes), the main CPU 111 turns off the first time saving flag and advances the process to step S1305 (S1304). That is, the first time-saving gaming state is ended and the process proceeds to step S1305. On the other hand, when determining that the number of remaining times M1 is not "0" (S1303: No), the main CPU 111 omits step S1304 and proceeds to step S1305.

In step S305, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the second time saving flag is ON, that is, whether or not the game is in the second time saving gaming state. When determining that the second time saving flag is not ON (S1305: No), the main CPU 111 proceeds to step S309. On the other hand, when determining that the second time saving flag is ON (S1305: Yes), the main CPU 111 subtracts the number "1" from the remaining number M2 of the second time saving game state (S1306). After that, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the remaining count M2 has been decremented to the numerical value "0" (S1307).

When determining that the remaining number of times M2 is "0" (S1307: Yes), the main CPU 111 turns off the second time saving flag (S1308), and advances the process to step S1309. That is, the second time-saving gaming state is ended and the process proceeds to step S1309. On the other hand, when determining that the remaining number of times M2 is not "0" (S1307: No), the main CPU 111 omits step S1308 and proceeds to step S1309.

In step S1309, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the third time saving flag is ON, that is, whether or not the game is in the third time saving gaming state. When determining that the third time saving flag is not ON (S1309: No), the main CPU 111 terminates the time saving end determination process. On the other hand, when determining that the third time saving flag is ON (S1309: Yes), the main CPU 111 subtracts the numerical value "1" from the remaining number M3 of the third time saving game state (S1310). After that, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the remaining count M3 has been decremented to the numerical value "0" (S1311).

When determining that the number of remaining times M3 is "0" (S1311: Yes), the main CPU 111 turns off the third time saving flag (S1312), and ends the time saving end determination process. That is, the third time-saving game state is ended and the time-saving end determination process is ended. On the other hand, when determining that the remaining number of times M3 is not "0" (S1311: No), the main CPU 111 omits step S1312 and terminates the time saving end determination process.

In addition, the remaining number of times M (1, 2, 3) is subtracted both when the variable display of the first special symbol display device 20 is stopped and when the variable display of the second special symbol display device 21 is stopped. be. That is, regardless of the type of the special symbol display device that is variably displayed in the current game, the remaining number of times M of the time saving game state is subtracted.

55(a), 55(b) and 55(c) are schematic diagrams of screens displayed on the image display device 31 in each game of the third embodiment. Specifically, FIG. 55(a) is a schematic diagram of a screen displayed on the image display device 31 in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state. Moreover, FIG.55(b) is a schematic diagram of the screen displayed on the image display apparatus 31 in a low probability time saving game state. FIG. 55(c) is a schematic diagram of a screen displayed on the image display device 31 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. The image display device 31 of the third embodiment provides, in each game, production symbols GA (1 to 3), pending images GB (1, 2), fourth symbols GC (1, 2), pending number images GD (1, 2) and various images including the small pattern Ga are displayed (similar to the first embodiment).

The production design GA of the third embodiment includes production design GA1 (see FIG. 55(a)), production design GA2 (see FIG. 55(b)) and production design GAw3 (see FIG. 55(c)). The effect pattern GA1 is displayed in the low probability non-time-saving game state. In addition, the production pattern GA2 is displayed in the low-probability time-saving game state. In this embodiment, the common production pattern GA2 is displayed in the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state. The effect pattern GA3 is displayed in the high probability time saving game state. In addition, in the present embodiment, the production pattern GA is made different between the low-probability time-saving gaming state and the high-probability time-saving gaming state, but the production design GA may be common in each of the above game states.

In the third embodiment, a common fourth symbol GC is displayed in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, the low-probability time-saving gaming state, and the high-probability time-saving gaming state. That is, the common fourth symbol GC is displayed in the low-probability non-time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, the third time-saving game state, and the high-probability time-saving game state. Specifically, a common fourth symbol GC is displayed in each game state except for the big hit game. However, the configuration may be such that different fourth symbols GC are displayed according to the game state. Also, in the jackpot game, the configuration may be such that the fourth symbol GC is displayed.

The holding number image GD of the third embodiment is common in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, the low-probability time-saving gaming state, and the high-probability time-saving gaming state, similarly to the above-described fourth symbol GC. That is, in the low-probability non-time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, the third time-saving game state, and the high-probability time-saving game state, the common pending number image GD is displayed. Specifically, a common pending number image GD is displayed in each game state except for the jackpot game. However, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which different pending number images GD are displayed according to the game state. Further, in the jackpot game, the configuration may be such that the number-of-holds image GD is displayed.

The small symbols Ga stop-display the symbol combinations corresponding to the big-hit symbols when the big-hit symbols are statically displayed on the special symbol display device. Further, the small symbol Ga stops displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning symbol when the special symbol display device stops displaying the small winning symbol. Similarly, when the time-saving design is stop-displayed on the special design display device, the small design Ga stops-displaying the design combination corresponding to the time-saving design, and when the losing design is stop-displayed on the special design display device, the losing design. The symbol combination corresponding to is stopped and displayed. Further, the small symbols Ga are, in principle, stopped and displayed in the same manner as the performance symbols GA when the performance symbols GA are stopped and displayed. For example, when a big win is won and the production pattern GA is stopped at ``7.7.7'', the small pattern GA is also stopped at ``7.7.7'' and a small prize is won and the production pattern is stopped. When the GA is stopped and displayed at ``7, 5, 7'', the small pattern Ga is also stopped and displayed at ``7, 5, 7'', winning in the third short time, and the effect pattern GA is ``7, 9, 7''. ' or '7.time saving (an example of a special pattern to be described later).7', the small pattern Ga is also stopped at '7.9.7' or '7.time saving.7'.

In the third embodiment, a common small symbol Ga is displayed in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, the low-probability time-saving gaming state, and the high-probability time-saving gaming state. That is, in the low-probability non-time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, the third time-saving game state, and the high-probability time-saving game state, the common small symbol Ga is displayed. Specifically, common small symbols Ga are displayed in each game state except for the big hit game. However, in the jackpot game, the small symbol Ga may be displayed. In this embodiment, the common small symbol Ga is displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol display device 20 and the variable display of the second special symbol display device 21, but the first special symbol display A small pattern Ga corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol display device 21 may be provided separately from the small pattern Ga corresponding to the variable display of the device 20 . In that case, the small symbol Ga corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol display device 21 may be in a common display mode with the small symbol Ga corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol display device 20. A display mode different from the small symbol Ga corresponding to the variable display of the 1 special symbol display device 20 may be used.

As described above, the production pattern GA (1, 2) is different between the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state and the low-probability time-saving gaming state. On the other hand, a common small symbol Ga is displayed in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state and the low-probability time-saving gaming state. The above configuration, when transitioning from the low probability non-time-saving game state to the low probability time-saving game state (including the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state), while the mode of the production pattern GA changes, the small pattern In other words, the mode of Ga does not change. Similarly, when shifting from the low-probability time-saving gaming state to the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, while the aspect of the production pattern GA changes, the aspect of the small pattern Ga does not change.

As shown in FIG. 55(a), in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, the number-of-games image GE is displayed in the same manner as in the first embodiment. The numbers in the number-of-games image GE of the third embodiment are added immediately after the game is started. However, the number of games played may be added at the end of the game (substantially at the same time as the accumulated number m is added).

The above number-of-times-of-games image GE is displayed until the low-probability non-working-time-saving gaming state ends after transitioning to the low-probability non-working-time-saving gaming state. However, the number-of-games image GE may be displayed after the number of games played in the low-probability gaming state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 790 times). Further, although the number-of-games image GE of the present embodiment displays the number of games in the low-probability gaming state, it may display the number of games until transition to the second time-saving gaming state. With the above configuration, the displayed number of games is subtracted for each game. Also, the number-of-games image GE may be configured to be displayed in the low-probability time-saving gaming state. In addition, although the number-of-games image GE of the present embodiment simply indicates the number of times, for example, "750 more times until the start of the second time-saving game state" makes the player expect the transition to the second time-saving game state. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which words are displayed together.

As shown in FIG. 55(b), in the low-probability time-saving gaming state, the remaining time-saving image GJ is displayed. The remaining time saving image GJ displays the remaining number of times M of the time saving game state. For example, immediately after the first time saving game state is started, the remaining time saving image GJ displays the number "100". Immediately after the second time saving game state is started, the remaining time saving image GJ displays the number "1000". Immediately after the third time saving game state is started, the remaining time saving image GJ displays the number "100" or the number "1000". The number of the remaining time saving image GJ is subtracted by "1" at the start of the game.

In addition, a game machine (so-called "ST machine") is known in which the high probability time saving game state ends in a predetermined number of times (for example, "100 times"). When adopting the above ST machine, it may be configured to display a remaining time saving image GJ that displays the remaining number of high probability time saving game state. In addition, a remaining time saving image GJ that displays the remaining number of times in the low probability time saving game state (hereinafter referred to as “remaining time saving image GJx”), and a remaining time saving image GJ that displays the remaining number of times in the high probability time saving game state (hereinafter “remaining time saving image GJy") WHEREIN: You may change the aspect of the remaining time saving image GJx and the remaining time saving image GJy. For example, the remaining time reduction image GJx displays characters and numbers as shown in FIG. 29(b). Moreover, the structure which the remaining time saving image GJy displays a character and a number similarly to the remaining time saving image GJx is assumed. In the above configuration, a configuration may be adopted in which the remaining time saving image GJx displays black characters and white numbers, and the remaining time saving image GJy displays white characters and black numbers.

In this embodiment, the background image GHx is displayed in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state (see FIG. 55(a)). In addition, the background image GHy is displayed in the low-probability time-saving gaming state (see FIG. 55(b)), and the background image GHv is displayed in the high-probability time-saving gaming state (see FIG. 55(c)). That is, the background image GH is different in each of the game states described above. However, the background image GH may be shared in all or some of the game states described above. For example, the background image GH may be made common to the low probability non-work-time-saving gaming state and the high-probability time-saving gaming state.

In the time-saving game state (first to third time-saving game states), when the remaining number of times M becomes equal to or less than a predetermined number of times (eg, five times), the remaining number of times M is emphasized and displayed. For example, it is preferable to have a configuration in which a message “Five times left!”

As shown in FIG. 55(b), in the low-probability time-saving gaming state, a right-handed image Gsy is displayed. As described above, in the time saving game state (first to third time saving game state), the right hitting lamp 28 instructs to hit to the right. The right hitting image Gsy is displayed during the period when the right hitting lamp 28 instructs to hit to the right. Also, the right-handed shot image Gsy is not displayed during a period when the right-handed shot is not instructed by the right-handed lamp 28 .

Specifically, the right-handed image Gsy is continuously displayed from the start of the opening period of the jackpot game to the period after the first time-saving game state is started. In addition, when the cumulative number of times m reaches the number of times of actuation n (the n-th lost symbol is stopped and displayed) and the game shifts to the second time-saving game state, the right-handed image Gsy starts to be displayed. Similarly, the display of the right shot image Gsy starts when the time saving pattern is stop-displayed and the game state shifts to the third time saving game state. It should be noted that the right hitting image Gsy may be temporarily hidden when a predetermined effect (for example, SP reach) is executed during the period when the right hitting lamp 28 instructs to hit to the right. However, during the period in which the right-handed hitting image Gsy is temporarily hidden, a lamp controlled by the sub CPU 121 or an image different from the right-handed hitting image Gsy instructs to play right-handed. is preferred.

The reserved images GB include a reserved image GB1 (see FIG. 55(a)) and a reserved image GB2 (see FIGS. 55(b) and 55(c)). The reserved image GB1 is the first special symbol reserved storage area (from the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit) or the second special symbol reserved storage area (from the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit) in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state. is displayed when the above-mentioned random number value (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “determination information”) is stored in the . The reserved image GB2 is displayed when the determination information is stored in the second special symbol reserved storage area in the low-probability time-saving gaming state and the high-probability time-saving gaming state.

The reserved image GB1 is displayed on the image display device 31 in areas R11 to R14 and in areas R21 to R24. For example, when the determination information is stored in the first storage part of the first special symbol reservation storage area (when the first reservation number is added to the numerical value "1"), the reservation image GB1 is displayed in the area R11. Similarly, when the determination information is stored in the second storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area, the reservation image GB1 is displayed in the area R12, and when the determination information is stored in the third storage section, the area R13 When the pending image GB1 is displayed and the determination information is stored in the fourth storage unit, the pending image GB1 is displayed in the region R14. Further, when the determination information is stored in the first storage unit of the second special symbol reserve storage area, the reserve image GB1 is displayed in the region R21, and when the determination information is stored in the second storage unit, the reserve image is stored in the region R22. When the image GB1 is displayed and the determination information is stored in the third storage unit, the pending image GB1 is displayed in the region R23, and when the determination information is stored in the fourth storage unit, the pending image GB1 is displayed in the region R24. be done.

In the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, when the determination information is stored in the determination storage area (0th storage unit), the pending image GB1 is displayed in the area R0. Further, when the first special symbol display device 20 starts to fluctuate and the shift process described above is executed, each reserved image GB1 from the area R11 to the area R14 is moved to the area R adjacent to the left and displayed. Similarly, when the second special symbol display device 21 starts to fluctuate and the shift process described above is executed, the reserved image GB1 from the area R21 to the area R24 is moved to the area R adjacent to the left and displayed.

The reserved image GB2 is displayed in the areas R11 to R14 of the image display device 31 . For example, when the determination information is stored in the first storage section of the second special symbol reservation storage area, the reservation image GB2 is displayed in the area R11, and when the determination information is stored in the second storage section, the reservation is made in the area R12. When the image GB2 is displayed and the determination information is stored in the third storage unit, the pending image GB2 is displayed in the region R13, and when the determination information is stored in the fourth storage unit, the pending image GB2 is displayed in the region R14. be done.

In the low-probability time-saving gaming state or high-probability time-saving gaming state, when the determination information is stored in the determination storage area (0th storage unit), a pending image GB2 is displayed in the area R0. Further, when the second special symbol display device 21 starts to fluctuate and the shift process described above is executed, the pending image GB2 of the area R11 to the area R14 is moved to the area R adjacent to the left and displayed. In addition, in the low-probability time-saving gaming state, when the determination information is stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area, the reservation image may be displayed.

In the above configuration, the pending image GB (1, 2) displayed in the area R moves to the area R adjacent to the left of the area R each time the game is executed, and is finally displayed in the area R0. . Further, when the game in which the pending image GB is displayed in the region R0 (the game in which the determination information acquired when the display of the pending image GB is started is determined by the big hit determination process) ends, the pending image GB is hidden. . Note that the time when the pending image GB displayed in the region R0 is hidden can be changed as appropriate.

The sub CPU 121 of the third embodiment starts displaying the pending image GB when the start winning designation command is received. Also, the sub CPU 121 determines whether or not to execute the pending change effect in the pending image GB by referring to the start winning designation command. Specifically, the variation pattern of the special symbol includes a variation pattern for executing the pending change effect. The sub CPU 121 determines execution of the pending change effect when the variation pattern (winning prize information) specified by the start winning designation command is a variation pattern for executing the pending change effect. When the result of the preliminary determination specified from the start winning designation command is a big hit, the pending change performance is more likely to be executed than when the result of the preliminary determination is a loss.

When execution of the pending change effect is determined, the mode (for example, color) of the pending image GB changes to a predetermined mode. For example, FIG. 29(a) described above assumes a specific example in which the reserved image GB in the region R12 is displayed in a special manner and the reserved image GB in the other region R is displayed in a normal manner.

Specifically, the pending image GB is displayed in a normal mode (for example, white) when the pending change effect is not executed. On the other hand, when execution of the pending change effect is determined, the pending image GB changes to a special mode (for example, blue) at some time during the display period of the pending image GB. The timing at which the reserved image GB changes to the special mode includes the time when the reserved image GB is moved (shifted) and displayed, during the game before the reserved image GB moves to the region R0, and when the reserved image GB changes to the special mode. It is conceivable in the middle of the game after moving to the region R0.

In the hold change effect, the hold image GB changes to one of a plurality of special modes (red, gold, rainbow color in addition to blue). Also, during the display period of the reserved image GB, the appearance of the reserved image GB may change (stepwise) multiple times. The sub CPU 121, for example, determines in advance the timing (scenario) at which the final special mode and the mode of the pending image GB change, when determining the execution of the pending change effect. Specifically, depending on the result of the preliminary determination specified from the starting winning designation command and the number of reservations, the timing when the final special mode and the mode of the reservation image GB changes is determined. However, although the details will be described later, a limited period may be provided in the third embodiment. During the above restriction period, the pending change effect is not determined (restricted).

FIG. 56(a) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the limited period. As described above, during the limited period, the pending change effect is not determined even if the starting prize is won. In the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56(a), the accumulated number m is added to the numerical value "800" from the start of the game (at the start of the special symbol variation) in which the accumulated number m is added to the numerical value "797". Until the end of the game (when the special symbol fluctuation is stopped) is the restricted period. That is, from the start of the game four times before the game to shift to the second time-saving gaming state to the start of the second time-saving gaming state is the limit period. As described above, the upper limit of the number of first reservations is four. Therefore, the above restriction period can be rephrased as a period during which the determination information reserved in the first special symbol reservation storage area until the second time saving game state can be obtained in the low probability non-time saving game state.

Assuming a contrast in which a pending change performance can be determined when the determination information to be held in the first special symbol holding storage area until the second time-saving game state is acquired in the low-probability non-time-saving game state. In the above comparison, the player may be able to grasp that the determination information determined to be a big hit is stored in the first special symbol holding storage area at the time of shifting to the second time-saving gaming state. Therefore, in the above comparison, by maintaining the second reservation number at the numerical value "1" or more in the second time-saving gaming state, while grasping that the right to execute the jackpot game is held, the jackpot game You can play the game without intentionally generating it. In the above comparison, there may be a problem that the gambling nature of the player is remarkably fueled.

In consideration of the above circumstances, in the third embodiment, among the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, in the limit period in which the determination information to be withheld until the second time-saving gaming state can be acquired, a configuration in which the pending change effect is not determined adopted. It should be noted that even during the limited period, the main CPU 111 generates a start winning designation command through preliminary determination processing, and the sub CPU 121 side receives the starting winning designation command. Therefore, the restricted period is a period in which the sub CPU 121 can determine the pending change effect, but it can also be rephrased as a period in which determination of the pending change effect is intentionally restricted. In the above configuration, at the time of transition to the second time-saving game state, the player cannot grasp from the reserved image GB that the judgment information for judging the big hit is stored in the first special symbol holding storage area. Therefore, the above-mentioned inconvenience is suppressed.

FIG. 56(b-1) is a diagram for explaining the probability that the pending change effect is determined. Specifically, FIG. 56 (b-1) is a period other than the limited period of the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "non-restricted period"). The probability that the performance is determined is indicated. In addition, FIG. 56(b-1) shows the probability that the pending change effect is executed for each result of the preliminary determination at the time of starting winning.

In the non-restricted period of the third embodiment, the pending change effect is more likely to be determined when the result of the preliminary determination is the third time saving compared to when the result of the preliminary determination is a loss. Specifically, when the result of the prior determination is the third time reduction, the pending change effect is determined with a probability of about 20%. Further, when the result of the preliminary determination is a failure, the pending change effect is determined with a probability of about 5%. However, if the result of the preliminary determination is the third time reduction, the suspension change effect is always determined, and if the result of the preliminary determination is a loss, the suspension change effect may not be determined.

In the non-restricted period of the third embodiment, the pending change effect is more likely to be determined when the result of the prior determination is a big hit, compared to the case where the result of the prior determination is the third time reduction. Specifically, when the result of the prior determination is a big hit, the pending change effect is decided with a probability of about 50%. However, if the result of the prior determination is a big hit, the pending change effect is always determined, and if the result of the prior determination is the third time reduction, the pending change effect may not be determined. When the result of the preliminary determination is a small hit, the pending change effect is determined with a probability of about 10%.

By the way, as described above, the main control board 110 transmits to the effect control board 120 the cumulative number command that can specify the cumulative number m. From the above accumulated number command, the sub CPU 121 can specify the number of games until the second time saving gaming state is activated. For example, it is assumed that the number of games played until the second time-saving gaming state is activated is "X times". Also, assume that the number of reservations is X or more. In the above case, the sub CPU 121 can understand that the jackpot will not be won in X games by analyzing the start winning designation command. In the above configuration, the sub CPU 121 can grasp in advance from the cumulative number of times command and the start winning designation command that the second time-saving gaming state will operate in the game after X times.

Therefore, the holding image GB displayed in the region R0 in the game that transitions to the second time-saving game state may be configured to change to a special mode different from the normal mode and the special mode. As the hold image GB of the special mode, for example, a hold image GB displaying a message “Start of the second time saving?” can be considered. However, in the above configuration, when a pending change effect is determined to suggest a transition to the second time-saving gaming state, depending on the player, the result of the prior determination is a big hit. may cause the inconvenience of misunderstanding when suggesting.

Considering the above circumstances, in the third embodiment, the pending change effect for notifying the transition to the second time-saving gaming state is not executed. Specifically, the pending change effect does not include the effect of changing the pending image GB to the special mode described above. According to the above configuration, there is an advantage that the above inconvenience is suppressed. However, it may be configured such that the reserved image GB can be changed in a special manner.

FIG. 56(b-2) is a diagram for explaining the probability that the pending change effect is determined during the restricted period. As shown in FIG. 56(b-2), during the restricted period, the pending change effect is not determined regardless of the result of the prior determination. However, during the restricted period, a configuration may be adopted in which the pending change effect can be determined at a lower probability than during the non-restricted period. Moreover, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the pending change effect can be determined only when the result of the prior determination is a big hit during the restriction period. Furthermore, it may be configured such that the pending change effect can be determined only when the result of the prior determination is other than a failure during the restricted period.

FIG. 56(c) is a schematic diagram of a screen displayed on the image display device 31 during the restricted period. During the restricted period, various images described above with reference to FIG. 29(a) are displayed. Also, during the restricted period, as shown in FIG. 30(c), the emphasized image GZ is displayed. The emphasized image GZ is an image for emphasizing the number of remaining games until transition to the second time-saving game state.

The above emphasized image GZ is displayed, for example, near the approximate center of the screen of the image display device 31 . Also, the emphasized image GZ is displayed immediately after the game is started, and disappears after a predetermined time elapses. Specifically, the display time of the enhanced image GZ is shorter than the variation pattern with the shortest variation time among the variation patterns that can be determined in the limited period. With the above configuration, the inconvenience that the emphasized image GZ displayed in the current game is displayed when the next game starts is suppressed.

Specifically, in the game three times before the game that shifts to the second time-saving game state (the game in which the cumulative number m is added to the numerical value “797”), the emphasized image GZ that displays the message “3 more times” is displayed. Is displayed. Similarly, in the game two times before the game transitioning to the second time-saving game state (the game in which the cumulative number of times m is added to the numerical value "798"), the emphasized image GZ displaying the message "two more times" is displayed. , in the game (the game in which the cumulative number of times m is added to the numerical value "799") one time before the game transitioning to the second time-saving game state, the emphasized image GZ displaying the message "one more time" is displayed. In a game (a game in which the accumulated number of times m is added to the numerical value "800") to shift to the 2 o'clock short game state, an emphasized image GZ displaying a message "LAST" is displayed.

However, the game in which the emphasized image GZ is displayed is not limited to the above examples. Specifically, the emphasized image GZ may be displayed from the game before the start of the restricted period. For example, the configuration may be such that the emphasized image GZ is displayed from the game five times before the game that shifts to the second time-saving game state. Further, the configuration may be such that the emphasized image GZ is displayed from the game after the restricted period is started. For example, it may be configured such that the emphasized image GZ is displayed only in the game that transitions to the second time-saving game state. In addition, the emphasized image GZ of the third embodiment is configured to display a message that expects the transition to the second time-saving gaming state, such as "three more times until the start of the second time-saving gaming state," for example. may be

According to the above-described emphasized image GZ, there is an advantage that it becomes easier for the player to grasp that the game state is to be shifted to the second time-saving game state. In addition, in a configuration in which the pending change effect is executed during the period in which the emphasized image GZ is displayed, it is assumed that the player will pay attention to the pending change effect and the emphasized image GZ will not be noticed. In the configuration of the third embodiment, a restriction period is provided immediately before shifting to the second time-saving gaming state, and the pending change effect is not executed during the period in which the emphasized image GZ is displayed. Therefore, the above-described inconvenience is suppressed, and the effect of making it easier for the player to grasp that the game state is shifted to the second time-saving game state is particularly remarkable. It should be noted that the effect of making it easier for the player to grasp that the transition to the second time-saving gaming state is at least ensured by simply preventing the pending change effect from being executed during the restricted period, so it is emphasized during the restricted period. The number-of-games image GE displayed before the limit period may be displayed continuously without displaying the image GZ.

FIG. 57 (a-1) to FIG. 57 (a-4), and FIG. 57 (b-1) to FIG. 57 (b-4) are the period during which the normal design display device 22 normally fluctuates the design, and It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship with the period when the opening-and-closing door 14b operates (the 2nd starting port 14 is opened). In addition to the period during which the normal symbols are varied and the period during which the open/close door 14b is operated, each of the above drawings shows the game state at each time point. Further, each of the above figures shows the number of reservations at each point in time.

As described above, in the non-time-saving game state, the normal pattern variation time is about 10 seconds. In addition, in the time-saving game state, the variation time of normal symbols is about 1 second. Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, the normal symbol variation time in the non-time-saving gaming state may be referred to as "variation time Ha". Further, the variation time of the normal symbol in the time-saving game state may be described as "variation time Hb". As described above, the fluctuation time Hb of normal symbols in each time saving game state (first to third time saving game states) is common.

Further, in the non-time-saving game state, the total opening time of the open/close door 14b when the open symbols (long open symbol, short open symbol) are stopped and displayed is about 4.2 seconds or about 0.2 seconds. Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, the operation mode (total opening time, number of times of opening) of the open/close door 14b when the open symbol is stopped and displayed in the non-time-saving gaming state may be collectively referred to as "operation mode Da". Similarly, in the time-saving game state, the total opening time of the open/close door 14b when the open symbol is stopped and displayed is about 5 seconds or about 3 seconds. Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, the operation mode of the opening/closing door 14b when the open symbol is stopped and displayed in the time-saving game state may be collectively referred to as "operation mode Db". As above-mentioned, the operation|movement aspect of the opening-and-closing door 14b in each time-saving game state is common.

FIG. 57(a-1) is a diagram for explaining a specific example in which a losing symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22. FIG. Specifically, FIG. 57(a-1) assumes the case where the variable display of normal symbols started in the low probability non-time-saving gaming state is stopped. In the above case, the normal pattern fluctuates over the fluctuation time Ha. Also, FIG. 57(a-1) assumes a case where the pending number of the normal drawing lottery is added to the numerical value "1" before the time ta1 when the variable display stops.

In the specific example of FIG. 57(a-1), the normal symbols are stopped and displayed from time ta1 when the normal symbols are stopped to time ta2 when the wait period (about 0.5 seconds) elapses. In addition, the normal symbol storage determination process (see FIG. 36(b)) for starting the next variable display of normal symbols is executed immediately after time ta2. When the normal symbol memory determination process is executed, the number of reservations is subtracted, and a new variable display of normal symbols is started. In the specific example of FIG. 57 (a-1), the game state at time ta2 is a low probability non-time-saving game state. Therefore, the variation time Ha is determined in the normal symbol memory determination process executed immediately after time ta2.

FIG. 57(a-2) is a diagram for explaining another specific example in which a losing symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22. FIG. Specifically, FIG. 57 (a-2) is similar to FIG. 57 (a-1) described above, assuming the case where the variable display of normal symbols started in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state is stopped . In the above case, the normal pattern fluctuates over the fluctuation time Ha. Further, the specific example of FIG. 57 (a-2) assumes that the pending number of the normal drawing lottery is added to the numerical value "1" before the time ta1 when the variable display stops. Also, it is assumed that the wait period during which normal symbols are stopped and displayed ends at time ta2. In the above configuration, immediately after time ta2, normal symbol storage determination processing for starting a new game is executed.

The specific example of FIG. 57(a-2) is different from the specific example of FIG. Specifically, in the low-probability non-time-saving game state, when the cumulative number of times m reaches the number of times of operation n, the game state is shifted to the second time-saving game state. Further, in the low-probability non-time-saving game state, when the time-saving design is stop-displayed on the special design display device, the game state shifts to the third time-saving game state. The specific example of FIG. 57 (a-2) assumes that the second time-saving gaming state or the third time-saving gaming state transition opportunity is established at time tx.

As shown in FIG. 57(a-2), time tx is before time (immediately after time ta2) at which a new normal symbol memory determination process is executed. Specifically, the time point tx is a point in the middle of the variable display of the normal symbols that stops at the time point ta.

In the third embodiment, the variable display is continued until the variable time Ha even if the normal symbol variable display started in the non-time-saving game state is shifted to the time-saving game state. That is, the fluctuation time Ha determined at the start of the variable display of the normal symbols is not changed even if the state is shifted to the time-saving game state in the middle of the variable display. For example, in the specific example of FIG. 57(a-2), even if the game shifts to the time-saving game state during the variable display of normal symbols that stop at time ta1, the variable display is continued until the variable time Ha. In the above configuration, since the already determined variable time Ha is not changed unnecessarily, the inconvenience of impairing the fairness of the game is suppressed.

Further, in the third embodiment, the normal symbols (long open symbols, short open symbols, lost symbols) determined at the start of variation are not changed even if the game state changes during the variation display. With the above configuration, since the normal symbols that have already been determined are not changed unnecessarily, the inconvenience of impairing the fairness of the game is suppressed.

In the specific example of FIG. 57(a-2), in the normal symbol memory determination process immediately after time ta2, the random number value for hit determination acquired in the non-time-saving game state is determined. However, the game state at the time ta2 is a time-saving game state. Therefore, in the normal symbol storage determination process, the normal pattern lottery (hit determination process) is executed with the winning probability in the time saving game state. In addition, in the normal symbol memory determination process, the variation time Hb of the time saving game state is determined as the variation time of the normal symbol, and the operation mode Db of the time saving game state is determined as the operation mode of the open/close door 14b.

FIG. 57(a-3) is a diagram for explaining a specific example in which an open symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22. FIG. Specifically, FIG. 57 (a-3), like the above-described FIG. 57 (a-1) and FIG. 57 (a-2), the normal symbol fluctuation display started in the low probability non-time-saving gaming state is stopped. In the above case, the normal pattern fluctuates over the fluctuation time Ha. Also, FIG. 57(a-3) assumes a case where the pending number of the normal drawing lottery is added to the numerical value "1" before the time ta1 when the variable display stops.

In the specific example of FIG. 57(a-3), it is assumed that the opening symbol is stopped and displayed at time ta1, and the opening/closing door 14b is changed to the operating state. In FIG. 57(a-3), the time ta1 when the open pattern is stopped and the time when the opening/closing door 14b is activated are shown to be substantially coincident. However, in actuality, the open/close door 14b is activated after the wait period ends after the open pattern is stopped. That is, the opening/closing door 14b is activated after the time ta1. The same applies to FIGS. 57(a-4), 57(b-3) and 57(b-4) which will be described later. However, the time ta1 when the open pattern is stopped and the time when the opening/closing door 14b is activated may substantially coincide with each other.

In the specific example of FIG. 57(a-3), the operation mode Da is determined at the start of fluctuation of the normal symbols. It is also assumed that the operation of the open/close door 14b ends at time ta2. In the above case, the normal symbol storage determination process is executed immediately after time ta2, and a new variable display of normal symbols can be started. In the specific example of FIG. 57 (a-3), the game state at time ta2 is a non-time-saving game state. Therefore, in the normal symbol storage determination process, the normal symbol variation time Ha is determined as the variation time.

FIG. 57(a-4) is a diagram for explaining another specific example in which an open symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22. FIG. Specifically, FIG. 57(a-4) assumes the case where the variable display of the normal symbols started in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state is stopped in the same manner as in FIG. 57(a-3) described above. In the above case, the normal pattern fluctuates over the fluctuation time Ha. Also, FIG. 57(a-4) assumes a case where the pending number of the normal drawing lottery is added to the numerical value "1" before the time ta1 when the variable display stops.

However, in the specific example of FIG. 57 (a-4), at time tx before the time (immediately after time ta2) at which the normal symbol memory determination process is newly executed, from the low probability non-time-saving game state low probability time-saving game It differs from the above-described specific example of FIG. 57(a-3) in that it shifts to the state. Specifically, FIG. 57 (a-4) assumes a case where the opening/closing door 14b moves from the low-probability non-time-saving game state to the low-probability time-saving game state during the period of operation.

In the third embodiment, even if the operation of the opening/closing door 14b started in the non-time-saving game state is shifted to the time-saving game state, the operation of the opening/closing door 14b is continued in the already determined operation mode. That is, the operation mode Da of the non-time-saving game state determined at the time of starting the fluctuation of the normal symbols is not changed even if it shifts to the time-saving game state in the middle of the operation of the open/close door 14b. In the above configuration, since the operation mode of the opening/closing door that has already been determined is not changed unnecessarily, the inconvenience of impairing the fairness of the game can be suppressed.

In the specific example of FIG. 31(a-4), in the normal symbol memory determination process immediately after time ta2, the random number value for hit determination acquired in the non-time-saving game state is determined. However, the game state at the time ta2 is a time-saving game state. Therefore, in the normal symbol storage determination process, the normal pattern lottery (hit determination process) is executed with the winning probability in the time saving game state. In addition, in the normal symbol storage determination process, the variation time Hb is determined as the normal symbol variation time, and the operation mode Db is determined as the operation mode of the open/close door 14b.

FIG. 57(b-1) is a diagram for explaining another specific example in which a losing symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22. FIG. Specifically, FIG. 57 (b-1) is when the fluctuation display of the normal design started in the low-probability time-saving gaming state (including the second time-saving gaming state and the third time-saving gaming state) stops at time ta1 assume. As described above, the normal symbols fluctuate over the fluctuating time Hb in the time-saving gaming state. Also, FIG. 57(b-1) assumes a case where the pending number of the normal drawing lottery is added to the numerical value "1" before the time ta1 when the variable display stops.

In the specific example of FIG. 57(b-1), the normal symbols are stopped and displayed from time ta1 when the normal symbols are stopped to time ta2 when the wait period (about 0.5 seconds) elapses. In the specific example of FIG. 57 (b-1), the game state at time ta2 is a low probability time-saving game state. Therefore, the variation time Hb is determined in the normal symbol storage determination process executed immediately after time ta2.

FIG. 57(b-2) is a diagram for explaining another specific example in which a losing symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22. FIG. Specifically, FIG. 57 (b-2) is similar to FIG. 57 (b-1) described above, and assumes the case where the variable display of normal symbols started in the low-probability time-saving gaming state stops at time ta1. do. In addition, FIG. 57(b-2) assumes a case where the pending number of the normal drawing lottery is added to the numerical value "1" before the time ta1 when the variable display stops.

However, in the specific example of FIG. 57 (b-2), at time tx before the time when the normal symbol memory determination process is newly executed (immediately after time ta2 when the wait period ends), from the low probability time-saving gaming state It is different from the specific example of FIG. 57 (b-1) described above in that it shifts to the low probability non-time-saving gaming state. Specifically, the specific example of FIG. 57 (b-2) assumes a case where the low-probability time-saving gaming state shifts to the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state at time tx during the variable display of normal symbols. As the above case, for example, the case where the remaining number of times M (2, 3) of the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state is subtracted to the numerical value "0" at time tx can be considered.

In the third embodiment, the variable display is continued until the variable time Hb is reached even if the normal symbol variable display started in the time-saving game state is shifted to the non-time-saving game state. That is, the fluctuation time Hb of the time-saving game state determined at the start of fluctuation of the normal symbols is not changed even if the game state shifts to the non-time-saving game state in the middle of the variable display. For example, in the specific example of FIG. 57 (b-2), even if the transition to the non-time-saving game state is made in the middle of the variable display of the normal symbols stopped at time ta1, the variable display is continued until the variable time Hb. . With the above configuration, since the fluctuation time of the normal symbols already determined is not changed unnecessarily, the inconvenience of impairing the fairness of the game is suppressed.

In the specific example of FIG. 57(b-2), in the normal symbol storage determination process immediately after time ta2, the random number value for hit determination acquired in the time-saving game state is determined. However, the gaming state at time ta2 is a non-time-saving gaming state. Therefore, in the normal symbol storage determination process, the normal pattern lottery is executed with the winning probability of the non-time-saving game state. In addition, in the normal symbol storage determination process, the variation time Ha is determined as the normal symbol variation time, and the operation mode Da is determined as the operation mode of the open/close door 14b.

FIG. 57(b-3) is a diagram for explaining another specific example in which an open symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22. FIG. Specifically, FIG. 57 (b-3) is similar to the above-described FIG. 57 (b-1) and FIG. Assume that the motor stops at time ta1. Also, FIG. 57(b-3) assumes a case where the pending number of the normal drawing lottery is added to the numerical value "1" before the time ta1 when the variable display stops.

In the specific example of FIG. 57(b-3), it is assumed that the open symbol is stopped and displayed at time ta1, and the opening/closing door 14b is changed to the operation. As described above, the operation mode Db is determined as the operation mode of the open/close door 14b in the time saving game state. In the specific example of FIG. 57(b-3), it is assumed that the operating state of the opening/closing door 14b ends at time ta2. In the above case, normal symbol memory determination processing for starting a new variable display is executed immediately after time ta2. In the specific example of FIG. 57(b-3), the game state at time ta2 is the time-saving game state. Therefore, the fluctuation time of the normal design determined in the normal design storage determination process immediately after the time ta2 is the fluctuation time Hb.

FIG. 57(b-4) is a diagram for explaining another specific example in which an open symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22. FIG. Figure 57 (b-4), similar to Figure 57 (b-3) described above, before the time ta1 when the fluctuation display stops, the pending number of the normal figure lottery is added to the numerical value "1", and the opening and closing door 14b is terminated at time ta2. However, in the specific example of FIG. 57 (b-4), at time tx before the normal symbol memory determination process is executed (immediately after time ta2), from the low probability time-saving gaming state to the low probability non-time-saving gaming state It is different from the specific example of FIG. 57(b-3) described above in that it shifts. Specifically, FIG. 57 (b-4) assumes a case where the opening/closing door 14b moves from the low-probability time-saving game state to the low-probability non-time-saving game state during the period of the operating state.

In the third embodiment, even if the operation of the opening/closing door 14b started in the time-saving game state is shifted to the non-time-saving game state, the operation of the opening/closing door 14b is continued in the already determined operation mode. That is, the operation mode Db of the time-saving game state determined at the time of starting the variation of the normal symbol is not changed even if the game state shifts to the non-time-saving game state in the middle of the operation of the open/close door 14b. In the above configuration, since the operation mode of the opening/closing door that has already been determined is not changed unnecessarily, the inconvenience of impairing the fairness of the game can be suppressed.

In the specific example of FIG. 57(b-4), in the normal symbol storage determination process immediately after time ta2, the random number value for hit determination acquired in the time-saving game state is determined. However, the gaming state at time ta2 is a non-time-saving gaming state. Therefore, in the normal symbol storage determination process, the normal pattern lottery is executed with the winning probability of the non-time-saving game state. In addition, in the normal symbol storage determination process, the variation time Ha is determined as the normal symbol variation time, and the operation mode Da is determined as the operation mode of the open/close door 14b.

FIG. 58(a) and FIG. 58(b) are other diagrams for explaining the relationship between the period during which the normal symbol display device 22 fluctuates the normal symbol and the period during which the open/close door 14b operates. In each figure above, in addition to the period during which the normal symbols fluctuate and the period during which the open/close door 14b is operated, the game state at each time point is shown (similar to FIG. 31 described above).

FIG. 58(a) is a diagram for explaining another specific example in which an open symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22. FIG. In the specific example of FIG. 58(a), it is assumed that the low-probability non-time-saving game state is shifted to the time-saving game state at time tx, and then the open symbol is stopped and displayed at time ta. In the above case, as shown in FIG. 58(a), the opening/closing door 14b is controlled in the operation mode Db immediately after time ta. That is, even if the variable display of the normal symbol display device 22 is started in a non-time-saving game state, when the open symbol is stopped and displayed and has shifted to the time-saving game state, the opening/closing door 14b is controlled in the operation mode Db. be.

FIG. 58(b) is a diagram for explaining another specific example in which an open symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22. FIG. In the specific example of FIG. 58(b), it is assumed that the time-saving game state is shifted to the low-probability non-time-saving game state at time tx, and then the open symbol is stopped and displayed at time ta. In the above case, as shown in FIG. 58(b), the opening/closing door 14b is controlled in the operation mode Da immediately after time ta. That is, even if the variable display of the normal symbol display device 22 is started in the time-saving game state, when the open symbol is stopped and displayed and has shifted to the non-time-saving game state, the opening/closing door 14b is controlled in the operation mode Da. be.

FIG. 59(a) is a diagram for explaining a specific example when the second time-saving gaming state ends. As described above, when the game is executed 1000 times, the second time-saving game state ends. In addition, the second time-saving game state may end before the number of games reaches 1000 times when winning a jackpot game. FIG. 59(a) shows a specific example in which the second time-saving game state ends when the jackpot game is won.

FIG. 59(a) shows the period during which the second time-saving game state operates, and the remaining number of times M2 of the second time-saving game state at each time point. In addition, FIG. 59(a) shows the period during which the first time saving game state operates, and the remaining number of times M1 of the first time saving game state. Furthermore, FIG. 59(a) shows the period of the jackpot game (including the opening period and the ending period).

In the specific example of FIG. 59(a), it is assumed that the jackpot game starts at time tb1 in the second time-saving game state. Also, the remaining count M2 immediately before the time tb1 is a numerical value "800". In the above case, the above-described jackpot initializing process is executed at time tb1. Therefore, the remaining number of times M2 is cleared to the numerical value "0", and the second time-saving game state ends.

In the specific example of FIG. 59(a), it is assumed that the jackpot game ends at time tb2. In the above case, at time tb2, the initial value "100" is set to the remaining number M1 of the first time saving game state, and the first time saving game state is started. In addition, when the jackpot game ends, the second time-saving game state is not restarted.

FIG.59(b) is a figure for demonstrating the specific example in case the 3rd time saving game state is complete|finished. As described above, when 100 times or 1000 times of games are executed, the third time-saving game state ends. In addition, the third time-saving game state may end when a big hit game is won. FIG. 59(b) shows a specific example in which the third time-saving game state ends when the jackpot game is won.

FIG. 59(b) shows the period during which the third time-saving game state operates, and the remaining number of times M3 of the third time-saving game state at each time point. Moreover, in FIG.59(b), the period when the 1st time saving game state operates, and the remaining number of times M1 of the 1st time saving game state are shown. Furthermore, FIG. 59(b) shows the period of the jackpot game (including the opening period and the ending period). .

In the specific example of FIG. 59(b), it is assumed that the jackpot game starts at time tc1 in the third time-saving game state. Further, the remaining number of times M3 immediately before the time tc1 is a numerical value "10". In the above case, the above-described jackpot initializing process is executed at time tc1. Therefore, the remaining number of times M3 is cleared to the numerical value "0", and the third time-saving game state ends.

In the specific example of FIG. 59(b), it is assumed that the jackpot game ends at time tc2. In the above case, at time tc2, the initial value "100" is set to the remaining number M1 of the first time saving game state, and the first time saving game state is started. In addition, when the jackpot game ends, the third time-saving game state is not restarted.

By the way, the first time-saving game state ends after 100 games have been played. In addition, when the low probability game state continues over 800 games, the second time saving game state is started. In the above configuration, since the first time-saving game state ends before the second time-saving game state starts, there is no period in which the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state overlap and operate. However, it is good also as a structure which can produce the period when the 1st time saving game state and the 2nd time saving game state overlap and operate. For example, a configuration is conceivable in which a numerical value greater than "800 times" can be set as the initial value of the remaining number of times M1 in the first time-saving gaming state. In the above configuration, in the low-probability game state after the first time-saving game state reaches 800 times, the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state are operated redundantly.

Further, in the time saving game state including the first time saving game state, even if the time saving pattern is stop-displayed, it does not shift to the third time saving game state. In the above configuration, a period in which the first time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state overlap and operate is not provided. However, it is good also as a structure which can produce the period when the 1st time saving game state and the 3rd time saving game state overlap and operate. For example, when the time-saving design is stop-displayed in the first time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state may be operated in a subsequent period. Although described in detail below, in the third embodiment, the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state may operate redundantly.

FIG.59(c) is a figure for demonstrating the specific example in case the 2nd time saving game state and the 3rd time saving game state overlap and operate|move. FIG. 59(c) shows the period during which the second time-saving game state operates and the period during which the third time-saving game state operates. In addition, FIG. 59(c) shows the remaining number of times M2 of the second time-saving game state, the remaining number of times M3 of the third time-saving game state, and the cumulative number of times m. In the specific example of FIG. 59(c), it is assumed that the cumulative number of times m reaches the number of times of actuation "800" at time td1 of the third time-saving game state. In the above case, the second time-saving game state is activated from time td1. Further, in the specific example of FIG. 59(c), immediately after the second time-saving gaming state starts, the remaining number of times M3 of the third time-saving gaming state is a numerical value "X" (however, 0<X<1000). do.

As shown in FIG.59(c), in the period after time td1, both 2nd time saving game state and 3rd time saving game state operate|move. Further, in the period in which both the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state are activated, the numerical value "1" is subtracted from each of the remaining number of times M2 and the remaining number of times M3 in each game. In the specific example of FIG. 59(c), it is assumed that the remaining number of times M3 is subtracted to the numerical value "0" at time td2. In the above cases, the third time-saving game state ends at time td2.

In the specific example of FIG. 59(c), the remaining count M2 (1000-X) at time td2 is greater than or equal to the numerical value "1". In the above specific example, at time td2, while the third time-saving gaming state ends, the second time-saving gaming state continues. In the specific example of FIG. 59(c), at time td3 after time td2, the remaining number of times M2 is subtracted to the numerical value "0", and the second time saving game state ends.

In the above-described third embodiment, when the cumulative number of times m reaches the operation number of times n, the second time-saving game state is activated even in the third time-saving game state. Therefore, compared to the configuration in which the second time-saving game state does not operate depending on the game state in which the cumulative number m reaches the operation number n, the player is prevented from being excessively disadvantaged. In addition, in the third embodiment, during the period in which the two time-saving game states (the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state) overlap, the remaining times of both time-saving game states are subtracted. Therefore, for example, during a period in which two time-saving gaming states overlap, the subtraction of the remaining number of games in one of the time-saving gaming states is stopped, and after the other time-saving gaming state ends, the one time-saving gaming state is Compared with the restarting configuration, there is an advantage that the inconvenience that the time-saving gaming state is excessively prolonged is suppressed.

Also, as described above, in the third embodiment, the normal pattern fluctuation time, the time during which the normal pattern is stopped and displayed (wait period time) and the operation mode of the opening and closing door 14b when winning the normal pattern lottery It is common in each time saving game state. That is, the opening mode of the opening and closing door 14b is common in each time-saving game state.

Temporarily, the opening mode of the opening-and-closing door 14b assumes the contrast which differs in each time-saving game state. In the above comparison, when the time saving game state overlaps, it becomes a problem whether the open mode of any time saving game state should be prioritized. According to the third embodiment, the above problems are suppressed.

Also, in the above comparison, after the time-saving game state overlaps, when one time-saving game state ends and the other time-saving game state continues, the opening mode of the opening and closing door 14b is changed When the configuration is adopted. assume. For example, in the above comparison, it is assumed that the time-saving gaming state A (the open mode is the open mode KA) and the time-saving gaming state B (the open mode is the open mode KB) overlap. Further, in the above case, the open/close door 14b is controlled in the opening mode KA of the time saving game state A in the period in which the time saving game state A and the time saving game state B overlap. Furthermore, after the time saving game state A and the time saving game state B overlap, the case where the time saving game state A ends and the time saving game state B continues is assumed. In the above case, the open mode of the opening/closing door 14b changes from the open mode KA to the open mode KB.

In the above comparison, since the opening mode changes even though the time-saving gaming state continues, some players may feel uncomfortable. According to 3rd Embodiment, the above inconvenience is suppressed. In the above-mentioned comparison, after the time saving game state A and the time saving game state B overlap, when the time saving game state A ends and the time saving game state B continues, in the time saving game state B after that, the opening and closing door 14b It may be configured to be controlled in the open mode KA. In the above configuration, since the opening mode does not change when the time-saving gaming state A ends, the above-described inconvenience is suppressed.

Figures 60(a) to 60(c) are diagrams for explaining the mode (lighting, extinguishing) of the right-handed lamp 28 before and after the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state. As described above, the right-handed lamp 28 is lit in the time-saving game state, and is turned off when the time-saving game state ends and shifts to the low-probability non-time-saving game state. Various external information signals are output from the gaming machine 1 to an external device (for example, a hall computer). The above various external information signals include advantageous period signals.

The advantageous period signal changes to the ON state at the start of the jackpot game (at the start of the opening period), at the start of the second time-saving game state and at the start of the third time-saving game state, and then to the low probability non-time-saving game state. It is maintained in the ON state until transition. In other words, the above advantageous period signal turns ON in a game state (jackpot game, low-probability time-saving game state, high-probability time-saving game state) in which it is more advantageous to play right-handed than left-handed.

60(a) to 60(c) show the states (ON, OFF) of the advantageous period signal at each point in time. Also, FIGS. 60(a) to 60(c) show the accumulated count m at each time point. In addition, when the small winning game is executed in the low probability non-time-saving game state, the advantageous period signal may be maintained in the OFF state, or may be temporarily set in the ON state.

FIG. 60(a) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the mode of the right-handed ramp 28 before and after the second time-saving gaming state. In the specific example of FIG. 60(a), it is assumed that the cumulative number of times m reaches the number of times of actuation "800" at time te1, and the state shifts to the second time-saving gaming state. As shown in FIG. 60(a), in the low-probability non-time-saving game state before shifting to the second time-saving game state, the advantageous period signal is in the OFF state, and the right-handed lamp 28 is extinguished.

In the above specific example of FIG. 60(a), the right-handed lamp 28 starts lighting at time te1. That is, the right-handed lamp 28 starts lighting substantially simultaneously with the start of the second time-saving game state. Specifically, in the third embodiment, when the special symbols are stopped (special symbol stop processing), the cumulative number of times m is determined, and immediately after that, the second time saving flag is changed to the ON state. The main CPU 111 keeps the right strike lamp 28 off until the second time saving flag is turned on (until the special symbol stops), and immediately after turning the second time saving flag on (substantially simultaneously) The strike lamp 28 is turned on. The main CPU 111 keeps the advantageous period signal OFF until the second time saving flag is turned ON, and changes the advantageous period signal to ON immediately after turning the second time saving flag ON. The main CPU 111 of the third embodiment lights the right-handed lamp 28 and turns on the advantageous period signal even if the number of reserved special symbols is 0 at the time of transition to the second time-saving gaming state. .

In the specific example of FIG. 60(a), it is assumed that 1000 games are executed and the second time-saving gaming state ends at time te2. In the above case, the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state is started from time te2. The above time te2 is the time when the special symbol is stopped in the 1000th game in the second time saving game state. As shown in FIG. 60(a), the right-handed lamp 28 lights up until the special symbol stops in the 1000th game in the second time-saving game state, and then goes out. Further, the advantageous period signal is maintained in the ON state until the special symbol stops in the 1000th game in the second time-saving game state, and then changes to the OFF state.

As described above, in the third embodiment, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the third time saving transition determination process is executed before the time saving end determination process (see FIG. 53 described above). In the above configuration, it is assumed that the time saving pattern is stop-displayed in the last game in the second time saving game state. In the above case, when the third time reduction transition determination process is executed, it is in the second time reduction game state (the second time reduction flag is ON). Moreover, in the 3rd time reduction transition determination process, it does not shift to the 3rd time reduction game state except for the low probability non-time reduction state. Therefore, even if the time saving pattern is stop-displayed in the last game of the second time saving game state, it does not shift to the third time saving game state (the time saving pattern becomes invalid).

As can be understood from the above description, in the third embodiment, even if the time saving pattern is stopped and displayed in the last game of the second time saving game state, do not shift to the third time saving game state (low probability non time saving game state), the right-handed lamp 28 is extinguished, and the advantageous period signal is turned OFF. However, when the special symbol is stop-displayed, the third time-saving transition determination process may be executed after the time-saving end determination process. In the above configuration, when the time saving pattern is stop-displayed in the last game of the second time saving game state, the game state is then shifted to the third time saving game state. The main CPU 111 of the third embodiment turns off the right-handed lamp 28 and turns off the advantageous period signal even if the number of reserved special symbols is 0 at the end of the second time-saving gaming state. .

FIG.60(b) is a figure for demonstrating the specific example of the aspect of the right hitting lamp 28 before and after the 3rd time-saving game state. In the specific example of FIG. 60(b), it is assumed that the time saving design stops at time tf1 and the game moves to the third time saving game state. As shown in FIG. 60(c), in the low-probability non-time-saving game state before shifting to the third time-saving game state, the advantageous period signal is in the OFF state, and the right-handed lamp 28 is extinguished.

In the above specific example of FIG. 60(b), the right-handed lamp 28 lights up at time tf1. That is, the right-handed lamp 28 lights substantially simultaneously with the start of the third time-saving gaming state. Specifically, in the third embodiment, it is determined whether or not the time saving design is stopped at the time of stopping the special design (special design stopping processing), and immediately after that, the third time saving flag is changed to the ON state. . The main CPU 111 keeps the right strike lamp 28 off until the third time saving flag is turned on (until the special symbol stops), and immediately after turning the third time saving flag on (substantially at the same time) The strike lamp 28 is turned on. The main CPU 111 keeps the advantageous period signal OFF until the third time saving flag is turned ON, and changes the advantageous period signal to ON immediately after turning the third time saving flag ON. It should be noted that the main CPU 111 lights the right-handed lamp 28 and turns on the advantageous period signal even if the number of reserved special symbols is 0 at the time of transition to the third time-saving gaming state.

In the specific example of FIG. 60(b), it is assumed that the special symbol J1 among the time saving symbols is stopped and displayed at time tf1. In the above case, the initial value of the remaining number M3 of the third time-saving game state is "100". Further, in the specific example of FIG. 60(b), it is assumed that 100 games are executed and the third time-saving gaming state ends at time tf2. Furthermore, in the specific example of FIG. 60(b), at the time tf2 when the 100th game of the third time-saving game state is completed, if the cumulative number m is not a numerical value "1000" (the second time-saving game state transition opportunity is is not established). In the above case, the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state is started from time tf2. The above time tf2 is the time when the special symbols (except for the big hit symbols) stop in the 100th game in the third time-saving game state.

In the specific example of FIG. 60(b) above, the right-handed lamp 28 lights up until the special symbol stops in the 100th game in the third time-saving game state, and then goes out. Also, the advantageous period signal is maintained in the ON state until the special symbol stops in the 100th game in the third time-saving game state, and then changes to the OFF state.

In the third embodiment, in the same way as when the time saving pattern is stopped and displayed in the last game of the second time saving game state, when the time saving pattern is stopped and displayed in the last game of the third time saving game state, the third time saving Without transitioning to the game state (shifting to the low probability non-time-saving game state), the right-handed lamp 28 is extinguished, and the advantageous period signal is turned OFF. Note that the main CPU 111 turns off the right-handed lamp 28 and turns off the advantageous period signal even if the number of reserved special symbols is 0 at the time when the third time-saving gaming state ends.

FIG.60(c) is a figure for demonstrating the other specific example of the aspect of the right hitting lamp 28 before and after the 3rd time saving game state. In the specific example of FIG. 60(c), as in the case of FIG. 60(b) described above, it is assumed that the special symbol J1 (shorter working hours symbol) stops at time tg1 and shifts to the third shorter working hours gaming state. However, in the specific example of FIG. 60 (b) described above, at the time tf2 when the third time-saving gaming state ends, it is assumed that the second time-saving gaming state transition opportunity is not established, but in FIG. 60 (c) In a specific example, it is assumed that the opportunity for transition to the second time-saving gaming state is established.

Specifically, in the specific example of FIG. 60(c), the accumulated count m is added to the numerical value "1000" at time tg2, which is the end of the final game in the third time-saving game state. In the above specific example, the second time saving flag changes to the ON state in the second time saving transition determination process immediately before the third time saving flag changes to the OFF state in the time saving end determination process. Moreover, in the time saving end determination process immediately after the second time saving transition determination process, the third time saving flag changes to the OFF state. In the above case, before and after time tg, both the second time saving flag and the third time saving flag do not have a period of OFF state. Therefore, before and after the time point tg2, the right-handed lamp 28 is maintained in the ON state, and the external information signal is maintained in the ON state.

Note that the advantageous period signal may temporarily change to the OFF state immediately after time tg2. In the above configuration, even if the second time-saving game state starts when the third time-saving game state ends, the fact that the third time-saving game state has ended can be grasped from the advantageous period signal. Further, when the third time-saving game state ends and the second time-saving game state is started, it may be configured to notify that the player should continue hitting to the right. In the above configuration, it is substantially notified that the third time-saving gaming state has ended and that the second time-saving gaming state will start. Further, when the third time-saving game state ends in the middle of the second time-saving game state, it may be configured to notify that the player should continue hitting to the right.

FIG. 61(a-1) to FIG. 61(a-3) are diagrams for explaining each image displayed when the time saving game state is started. FIGS. 61(a-1) to 61(a-3) show the effect executed at each time point, the period during which the effect symbol GA is displayed, and the background image displayed on the image display device 31 at each time point. GH is indicated.

In the third embodiment, when the time-saving gaming state is started, a rush image GT, a prevention image GQ2, and a warning image GQ2, which will be described later, are displayed. The entry image GT is an image for notifying that the time-saving gaming state is started (see FIGS. 61(b-1) to 61(b-3) described later). The prevention image GQ2 is an image displayed to prevent the player from forgetting to remove the card (member card, visitor card) inserted into the gaming device (see FIG. 61(b-1) described later). Also, the warning image GQ2 is an image for warning of game dependency (see FIG. 61(b-2) described later). FIGS. 61(a-1) to 61(a-3) show periods during which the rush image GT, the prevention image GQ2 and the warning image GQ2 are displayed.

FIG. 61(a-1) is a diagram for explaining each image displayed when the first time-saving game state among the time-saving game states is started. In FIG. 61 (a-1), in addition to each image displayed after shifting to the first time-saving gaming state, each image displayed in the big hit game before shifting to the first time-saving gaming state is also shown. As described above, the jackpot game includes an "opening period", a "round period" and an "ending period". In the specific example of FIG. 61(a-1), it is assumed that the ending period of the jackpot game starts at time th1 (the round period ends) and the ending period ends at time th2.

As shown in FIG. 61(a-1), in the round period of the big win game, the effect during the big win is executed. During the big hit, for example, a predetermined moving image is displayed. In addition, in the effect during the big win, the background image during the big win is displayed among the background images GH. The jackpot middle background image is, for example, an image corresponding to the moving image described above.

As shown in FIG. 61(a-1), the effect symbol GA is not displayed in the jackpot game. Also, in the jackpot game, the small symbol Ga, the fourth symbol GC and the reserved number image GD are not displayed. However, in the big hit game, while the effect symbol GA is hidden, the small symbol Ga, the fourth symbol GC and the number of pending images GD may be displayed. During the round period after the jackpot game, the rush image GT, the prevention image GQ2 and the warning image GQ2 are not displayed.

As shown in FIG. 61(a-1), during the ending period of the jackpot game (period from time point th1 to time point th2), time-saving rush effect is executed. In the time-saving effect, a rush image GT is displayed to notify that the game will shift to the time-saving game state (the first time-saving game state in the specific example of FIG. 61(a-1)). In the time-saving rush production described above, the rush-time background image GHz is displayed among the background images GH.

In addition, the above-described prevention image GQ2 and warning image GQ2 are displayed during the period in which the time-saving rush effect is executed. Specifically, the prevention image GQ2 is displayed immediately after the time-saving rush effect is started. Further, when a predetermined time elapses after the time-saving rush performance is started, a warning image GQ2 is displayed instead of the prevention image GQ2. The above warning image GQ2 disappears after a predetermined time has passed.

Note that the period during which the prevention image GQ2 and the warning image GQ2 are displayed is not limited to the above example. For example, the warning image GQ2 may be displayed during (all or part of) the display period of the prevention image GQ2. Also, the prevention image GQ2 and the warning image GQ2 may be displayed immediately after the start of the first time-saving game state, or the prevention image GQ2 and the warning image GQ2 may be displayed immediately before the end of the first time-saving game state.

When the ending period of the jackpot game ends, the first time-saving game state is started, and the performance during time-saving is executed. As shown in FIG. 61 (a-1), when the first time-saving game state is started, the effect symbol GA is displayed. Further, when the first time-saving game state is started, the small symbol Ga, the fourth symbol GC and the number-of-holds image GD are displayed, and the time-saving background image GHy is displayed instead of the background image GHz at the time of entry.

FIG. 61(a-2) is a diagram for explaining each image displayed when the second time-saving gaming state is started. In FIG. 61 (a-2), in addition to each image displayed after shifting to the second time-saving game state, each image displayed in the low probability non-time-saving game state before moving to the second time-saving game state shown. In the specific example of FIG. 61 (a-2), it is assumed that the game moves to the second time-saving gaming state at time ti1.

As shown in FIG. 61 (a-2), in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, the normal production is executed. Specifically, in the game that transitions to the second time-saving game state, a loss variation effect in which a loss symbol is stopped and displayed is executed. It should be noted that, in the game to shift to the second time-saving gaming state, it may be configured to execute a loss variation effect that is different from other low-probability non-time-saving gaming state. In the low-probability non-working-time-saving gaming state, the above-described production pattern GAx is displayed. Further, in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, the above-described normal background image GHx is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 61(a-2), when the second time-saving gaming state is started, the above-described time-saving rush effect is executed. When the above time-saving rush performance is started, the rush background image GHz is displayed in place of the normal background image GHx, and the rush image GT is displayed. In addition, in the time-saving rush production described above, the production pattern GAy is displayed. Furthermore, in the time-saving rush performance, the small symbol Ga, the fourth symbol GC, and the number-of-holds image GD are displayed.

In the third embodiment, regardless of whether or not the first game in the second time-saving game state is executed (whether or not there is a pending number at the time of transition to the second time-saving game state), the time-saving rush effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 61(a-2), the time-saving rush effect is executed for a predetermined time, and then the time-saving middle effect is executed. The effect during time saving is a effect corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbols, and the time saving background image GHy corresponding to the variation mode of the effect symbol GA is displayed. When the second time-saving game state is activated, the prevention image GQ2 and the warning image GQ2 are not displayed in the time-saving rush performance and the time-saving medium performance.

It should be noted that, in the third embodiment, there are cases where the special symbol is variably displayed and the effect symbol GA is variably displayed in the time-saving rush effect when shifting to the second time-saving gaming state. In consideration of the above circumstances, in the time-saving rush effect, the time-saving background image GHy of the time-saving medium effect may be displayed. As understood from the above description, the "background image" displayed when shifting to the "second game state" of the present invention is a concept that includes both the rush background image GHz and the time saving background image GHy.

FIG. 61(a-3) is a diagram for explaining each image displayed when the third time-saving gaming state is started. In FIG. 61 (a-3), in addition to each image displayed after transitioning to the third time-saving gaming state, each image displayed in the low probability non-time-saving gaming state before transitioning to the third time-saving gaming state shown. In the specific example of FIG. 61(a-3), it is assumed that the game moves to the third time-saving gaming state at time tj1.

As shown in FIG. 61 (a-3), in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, the normal medium production is executed. Specifically, in the game that transitions to the third time-saving game state, a time-saving transition effect in which time-saving symbols are stop-displayed is executed. As shown in FIG. 61(a-3), when the third time-saving gaming state is started, the above-described time-saving rush effect is executed. The above time-saving rush production is performed, for example, over a predetermined period of time. When the above time-saving rush performance is started, the rush background image GHz is displayed in place of the normal background image GHx, and the rush image GT is displayed.

In the time-saving rush performance when the third time-saving game state is started, the performance symbol GAy is displayed. In the time-saving rush effect described above, the small symbol Ga, the fourth symbol GC and the number-of-holds image GD are displayed, and the prevention image GQ2 and the warning image GQ2 are not displayed. In the third embodiment, regardless of whether or not the first game in the third time-saving game state is executed (presence or absence of the number of pending games at the time of transition to the third time-saving game state), the time-saving rush effect is executed.

By the way, the time saving rush effect when the first time saving game state is started is executed in the ending period of the big hit game. Therefore, it is less necessary to display the effect symbol GA, the small symbol Ga, the fourth symbol GC and the number-of-holds image GD. On the other hand, the period during which the time saving rush effect is executed when the second time saving game state or the third time saving game state is started is not the ending period of the jackpot game. Therefore, it is highly necessary to display the effect symbol GA, the small symbol Ga, the fourth symbol GC and the pending number image GD.

Temporarily, in the time-saving rush effect when the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state is started, a configuration is assumed in which the prevention image GQ2 is displayed in addition to each of the above-described images (effect image GA, etc.). In the above configuration, the number of images displayed on the image display device 31 tends to be excessive. In addition, the above inconvenience may also occur when adopting a configuration in which the warning image GQ2 is displayed in the time-saving rush effect when the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state is started.

Considering the above circumstances, in the third embodiment, in the time-saving rush effect when the second time-saving game state is started, and the time-saving rush effect when the third time-saving game state is started, the prevention image GQ2 adopted a configuration in which is not displayed. In addition, in the time-saving rush performance when the second time-saving game state is started and the time-saving rush performance when the third time-saving game state is started, the warning image GQ2 is not displayed. According to the above configuration, the above inconvenience is suppressed.

In addition, in the time-saving rush effect when the second time-saving game state is started, or in the time-saving rush effect when the third time-saving game state is started, the small pattern Ga is displayed, and the display of the effect pattern GA is omitted. It may be configured to be According to the above configuration, the effect of suppressing the above-described inconvenience is particularly remarkable.

FIG. 61(b-1) and FIG. 61(b-2) are schematic diagrams of screens displayed in the time-saving rush effect when the first time-saving game state is started. Specifically, FIG. 61(b-1) is a schematic diagram of the screen on which the prevention image GQ2 is displayed. FIG. 61(b-2) is a schematic diagram of the screen on which the warning image GQ2 is displayed. As shown in FIGS. 61(b-1) and 61(b-2), each of the above screens displays a rush image GT. Also, a right hitting image Gsy is displayed on each of the above screens. It should be noted that the right-handed image Gsy is displayed on the image display device 31 during a period after the start of the jackpot game to the start of the first time-saving game state.

FIG. 61(b-3) is a schematic diagram of the screen displayed in the time-saving rush effect when the second time-saving game state is started. As shown in FIG. 61(b-3), a rush image GT is displayed in the time-saving rush effect when the second time-saving gaming state is started. In addition, in the time-saving rush effect described above, the right-handed image Gsy, the effect symbol GAy, the small symbol Ga, the fourth symbol GC, and the number-of-holds image GD are displayed. In the specific example of FIG. 61(b-3), it is assumed that the number of reservations is zero. Temporarily, when the number of reservations is 1 or more, the above-mentioned reservation image GB is displayed in the time saving rush effect when the second time saving game state is started.

In the time saving rush performance when the third time saving game state is started, a rush image GT is displayed in the same way as in the time saving rush performance when the second time saving game state is started. In addition, in the time-saving rush effect described above, the right-handed image Gsy, the effect symbol GAy, the small symbol Ga, the fourth symbol GC, the pending number image GD, and the pending image GB are displayed.

In the third embodiment, various images are displayed on the image display device 31 in addition to the above-described images (the rush image GT and the like) as the time-saving game state is activated. Other images displayed on the image display device 31 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 62 and 63 below.

FIG. 62(a) is a schematic diagram of a screen displayed on the image display device 31 after the second time-saving gaming state is started. As described above, in the second time-saving gaming state, various images including the right-handed image Gsy are displayed. Further, when the second time-saving game state is started, a right-handed start image GR shown in FIG. 62(a) is displayed. The above-described right-handed start image GR is displayed after the above-described entry image GT (see FIG. 61(b-3)) is displayed. However, the display period of the right hitting start image GR and the display period of the entry image GT may all or part overlap.

The right-handed start image GR, like the right-handed image Gsy, is an image for notifying that the game should be played right-handed. However, the right hitting start image GR is displayed larger than the right hitting image Gsy. Further, the right hitting image Gsy is displayed near the upper right end of the screen, while the right hitting start image GR is displayed substantially in the center of the screen.

As shown in FIG. 62(a), the right-handed start image GR is displayed (on the near side) with priority over the effect symbol GAy. According to the above-described right-handed start image GR, it becomes easier for the player to surely recognize that the right-handed game should be started. Also, the right hitting start image GR is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds), and then disappears. Furthermore, a predetermined sound is output along with the display of the right hitting start image GR. For example, a voice saying "Right shot" is output.

In the third embodiment, regardless of whether or not the game is started immediately after shifting to the second time-saving game state, the right-handed start image GR is displayed and the sound "right-handed" is output. That is, even if the number of pending games is 0 at the time of transition to the second time-saving gaming state, the right-handed image GR is displayed and the sound "right-handed" is output. In addition, even if the number of reservations is 0 at the time of transition to the second time-saving game state, the time-saving background image GHy of the time-saving game state is displayed.

In the second time-saving gaming state, predetermined BGM is output. Output of the above BGM is started with the start of the second time-saving game state regardless of whether or not the game is started immediately after shifting to the second time-saving game state. However, when the non-game period continues for a predetermined period of time, the volume of the gaming machine 1 is changed to "0" and the BGM becomes inaudible.

In the specific example of FIG. 62(a), it is assumed that the number of reservations is 0 when the second time-saving gaming state is started. In the above case, immediately after the second time-saving game state is started, the effect symbol GA and the small symbol Ga are stopped and displayed. It should be noted that during the period in which the right hitting start image GR is displayed, the performance symbol GA may be hidden (the small symbol Ga may be continuously displayed).

When the third time-saving gaming state is started, similarly to when the second time-saving gaming state is started, regardless of whether or not there is a number of reservations, the right hitting image Gsy is displayed, and the right hitting start image GR is displayed, A sound instructing that the game should be played with the right hand is output, the BGM of the third time-saving game state is started to be output, and the time-saving background image GHy is displayed. In addition, during the period in which the right hitting start image GR in the third time-saving game state is displayed, the effect symbol GA and the small symbol Ga are displayed. However, immediately after the start of the second time-saving gaming state, the production pattern GA corresponding to the losing pattern and the small pattern Ga are displayed, while immediately after the start of the third time-saving gaming state, the production pattern GA corresponding to the time-saving design. and a small pattern Ga are displayed.

FIG. 62(b) is a schematic diagram of a screen displayed on the image display device 31 immediately after the second time-saving game state is terminated and the state is shifted to the low-probability non-time-saving game state. As shown in FIG. 62(b), the left-handed image Gsx is displayed immediately after the second time-saving game state ends. The left-handed image Gsx described above is an image instructing the player to play left-handed, and is displayed in place of the right-handed image Gsy. Also, the left-handed image Gsx is displayed at the same position as the right-handed image Gsy.

As shown in FIG. 62(b), immediately after the second time-saving game state ends, a left-handed start image GL is displayed. The left-handed start image GL, like the left-handed image Gsx, is an image for notifying that the game should be played left-handed. However, the left-handed start image GL is displayed larger than the left-handed image Gsx. The left-handed image Gsx is displayed near the upper right corner of the screen, while the left-handed start image GL is displayed substantially in the center of the screen.

As shown in FIG. 62(b), the left-handed start image GL is displayed (on the near side) with priority over the effect symbol GAy. According to the left-handed start image GL described above, it becomes easier for the player to surely recognize that the left-handed game should be started. In addition, the left-handed start image GL is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) after the second time-saving game state ends, and then disappears. Furthermore, a predetermined sound is output along with the display of the left-handed start image GL. For example, a voice saying "Please switch back to left-handed" is output.

In the third embodiment, regardless of whether or not the game is started immediately after the second time-saving gaming state ends, the left-handed start image GL is displayed, and the voice "Please return to left-handed" is heard. output. That is, even if the number of pending games is 0 when the second time-saving game state ends, the left-handed image GL is displayed and the voice saying "please return to left-handed" is output. Also, even if the number of pending games is 0 when the second time-saving game state ends, the normal background image GHx in the non-time-saving game state is displayed.

In the specific example of FIG. 62(a), it is assumed that the number of reservations is 0 when the second time-saving gaming state is started. In the above case, immediately after the second time-saving game state is started, the effect symbol GA and the small symbol Ga are stopped and displayed.

At the end of the third time-saving game state, similarly to the end of the second time-saving game state, the left-handed start image GL is displayed irrespective of the presence or absence of the number of reserves, and instructs the player to play left-handed. Sound is output and the normal background image GHx is displayed.

FIG. 63(a) is a diagram for explaining the result image GP. The above-described result image GP is an image that displays information about profits obtained during a period when a period advantageous to the player ends. For example, the number of jackpot games in the period from winning the first jackpot game to the transition to the low-probability non-time-saving game state (advantageous period described above), and the total number of prize balls paid out during the period It is displayed on the result image GP.

In the specific example of FIG. 63(a), it is assumed that the jackpot game is won three times during the advantageous period and 4515 prize balls are paid out. It should be noted that the number of prize balls displayed by the result image GP of the third embodiment does not include the prize balls paid out as the game balls enter the starting openings (13, 14) and the general winning opening 18. However, the number of prize balls displayed in the result image GP may include the prize balls that are paid out as the game balls enter the general prize winning opening 18 .

FIG. 63(b) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the period during which the result image GP is displayed. In the third embodiment, a result image GP is displayed when the first time-saving gaming state ends.

In the specific example of FIG. 63(b), it is assumed that the final game of the first time-saving gaming state is started at time tk1, and the game ends at time tk3. In the above cases, the first time-saving gaming state ends at time tk3, and shifts to the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state. In the specific example of FIG. 63(b), it is assumed that the jackpot lottery for the final game in the first time-saving gaming state is a loss. FIG. 63(b) shows time point tk2 at which the effect symbol GAy corresponding to the losing symbol is temporarily stopped in the final game of the first time-saving game state.

In the above specific example of FIG. 63(b), the result image GP is displayed immediately after time tk2. As understood from FIG. 63(a) described above, during the period in which the result image GP is displayed, the small symbol Ga is displayed and the performance symbol GA is not displayed. Further, the above result image GP is displayed until the final game in the first time-saving game state is completed.

It is assumed that the result image GP is displayed when the second time-saving gaming state ends. As described above, the second time-saving game state operates without a big hit game. In addition, in the time-saving game state, the game balls do not win in the winning openings (the first big winning opening 16, the second big winning opening 17) other than the starting openings (13, 14) and the general winning opening 18 in principle. Therefore, in the above-described comparison, when the jackpot game is not won in the second time-saving game state, the number of jackpot games displayed in the result image GP is "0", and the number of paid-out prize balls is "0". ”. When the above result image GP is displayed, there may be a problem that some players lose their motivation to play.

In consideration of the above circumstances, in the third embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the result image GP is not displayed when the second time-saving gaming state ends. FIG.63(c) is a figure for demonstrating the image displayed before and after the 2nd time saving game state is complete|finished. In FIG. 63(c), it is assumed that the second time-saving gaming state ends at time tl and shifts to the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state. As shown in FIG. 63(c), before and after the second time-saving gaming state ends, the result image GP is not displayed.

Further, the above-described inconvenience also occurs in the comparison in which the result image GP is displayed when the third time-saving gaming state ends. In consideration of the above circumstances, in the third embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the result image GP is not displayed when the third time-saving gaming state ends. FIG.63(d) is a figure for demonstrating the image displayed before and after the 3rd time saving game state is complete|finished. In FIG. 63(c), it is assumed that the third time-saving gaming state ends at time tm and shifts to the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state. As shown in FIG. 63(d), the result image GP is not displayed before and after the third time-saving gaming state ends. In addition, when the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state are terminated, for example, an image displaying a message "end of time-saving" may be displayed.

FIGS. 64(a) to 64(c) are diagrams for explaining the counting period of the base value in the third embodiment. As described above, during the counting period, the out counter for calculating the base value and the prize ball counter for calculating the base value are added. That is, the base value is updated during the counting period.

FIG. 64(a) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the counting period before and after the second time-saving gaming state is started. In the specific example of FIG. 64(a), it is assumed that the 800th game (variation display of special symbols) in the low-probability non-time-saving game state is started at time tn1. Further, in the specific example of FIG. 64(a), it is assumed that the losing pattern is stop-displayed in the 800th game in the low-probability non-time-saving game state. Specifically, it is assumed that the lost symbols are stopped and displayed at time tn2, and the cumulative number m reaches the numerical value "800". In the above case, the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state before time tn2 becomes the counting period. In addition, the second time-saving gaming state after time tn2 becomes a non-counting period.

In the specific example of FIG. 64(a), it is assumed that the jackpot game is not won in the second time-saving game state. Further, in the specific example of FIG. 64(a), it is assumed that the final game of the second time-saving game state is started at time tn3, and the losing symbols are stopped and displayed in the game. Specifically, at time tn4, it is assumed that the lost symbols are stopped and displayed, and the remaining number of times M2 is subtracted to the numerical value "0". In the above case, after the time tn4 will be in the low probability non-time-saving gaming state. Also, the counting period is restarted from time tn4.

FIG.64(b) is a figure for demonstrating the specific example of the counting period before and after the 3rd time saving game state is started. In the specific example of FIG. 64(b), it is assumed that the game in which the time-saving design is stop-displayed in the low-probability non-time-saving game state is started at time to1. Further, in the specific example of FIG. 64(b), it is assumed that the time saving pattern is stopped and displayed at time to2. In the above case, the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state before time to2 becomes the counting period. In addition, the third time-saving gaming state after time to2 becomes a non-counting period.

In the specific example of FIG. 64(b), it is assumed that the jackpot game is not won in the third time-saving game state. Further, in the specific example of FIG. 64(b), it is assumed that the final game of the third time-saving game state is started at time to3, and the losing pattern is stopped and displayed in the game. Specifically, it is assumed that, at time to4, the lost symbols are stopped and displayed, and the remaining number of times M3 is subtracted to the numerical value "0".

In the specific example of FIG. 64(b), it is assumed that the cumulative number m is not the numerical value "800" in the final game in the third time-saving game state. In the above case, after the time point to4 will be in the low probability non-time-saving gaming state. Also, the counting period restarts from time to4. In the third embodiment, if the time saving pattern is stop-displayed in the final game in the third time-saving game state, the measurement period is restarted in the same manner as when the losing pattern is stop-displayed. In addition, when the small winning pattern is stopped and displayed in the final game of the third time-saving game state, the measurement period is restarted after the small winning game is finished.

FIG.64(c) is a figure for demonstrating the other specific example of the counting period before and after the 3rd time saving game state is started. In the specific example of FIG. 64(c), it is assumed that the game in which the time saving pattern is stop-displayed in the low probability non-time saving game state is started at time tp1. Moreover, in the specific example of FIG.64(c), it is assumed that the time saving design is stop-displayed at time tp2. In the above case, the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state before time tp2 becomes the counting period. In addition, the third time-saving gaming state after time tp2 becomes a non-counting period (similar to FIG. 64(b) described above).

In the specific example of FIG. 64(c), it is assumed that the jackpot game is not won in the third time-saving game state. Further, in the specific example of FIG. 64(c), it is assumed that the final game in the third time-saving game state is started at time tp3, and the losing symbols are stopped and displayed in the game. Specifically, at time tp4, it is assumed that the lost symbols are stopped and displayed, and the remaining number of times M3 is subtracted to the numerical value "0". Further, in the specific example of FIG. 64(c), it is assumed that the cumulative number of times m is the numerical value "800" in the final game in the third time-saving game state. In the above case, after the time tp4 is the second time-saving gaming state. That is, the non-counting period continues even after time tp4. In addition, when the cumulative number m is added to the numerical value "800" in the final game of the third time-saving game state, the non-counting period continues even if the time-saving pattern or the small winning pattern is stopped and displayed in the game. Also, as described above, the first time-saving gaming state is a non-counting period. Similar to the case where the cumulative number m is added to the numerical value "800" in the final game in the third time-saving gaming state, if the cumulative number m is added to the numerical value "800" in the final game in the first time-saving gaming state, then , the non-counting period continues.

Each configuration of the above-described first and second embodiments can also be appropriately adopted in the third embodiment. For example, the timing of updating the number-of-games image GE (at the start of the game) in the third embodiment may be at the end of the game as in the first embodiment. Further, in the third embodiment, the configuration may be such that the number-of-games image GN is displayed together with the number-of-games image GE.

In the third embodiment, the timing for displaying the remaining number of times image GN can be set as appropriate. For example, a configuration is conceivable in which the remaining number of times image GN is displayed at the same timing as in the first embodiment (see FIGS. 15A to 15D). It should be noted that, in the third embodiment, there is a possibility of shifting to the third time-saving gaming state before the second time-saving gaming state is started. In the third time-saving game state, the remaining number of times image GN may be displayed or may not be displayed.

In the third embodiment, as in the first embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which it is suggested that the remaining number of times N is deferred. Specifically, under the same conditions as in the first embodiment, the remaining number of times image GN and the stationary notification image GI may be displayed in the third embodiment. Further, in the third embodiment, a table scenario S may be set as in the first embodiment. Also, in the third embodiment, a normal mode and an immediately preceding mode may be provided. In the third embodiment, when the second time-saving gaming state is started, each screen (M1 to M7) may be displayed in the same manner as in the first embodiment.

In the third embodiment, the game variation pattern determination table T in which the remaining number of times N is reduced to "0" may be different or common between the scenario setting period and the scenario non-setting period. Further, in the third embodiment, the variation pattern determination table T for the first game in the second time-saving gaming state may be different or common between the scenario setting period and the scenario non-setting period. In the configuration where the variation pattern determination table T for the first game in the second time-saving game state differs between the scenario setting period and the scenario non-setting period, each image (shielding image GF, etc.) displayed in the game is displayed during the scenario setting period. A different configuration may be used for the scenario unset period. Similarly, in the third embodiment, the variation pattern determination table T for the last game in the second time-saving gaming state may be different or common between the scenario setting period and the scenario non-setting period. In a configuration in which the variation pattern determination table T for the last game in the second time-saving game state differs between the scenario setting period and the scenario non-setting period, each image displayed in the game is displayed during the scenario setting period and the scenario non-setting period. Different configurations are possible. In the third embodiment, the variation pattern determination table T for the first game after the end of the second time-saving gaming state may be different or common between the scenario setting period and the scenario non-setting period.

In the third embodiment, the variation pattern determination table T may be different or common between the first time-saving gaming state and the second time-saving gaming state. Also, in the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state, in the configuration where the variation pattern determination table T is different, the average change time of the special figure is preferably shorter in the second time-saving gaming state than in the first time-saving gaming state. be. In addition, it is preferable to have a configuration in which the immediate hit effect is more likely to be executed in the second time-saving game state than in the first time-saving game state.

In the third embodiment, the area where the remaining number of times M is displayed may be different or common between the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state. Further, when the power is turned off/on during the activated period of the third embodiment, it may be configured to notify that it is the activated period, as in the first embodiment. Further, in the third embodiment, in the same configuration as the first embodiment, the modification of FIG. 25 (b-1), the modification shown in FIG. 25 (b-2), the second time-saving gaming state is installed It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a message to the effect that there is

<Fourth Embodiment>
FIGS. 65(a) and 65(b) are diagrams for explaining the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, instead of the above-described start winning designation command, the first information J1 related to the execution of the big hit game specified by the prior determination of the determination information, the second game state specified by the prior determination of the determination information An information command indicating the second information J2 relating to the transition is transmitted from the main control board 110 (main CPU 111) to the effect control board 120 (sub CPU 121). The above information command is generated and transmitted by the main CPU 111 when the starting prize is won during the period when the number of reservations is less than the upper limit.

FIG. 65(a) is a diagram for explaining specific examples of the first information J1 and the second information J2. For example, when a special symbol determination random number determined as a "big hit" is obtained at the time of starting winning, an information command indicating the first information J1 is transmitted to the sub CPU 121 . When the sub CPU 121 receives the first information J1 described above, the sub CPU 121 can grasp that the jackpot game will be executed thereafter.

Further, when a special symbol determination random number determined as “losing” is obtained at the time of starting winning, an information command indicating the second information J2 is transmitted to the sub CPU 121 . The second information J2 described above indicates the cumulative number of times m in the game executed by the start winning. When the sub CPU 121 receives the above second information J2, the result of the game executed by the start winning that triggered the generation of the second information J2 is "losing", and Accumulated count m can be grasped. The sub CPU 121 of the second embodiment determines the look-ahead effect according to the information (first information J1, second information J2) indicated by the information command. The above look-ahead effects include a specific effect X1 and a specific effect X2, which will be described later.

FIG. 65(b) is a diagram for explaining the specific effect X1 and the specific effect X2. The specific effect X1 is determined by lottery when the sub CPU 121 receives an information command indicating the first information J1. When the specific effect X1 is determined, the mode (color) of the pending image GB corresponding to the game (game to win the jackpot) executed by the start winning that is the trigger for generating the information command indicating the first information J1 It changes before the game starts (similar to the above-described pending change effect). According to the above configuration, the fact that the player will win the big win is informed in advance by the specific effect X1 before the game in which the player wins the big win.

The specific effect X2 is determined by lottery when the sub CPU 121 receives an information command indicating the second information J2. Specifically, when the sub CPU 121 receives an information command indicating the second information J2, the accumulated count m specified from the second information J2 is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value (for example, numerical value “790”). Determine whether or not If the cumulative number m specified from the second information J2 is equal to or greater than the threshold, the sub CPU 121 determines the specified effect X2 by lottery. On the other hand, when the cumulative number m specified from the second information J2 is less than the threshold, the sub CPU 121 does not determine the specified effect X2.

When the specific effect X2 is determined, the state of the pending image GB corresponding to the game executed by the start winning, which is the trigger for generating the information command indicating the second information J2, changes before the start of the game (the above-mentioned similar to pending change rendition). According to the specific effect X2 described above, the player is notified that the number of games played until the second time-saving game state is relatively small. It should be noted that the mode of the pending image GB in which the specific effect X1 is executed and the mode of the pending image GB in which the specific effect X2 is executed may be different or common.

In the second embodiment, similarly to the above-described first embodiment, when shifting to the second time-saving gaming state, a time-saving rush effect is executed to notify that effect. In the time-saving rush effect of the second embodiment, an image common to each image displayed in the time-saving rush effect of the first embodiment is displayed. Specifically, in the time-saving rush effect, in addition to the rush image GT, the effect symbol GA, the small symbol Ga, and the fourth symbol GC are displayed. In addition, in the time-saving rush production in the second embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which a part of the production pattern GA, the small pattern Ga, and the fourth pattern GC is displayed. Also in the second embodiment described above, the same effect as in the first embodiment can be obtained.

<Modification>
Each of the above forms may be variously modified. Specific modification modes are exemplified below. Two or more aspects arbitrarily selected from the following examples can be combined as appropriate.

(1) In each of the above-described embodiments, the timing of updating the figures of the number-of-games image GE and the number-of-games image GN remaining can be changed as appropriate. For example, the numbers in the number-of-games image GE and the number-of-games-to-remain image GN may be updated at the start of the game. Further, the number of the game number image GE may be updated at the start of the game, and the number of the remaining number image GN may be updated at the end of the game. Similarly, the number in the number-of-games image GE may be updated at the end of the game, and the number in the remaining-number-of-times image GN may be updated at the start of the game.

(2) In each of the above-described forms, in the customer waiting state (see FIG. 19 (a)) before the first game of the second time-saving gaming state is started, in response to the establishment of a specific instruction condition, the right A configuration in which a hit is instructed may be adopted. For example, on condition that the touch sensor 11a detects that the player has touched the operating handle 11, the right-handed shot image GS1 may be displayed. The right-handed image GS1 may be displayed on condition that the touch sensor 11a does not detect that the player has touched the operating handle 11. FIG.

(3) In each form described above, the configuration for notifying that it is the activated period of the second time-saving gaming state can be appropriately changed. For example, instead of displaying the number-of-games image GE shown in FIG. 23(c) in the activated period, the actual number of games from the big win game may be displayed in the activated period. That is, in the activated period, the number of times played image GE may be displayed by increasing from "1800". In the above configuration, when the number of times played image GE is equal to or greater than "1800", it is substantially notified that the activated period has expired. Even if the above configuration is adopted, it is preferable that the number-of-games image GE is hidden in the second time-saving gaming state.

(4) In each of the above-described modes, the timing for displaying the stationary notification image GI is not limited to the beginning of the game. Specifically, the stationary notification image GI may be displayed in the middle stage of the game or in the final stage of the game. For example, the stationary notification image GI may be displayed when the ready-to-win effect is started, or the stationary notification image GI may be displayed during the determination period. Further, it may be configured such that at which point in the game the stationary notification image GI is displayed is determined by a lottery. Further, the stationary notification image GI may be continuously displayed over a plurality of times (for example, 10 times) of games.

(5) In each of the above-described modes, the stationary notification image GI is always displayed when the predetermined display condition (N≦200) is satisfied in the games (51st and 101st games) in which the stationary notification image GI can be displayed. The image GI was displayed. In the above configuration, in a game in which the stationary notification image GI can be displayed, the stationary notification image GI is displayed on condition that a predetermined display condition is established and a predetermined lottery is won. may be

Further, in the period in which the remaining number of times N is deferred, the stationary notification image GI may be displayed regardless of the current value of the remaining number of times N, provided that the lottery is won. In the above configuration, when the stationary notification image GI is displayed (when stationary is notified), the remaining number of times N may be displayed to directly notify the number of games up to the second time-saving gaming state. A configuration may be adopted in which the number of games up to the second time-saving gaming state is suggested without directly displaying the number of times N. Further, the configuration may be such that the presence or absence of the remaining number N of deferments is suggested.

For example, assume a configuration including a predetermined lamp (hereinafter “specific lamp”). The specific lamps described above are normally lit in a mode corresponding to the current presentation. On the other hand, in a predetermined game (for example, the first game after the power is turned on), the first special mode is determined according to whether or not the remaining number of times N is set and the current value of the remaining number of times N. Alternatively, it may be lit in the second special mode. Specifically, the specific lamp is more likely to light in the first special mode or the second special mode when the remaining number of times N is deferred than when the remaining number of times N is not deferred. Further, when the remaining number of times N is deferred and is equal to or less than a predetermined numerical value (for example, the numerical value "200"), compared to the case where the remaining number of times N is deferred and is greater than the predetermined numerical value, the second 2 A specific lamp is likely to light in a special mode. According to the above configuration, it is more interesting to notify whether or not the remaining number of times N is deferred.

(6) In each of the above-described modes, a plurality of types (for example, 6 types) of setting values with different payout rates may be provided. Specifically, the administrator of the gaming machine 1 can change the setting values of the gaming machine 1 by performing a predetermined setting change operation. A big win determination table is provided for each set value, and when the set value is changed, the winning probability of the big win changes.

In the above modified example, a configuration may be adopted in which an effect suggesting a set value (hereinafter referred to as a "suggestive effect") can be executed. However, in a configuration that can execute an effect in which one type of set value is specified, there is a possibility that the gambling spirit of the player will be remarkably aroused. In consideration of the above circumstances, in the suggestive effect, it is reported that there is a high possibility that the setting value is one of a plurality of types of some of all the setting values.

For example, assume a configuration in which six types of set values from set value "1" to set value "6" are provided. In the above configuration, there is a suggestive effect suggesting that the set values of odd numbers (1, 3, 5) are more likely than the set values of even numbers (2, 4, 6), and the set values of even numbers are more likely than the set values of even numbers (2, 4, 6). It is conceivable to provide a suggestive effect suggesting that the set value of is likely to be set. In addition, a suggestion effect may be provided to suggest that the set values "4 to 6" (high setting) are more likely than the set values "1 to 3" (low setting). Also, a suggestive effect may be provided in which the set value "6" is strong (but not fixed). When the above modified example is adopted, the number of games up to the second time-saving game state is definitely notified by the remaining number of times image GN, but the set value is not definitely notified by the suggestive effect. However, in this modified example, a suggestive effect in which one set value is determined may be executed.

(7) In each form described above, the time-saving game state to be shifted after the big win game may be changed according to the game state in which the big win is won in addition to the big win pattern. For example, assume a configuration in which a time-saving game state A and a time-saving game state B that is more advantageous than the time-saving game state A (the number of games played is large) are provided. In addition, in the above configuration, when winning a jackpot game in the non-time-saving game state, the probability is about 99% to shift to the time-saving game state A, and the probability is about 1% to shift to the time-saving game state B. In addition, when winning a jackpot game in the time-saving game state A, it shifts to the time-saving game state B with a probability of about 50%, and shifts to the time-saving game state B with a probability of about 50%. Furthermore, when winning the jackpot game in the time-saving game state B, it shifts to the time-saving game state B with a probability of about 100%.

Moreover, in the above modifications, the most advantageous time-saving gaming state may be adopted as the second time-saving gaming state. For example, in the above-described specific example, a configuration in which the time saving game state B is adopted as the second time saving game state is conceivable. However, in the above configuration, if the jackpot is won just before the second time-saving gaming state starts, some players may feel dissatisfied. In consideration of the above circumstances, it is preferable to adopt a configuration that suppresses the above inconveniences. A specific example of the configuration will be described below.

In each form described above, a normal mode and an immediately preceding mode are provided as production modes for the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state. In the immediately preceding mode of the modified example, an effect for congratulating the winning of the jackpot game that shifts to the time-saving game state B is executed, while the effect that congratulates the winning of the jackpot game that shifts to the time-saving game state A is not executed. . In addition, in the modified example, the effect symbol GA is different between the normal mode and the previous mode, and the background image GH is also different.

For example, the remaining number of times image GN is displayed in the normal mode, and the special remaining number of times image GNx is displayed instead of the remaining number of times image GN in the previous mode. Special remaining number of times image GNx, for example, displays a message "If you endure only the remaining X, the time saving B rush!" Also, in the previous mode, an image in which a friend character and an enemy character face each other is displayed, and an effect in which each character fights is executed in each game. In the immediately preceding mode of the modification, in a game in which a jackpot that shifts to the time-saving game state B is won, an effect in which the ally character wins is executed, and a message "Congratulations!" is displayed. On the other hand, in a game in which a jackpot that shifts to the time-saving game state A is won, an effect is executed in which the teammate character is defeated, and a message of "sorry" is displayed.

The above modified examples also provide the same effects as the above-described embodiments. However, even in this modified example, the variation pattern determination table is not switched according to the number of games during the scenario unset period, as in the above-described embodiments. If each performance in the immediately preceding mode (such as a performance in which characters fight, etc.) is executed without switching the variation pattern determination table from the normal mode, there may be a problem that an appropriate time for executing the performance cannot be secured. Therefore, even in the modified example, it is preferable that the previous mode is not provided during the scenario unset period.

(8) In the above-described first embodiment, the variation pattern determination table that can be referred to in the non-time-saving game state game that transitions to the second time-saving game state (hereinafter simply “transition game”) is set during the scenario setting period (Tn2 or Tnc) and the scenario unset period (Tn1) were made different. Also, the variation pattern determination table that can be referred to in the first game in the second time-saving gaming state is made different between the scenario setting period (Ts or Tax) and the scenario non-setting period (Tbx). That is, in the first embodiment, at the start of the second time-saving gaming state (including the transition game, the first game of the second time-saving gaming state), the variation pattern determination table that can be referred to is the scenario setting period and the scenario unset. A different configuration was adopted depending on the period.

However, at the start of the second time-saving gaming state, a common variation pattern determination table may be referred to during the scenario setting period and the scenario non-setting period. For example, in a configuration in which the variation pattern determination table Tn1 is referenced in the transition game during the scenario unset period, the variation pattern determination table Tn1 may be referenced in the transition game during the scenario set period. In the above configuration, it is sufficient that the variation pattern determination table T that can be referred to in the transition game during the scenario setting period includes the variation pattern determination table Tn1, and a configuration other than the variation pattern determination table Tn1 can be referred to. According to the above configuration, at the start of the second time-saving gaming state, compared to the configuration in which the variation pattern determination table that can be referred to differs between the scenario setting period and the scenario non-setting period, the number of variation pattern determination tables is easy to reduce.

In addition, the scenario setting period and the scenario non-setting period may have a configuration in which the variation pattern determination table that can be referred to at the start of the second time-saving gaming state is completely common. According to the above configuration, the effect of reducing the number of variation pattern determination tables is particularly remarkable.

(9) In the first embodiment described above, the variation pattern determination table that can be referred to in the predetermined number of games in the second time-saving gaming state is variably configured between the scenario setting period and the scenario non-setting period. For example, between the scenario setting period (Ts, Tax) and the scenario non-setting period (Tbx), the variation pattern determination table that can be referred to in the first game in the second time-saving gaming state is variable.

However, the scenario setting period and the scenario non-setting period may have a common configuration of the variation pattern determination table that can be referred to in the game of the predetermined number of times in the second time saving game state. For example, the variation pattern determination table Tbx that can be referred to in the first game in the second time-saving gaming state may be configured to be common between the scenario setting period and the scenario non-setting period. In addition, in the scenario setting period and the scenario unset period, the variation pattern determination table that can be referred to in the 900th (remaining 100 times) game of the second time saving game state may be common, or the end of the second time saving game state The variation pattern determination table that can be referred to in the game may be common.

(10) In each of the above-described forms, the remaining number of times M of the time-saving gaming state may be emphasized. For example, the number of the remaining time reduction image GJ is displayed in white in a game in which the remaining number M is the numerical value "5" or more, and the number of the remaining time reduction image GJ is displayed in red in the game in which the remaining number M is smaller than the numerical value "5". can be considered. In addition, the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state may have a common remaining number of times M at which emphasis of the remaining number of times M is started, or may be different. For example, in the first time-saving game state (100 times), the number of the remaining time-saving image GJ is displayed in white in games where the remaining number of times M is "5" or more, and the remaining number of times M is less than the number "5". The number of the time saving image GJ is displayed in red. On the other hand, in the second time saving game state (1000 times), the number of the remaining time reduction image GJ is displayed in white in the game where the remaining number M is the numerical value "10" or more, and the remaining time M is displayed in white in the game where the remaining number M is smaller than the numerical value "10". It is good also as a structure which displays the number of the time saving image GJ in red.

(11) In each of the above-described forms, in addition to the opportunity of winning a big win in the big-hit lottery, it may be configured such that a big-hit game can be executed with the opportunity of a game ball passing through a specific area. In addition, in the above configuration, it may be a configuration in which a game ball can win a prize in a specific area in a small winning game (so-called 1 type 2 type game machine may be used). That is, when a small winning game is won and a game ball enters a specific area in a small winning game, a big winning game may be executed. In the above modified example, the remaining number of times N is not initialized when the small hit is won, but the remaining number of times N is initialized when the game ball enters the specific area.

In addition, in the modification, the high probability game state is not provided, and the probability of winning a big hit when the game ball wins in the first start port 13 and when the game ball wins in the second start port 14 are common. Also, the probability of winning a small win when a game ball enters the second start port 14 is higher than the probability of winning a big win, and when the game ball enters the first start port 13, the small win is not won. Furthermore, in the time-saving game state, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the second starting port 14.例文帳に追加In the above configuration, the jackpot game is more likely to be executed in the time-saving game state than in the non-time-saving game state.

In the gaming machine of the modification, when the number of reservations of the second special figure (hereinafter referred to as "remaining reservation") is 1 or more when the time saving game state ends, in the game after the time saving game state ends There is also a high probability that a small hit will be won. Specifically, in the non-time-saving game state immediately after the time-saving game state ends, it is possible to execute a big hit game with a high probability over four games at maximum.

In the above configuration, the configuration may be such that the above-described first end effect (see FIG. 45(a)) is performed during the period in which the game is performed with the remaining pending. In addition, the first end effect is executed in the period in which the game is executed with the remaining hold immediately after the first time saving game state ends, and the game is executed in the remaining hold immediately after the second time saving game state ends. A configuration in which the ending effect is not executed may be adopted. That is, the term "at the end of the second game state (at the end)" of the present invention includes a period during which the game is executed with the remaining hold. In addition, depending on the number of games played in the second time-saving game state, there is a case where the probability that the jackpot game is not won in the second time-saving game state is about 0% (the probability of winning is about 100%). In the above case, even if the end effect is not executed in the second time-saving game state, it is rare that the final game in the second time-saving game state is executed. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to feel dissatisfied due to the end effect not being executed in the final game in the second time-saving game state.

In addition, in one type and two types of gaming machines, the transition determination processing (S224 in FIG. 32, S242 in FIG. 35(a)) for updating the remaining number of times N is similar to the above-described first embodiment. A configuration executed after (S187 in FIG. 32) is preferable. According to the above configuration, when the game ball does not enter the specific area in the small hit game process, while updating the remaining number of times N in the transition determination process, when the game ball enters the specific area, the big hit game is executed, the migration determination process can be omitted. Moreover, in one type and two types of gaming machines, it may be configured to shift from the first time-saving game state to the second time-saving game state via a gap game. In the above configuration, it is preferable that the number of times the gap game is played is four. Also, in the gap game described above, it is preferable to have a configuration in which an effect different from that in the normal mode and the immediately preceding mode is executed.

(12) In each of the above-described forms, when shifting from the first time-saving game state to the second time-saving game state via a gap game, the above-described left-handed image GL may not be displayed. Specifically, when the game is played in a normal procedure, the production mode is the time saving mode B when shifting from the first time saving game state to the second time saving game state via the gap game. In the above case, it is preferable that the left-handed image GL is not displayed when shifting to the gap game (non-time-saving game state).

(13) In each form described above, the right-handed lamp 28 is extinguished in the gap game. Therefore, even if the production mode before and after the gap game does not change to the time saving mode B, it is preferable that the right-handed image GS is not displayed in the gap game.

(14) In each of the above-described forms, a process for determining whether the condition for starting the second time-saving gaming state is satisfied (hereinafter “first determination processing”), and other conditions for the transition of the gaming state (for example, high The process of determining whether or not the probability game state start condition) has been established (hereinafter referred to as "second determination process") may be included in a common module or may be included in separate modules.

By the way, conventionally, in the jackpot game, a predetermined number of times (for example, A game machine (so-called "V-ST machine") that can shift to a high probability (time saving) game state of "120 times") is known. The present invention may be applied to the game machines described above. In the above gaming machine, in each game, the update process of the remaining number of times N until the second time-saving game state and the process of determining the remaining number of times N after the update (hereinafter "first determination process"), and the high probability game state is A process of updating the remaining number of times until the end and a process of determining the remaining number of times after updating (hereinafter referred to as "second determination process") are executed. In the above configuration, the configuration in which the second determination process is executed after the first determination process is preferable. Assume a configuration in which the first determination process is performed after the second determination process. In the above configuration, in the high-probability game state, there is a problem that the remaining number of times N until the second time-saving game state is updated.

(15) When adopting the present invention in the above-mentioned V-ST machine, even if V winning, which is the condition for shifting to the high probability game state, could not be made in the big hit game, then V winning It is preferable to shift to the time-saving game state with the same number of games as in the case. For example, if V wins in a big hit game, in a configuration that shifts to a high probability time saving game state 120 times, even if V does not win in the big hit game, a configuration that shifts to a low probability time saving game state 120 times is conceivable. .

In addition, in the modification, it is preferable that the effect mode after the big hit game is common regardless of the presence or absence of V winning in the big win game. In the above configuration, the effect mode after the big hit game is common in the case of shifting to the high-probability time-saving gaming state and the case of shifting to the low-probability time-saving gaming state. It should be noted that, in the above modifications, each screen displayed is common in the case of power failure occurring in the high probability time saving game state and recovery and the case of power failure occurring in the low probability time saving game state and recovering A configuration in which the production mode after returning is common is preferable. That is, before and after the power is turned off, it is preferable to have a configuration in which the presence or absence of the V winning in the immediately preceding jackpot game cannot be detected from the screen. In addition, also in the said modification, a player may select the production|presentation mode in a time-saving game state like 1st Embodiment. Further, when the power is cut off in the jackpot game, and when the power is cut off in the time saving game state, the time saving game state after restoration may be controlled to the common production mode.

(16) In each of the above embodiments, the demo screen is displayed when the customer waiting state continues for a predetermined period of time.

(17) In each of the above-described forms, at the start of the second time-saving game state, the shield image GF, the rush image GT, and the right-handed image GS3 (image at start) are displayed. The timing at which the start image is displayed may be changed as appropriate.

FIG. 66(a) is a diagram for explaining the display timing of the image at the start in the modified example. FIG. 66(a) shows the period during which each starting image is displayed. In addition, FIG. 66(a) shows the transition game to shift to the second time saving game state, the confirmation period in the transition game, and the period in which the start image is displayed in the first game of the second time saving game state. be FIG. 66(a) shows the start time tx of the second time-saving gaming state. In the modification, similarly to the above-described first embodiment, the second time-saving game state is started when the fixed period of the transition game has ended.

As shown in FIG. 66(a), the display of the shielding image GF is started immediately after the transition game is started. In addition, the shielding image GF is continuously displayed until the fixed period starts, and is hidden at the start of the fixed period. As shown in FIG. 66(a), a rushing image GT is displayed during the determination period of the transition game. After that, when the determination period ends and the first game in the second time-saving game state is started, the rush image GT is hidden and a right-handed shot image GS3 (large right-handed shot image GS) is displayed. The above right shot image GS3 is displayed for a predetermined period of time, and then disappears.

By the way, in the first embodiment described above, the fixed period in each game is about 0.5 seconds. Temporarily, in the configuration in which the determination period of the transition game is about 0.5 seconds in the modified example, there is an inconvenience that the time during which the rush image GT is displayed is too short. Considering the above circumstances, in the modification, a configuration is adopted in which the fixed period is extended in the transition game from the game immediately before the transition game. Specifically, the fixed period of the transition game is extended to about 5 seconds. According to the above configuration, the above inconvenience is suppressed.

However, in the above-described first embodiment, in order to suppress the inconvenience of impairing the fairness of the game, the time of one game (fluctuation period + fixed period) does not change according to the number of games during the scenario unset period. It was adopted. In consideration of the above circumstances, it is preferable that the fixed period is extended in the transition game during the scenario set period, while the fixed period does not change in the transition game during the scenario unset period.

FIGS. 66(b-1) and 66(b-2) are diagrams for explaining the display period of the image at the start in another modification. In the specific examples of FIGS. 66(b-1) and 66(b-2), it is assumed that the transition game ends at time tx and shifts to the second time-saving game state. Specifically, FIG. 66(b-1) assumes a case where the number of reservations is 1 or more at time tx. On the other hand, FIG. 66(b-2) assumes that the pending number is 0 at time tx. Details will be described below, but in the modification, the period during which the start image is displayed changes depending on whether or not there is a pending number at the start time tx of the second time-saving gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 66 (b-1), when the number of pending at time tx is 1 or more, the first game in the second time-saving gaming state is started immediately after time tx. In the above case, the right-handed shot image GS3 is displayed for a predetermined time immediately after the second time-saving game state is started. After that, a shielding image GF is displayed for a predetermined time, and then a rushing image GT is displayed. The rush image GT described above is displayed for a predetermined period of time.

As shown in FIG. 66(b-2), when the number of reservations is 0 at time tx, the customer waiting state is started immediately after the second time-saving game state is started. In the above case, when the customer waiting state is started, the right shot image GS3 is displayed. In the modification, the hitting right image GS3 is displayed until the customer waiting state ends, and when the first game in the second time-saving game state starts, the hitting right image GS3 disappears. After that, the shielding image GF is displayed for a predetermined time, and the rushing image GT is displayed. The rush image GT is displayed for a predetermined period of time. As can be understood from the above description, in the modified example, the timing at which the right hitting image GS3 is displayed changes depending on the presence or absence of the number of holds at time tx.

In addition, in the above modified example, the right-handed image GS3 may be displayed from the start of the customer waiting state until the second special figure changes. That is, when the first special figure changes, the display of the right-handed image GS3 may be continued.

FIG. 66(c) is a diagram for explaining the display period of the image at the start in another modification. In the specific example of FIG. 66(c), it is assumed that the transition game ends at the time point tx and shifts to the second time-saving game state. Also, in the above specific example, it is assumed that the number of reservations at time tx is zero. As shown in FIG. 66(c), in the modification, a shielding image GF is displayed in the transition game, and then a rushing image GT is displayed. Further, when the transition game ends and the customer waiting state starts, a right-handed image GS3 is displayed.

In addition, at the start time tx of the second time-saving gaming state, if the number of reservations is 1 or more, a customer waiting state is provided from the end of the transition game to the start of the first game of the second time-saving gaming state. do not have. In the above case, there is an inconvenience that the right shot image GS3 cannot be displayed. Considering the above circumstances, in the modification, if the number of reservations is 1 or more at the start time tx of the second time-saving gaming state, the reservation is invalidated (set the number of reservations to 0). may be adopted. In the above configuration, the customer waiting state is always started when the second time-saving game state is started. Therefore, the above-mentioned inconvenience is suppressed. In addition, the configuration in which the number of reservations is set to 0 at the start of the second time-saving gaming state is not limited to the modification, and may be adopted in the first embodiment, the second embodiment, and other modifications.

As shown in FIG. 66(c), when the first game in the second time-saving game state is started, the right shot image GS3 is hidden. In addition, in the above modified example, the right-handed image GS3 may be displayed from the start of the customer waiting state until the second special figure changes. That is, when the first special figure changes, the display of the right-handed image GS3 may be continued.

Furthermore, the timing at which the start image is displayed is not limited to the above modifications. For example, the shielding image GF and the rushing image GT may be displayed in the transition game, and the right-handed image GS3 may be displayed in the first game in the second time-saving game state. Similarly, the shielding image GF is displayed in the transition game, after that, the right-handed image GS3 is displayed in the fixed period of the game or in the customer waiting state, and the entry image GT is displayed in the first game in the second time-saving game state. may be configured. The entry image GT may be displayed in the transition game, and then the blocking image GF and the right-handed image GS3 may be displayed during the determination period of the game or in the customer waiting state. The entry image GT may be displayed in the transition game, then the shield image GF may be displayed during the determination period of the game or in the customer waiting state, and the right-handed image GS3 may be displayed in the first game in the second time-saving game state. good.

The shielding image GF, the rushing image GT, and the right-handed image GS3 may be displayed during the finalization period of the transition game or in the customer waiting state. The blocking image GF and the right-handed image GS3 may be displayed during the finalization period of the transition game or in the customer waiting state, and the entry image GT may be displayed during the first game in the second time-saving game state. The shield image GF and the rush image GT may be displayed during the fixed period of the transition game or in the customer waiting state, and the right-handed image GS3 may be displayed during the first game in the second time-saving game state. The shield image GF may be displayed during the fixed period of the transition game or in the customer waiting state, and the entry image GT and the hitting right image GS3 may be displayed during the first game in the second time-saving game state. The entry image GT and the hitting right image GS3 may be displayed during the fixed period of the transition game or in the customer waiting state, and the shielding image GF may be displayed during the first game in the second time-saving game state.

The right-handed image GS3 may be displayed during the fixed period of the transition game or in the customer waiting state, and the entry image GT and the shielding image GF may be displayed during the first game in the second time-saving game state. The entry image GT may be displayed during the fixed period of the transition game or in the customer waiting state, and the right-handed image GS3 and the blocking image GF may be displayed in the first game in the second time-saving game state. Furthermore, in each of the above modifications, the display order of the image at the start displayed in the transition game, the display order of the image at the start displayed in the confirmation period of the transition game or in the customer waiting state, and in the game in the second time saving game state The display order of the start-time images to be displayed may be changed as appropriate.

In the above modified example, two or more starting images may be displayed side by side. In addition, in the configuration in which the shielding image GF is displayed in the customer waiting state, it is preferable that the shielding image GF is displayed during the customer waiting state, and the shielding image GF is not displayed when the second special figure starts to fluctuate. be.

(18) In each of the above-described forms, a configuration is adopted in which the display of all the start images (GF, GT, GS3) is completed by the time the first game in the second time-saving game state ends. However, the image at the start may be displayed until the second and subsequent games in the second time-saving game state. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the time for which the start image is displayed is predetermined, and the game can be played a plurality of times before the time elapses.

(19) In each of the above-described forms, in the game at the start of the second time-saving game state (transition game, the first game of the second time-saving game state), the start image (shielding image GF, rush image GT and right-handed image GS3 (part or all of GS3) was displayed, and then the performance symbol GA was stop-displayed. Specifically, in the game at the start of the second time-saving game state (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "game at start"), if the result of the big hit lottery is a loss, the image at the start is displayed and then lost. The production pattern GA corresponding to is stopped and displayed.

Assuming that the jackpot game is won in the starting game, the starting image (part or all) that is originally displayed in the starting game is not displayed. With the above configuration, there may be a problem that whether or not the big winning lottery in the start game is successful can be detected by the presence or absence of the display of the start image. In consideration of the above circumstances, the modified example employs a configuration in which the image at the start can be displayed regardless of the result of the jackpot lottery in the game at the start.

For example, a case is assumed in which the modified example is adopted in the above-described first embodiment. In the first embodiment, in the start game (the first game in the second time-saving game state), the screen M1 is displayed, then the shielding image GF is displayed, and the rush effect is executed (the rush image GT is displayed). , a mode selection effect is executed, and a right-handed shot image GS3 is displayed (see FIGS. 18(a) and 18(b)). Further, after the right shot image GS3 is displayed, the screen is switched to the second time saving game state screen M7 (see FIG. 17(a)), and the effect image GA is stopped and displayed. Specifically, when the result of the big win lottery is a loss, the performance symbol GA corresponding to the loss is stopped and displayed.

In this modification, in the first embodiment described above, the screen M1 is displayed regardless of the result of the jackpot lottery at the start of the game. Execution is executed, and a right hitting image GS3 is displayed. If the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, then the performance symbol GA corresponding to the loss is stopped and displayed (similar to the first embodiment). In addition, in this modified example, when a jackpot game is won in the starting game, the effect symbol GA corresponding to the jackpot is stopped and displayed after the right hitting image GS3 is displayed. For example, when switching to the screen M7 during time saving after the right shot image GS3 is displayed, the effect movable body 32 moves to the appearance position. Thereafter, when the performance movable body 32 moves to the retracted position, the performance symbol GA corresponding to the big hit is stopped and displayed. That is, when a big win is won in the game at the start, the performance symbols GA corresponding to the big win are stop-displayed at once without intervention of the ready-to-win performance. However, in the start game, after a series of start images are displayed, after executing an effect (reach effect, etc.) that can be executed in other time-saving mode B games, similar to other time-saving mode B games , a configuration in which a big hit is reported.

In the modified example described above, the predetermined start image is displayed regardless of the result of the big win lottery. Therefore, the result of the big win lottery is difficult to detect depending on whether or not the start image is displayed. In the game at the start, it is preferable that the ready-to-win effect is not executed regardless of the result of the jackpot lottery. Supposing that the ready-to-win effect is executed in the start game, the ready-to-win effect is started through the above-described entry effect and mode selection effect. Therefore, the inconvenience that the game at the start is excessively prolonged is assumed. The configuration in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed at the start of the game has the advantage of suppressing the above inconvenience. Alternatively, in the starting game, regardless of the result of the jackpot lottery, the ready-to-win effect may be executed at a lower probability than other games in the time saving mode B. However, in the modification, there may be a case where the starting image is not displayed in the game at the start of winning the jackpot lottery (for example, when the premium effect is won).

Further, in the game at the start of winning the big hit, a part of the image at the start displayed in the game at the start of the loss may be displayed and the other part may not be displayed. For example, in the game at the start of losing, assume a configuration in which the shield image GF, the rush image GT, and the right-handed image GS3 are displayed in this order. In the above configuration, it is conceivable that the shield image GF is displayed in the same manner as in the losing start game, and the entry image GT and the right shot image GS3 are not displayed in the game at the start of winning the big win.

(20) In each of the above-described forms, the numbers in the number-of-remaining-numbers image GN are subtracted and displayed in each game. In the above configuration, in a game in which a big win is won, the subtraction display of the number of remaining times image GN may be omitted as the number of remaining times N is not subtracted. Similarly, in a game in which a big hit is won, the remaining number of times M of the time saving game state is not subtracted, so that the subtraction display of the number of the time saving remaining image GJ may be omitted.

However, in the case where the above configuration is adopted, in the configuration in which the number of the remaining number of times image GN is subtracted and displayed immediately after the game is started, the result of the jackpot lottery can be detected by the presence or absence of the subtraction display immediately after the game is started. Inconvenience may occur. Specifically, immediately after the start of the game, the number of the remaining number of times image GN is subtracted for the game in which the big win is won, and the number of the remaining number of times image GN is not displayed by subtraction for the losing game. At that point, you will know that you have won the jackpot. In consideration of the above circumstances, it is preferable to display the numbers of the remaining number of times image GN in a subtracted manner regardless of the result of the jackpot lottery (regardless of whether the remaining number of times N is subtracted or not). Similarly, regardless of the result of the jackpot lottery (regardless of whether the remaining number of times M is subtracted or not), the configuration in which the number of the time saving remaining image GJ is subtracted and displayed is preferable.

(21) In each of the above embodiments, one type of music corresponding to time saving mode A may be provided, or a plurality of types may be provided. Also, one type of music corresponding to the time saving mode B may be provided, or a plurality of types may be provided. For example, in the first embodiment, in the time saving mode B in the first time saving game state and the time saving mode B in the second time saving game state, a common song may be played, or different songs may be played. may In addition, the time saving mode A in the first time saving game state and the time saving mode B in the second time saving game state may have a common configuration or a different configuration.

(22) In each of the above-described forms, in the time saving mode A of the first time saving game state, the variation pattern determination table Ta1 is referred to in the early game, and the variation pattern determination table Ta2 is referred to in the final game. In the above configuration, when the power is turned off in the time saving mode A, it is preferable to have a common configuration for images that can be displayed at the time of restoration regardless of the fluctuation pattern determination table (Ta1, Ta2). In the second time-saving game state, even if a configuration is adopted in which the variation pattern determination table T is switched between the beginning and the end of the game, the power is turned off at the beginning of the second time-saving game state, and the power is turned off at the end of the second time-saving game state. A configuration in which the image that can be displayed at the time of recovery is common in both cases is preferable.

(23) In each form described above, the table scenario S may be changed when a small prize is won.

(24) In each of the above-described forms, the remaining number of times N until the second time-saving gaming state may be configured so that the manager of the gaming machine 1 can check it at any time. For example, in the first embodiment described above, the remaining number of times N is kept secret during the period in which the gaming machine 1 can execute a game immediately after the power is turned on. In the above configuration, information for specifying the current value of the remaining number of times N (hereinafter referred to as "remaining number of times information") is displayed by operating an operation unit provided at a position where the player cannot operate. may be adopted. For example, the main control board 110 can be considered as a position for providing the above-described operation unit. In the above configuration, for example, a configuration in which the remaining number of times information is displayed on the base display 114 and/or the image display device 21 can be adopted. Further, as a position for providing the operation unit, for example, the effect control board 120 can be considered. In the above configuration, for example, a configuration in which the remaining number of times information is displayed on the image display device 21 may be adopted.

Further, as the operation unit described above, a new dedicated operation unit may be employed, or an existing operation unit may be employed. For example, the clear button 30 may be adopted as the operation unit. In the above configuration, when the clear button 30 is operated during a period other than the period in which the clear operation can be accepted, the remaining number of times information is displayed. Further, it may be configured such that the remaining number of times information is displayed according to the operation of the cross key 40 and the effect button 8 . In the above configuration, when the cross key 40 or the effect button 8 is operated in a predetermined manner during a period in which the operation of the cross key 40 and the effect button 8 by the player is invalid (for example, the period immediately after the power is turned on), the remaining A configuration in which the number of times information is displayed is conceivable. As with the remaining count information, it may be configured such that the administrator of the gaming machine can confirm at any time whether or not the activated period has expired. In addition, both the remaining number of times information and whether or not the activated period has expired may be configured so that the administrator of the gaming machine can confirm at any time.

(25) In each form described above, the opening mode of the second starting port 14 in each time-saving gaming state can be appropriately changed. For example, the opening mode of the second starting port 14 in the second time-saving gaming state may be made more disadvantageous than the opening mode of the second starting port 14 in the first time-saving gaming state. Specifically, the opening mode of the second starting port 14 in the first time-saving gaming state is more advantageous than the non-time-saving gaming state, while the opening mode of the second starting port 14 in the second time-saving gaming state is the non-time-saving game The configuration may be substantially the same (slightly advantageous) as the state.

As a specific example of the above modification, for example, a jackpot pattern A and a jackpot pattern B are provided, and after the jackpot game started with the jackpot pattern A stopped and displayed, the game state is low probability, and the jackpot pattern B is stopped. After the end of the big hit started, it shifts to a high probability game state of 30 times (so-called "ST machine"). The probability of winning a big hit is about 1/300 in the low-probability game state and about 1/100 in the high-probability game state.

Further, when the jackpot pattern A is stop-displayed in the time saving game state (the first time saving game state or the second time saving game state), it shifts to the time saving game state 30 times after the big win game ends. The above 30 time-saving game states are low-probability game states. On the other hand, when the jackpot symbol B is stop-displayed in the time-saving game state, the game shifts to the time-saving game state for 60 times after the jackpot game ends. Among the above 60 time-saving game states, 30 times in the first half are high-probability game states, and 30 times in the latter half are low-probability game states. That is, when a jackpot is won in the time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state ends after the low-probability non-time-saving game state is executed up to 30 times regardless of the type of the big-win pattern.

However, when the jackpot pattern A is stop-displayed in the non-time-saving game state, the state shifts to the time-saving game state of 1000 times after the jackpot ends. Further, even when the big hit symbol B is stopped and displayed in the non-time-saving game state, the state is shifted to the time-saving game state of 1000 times after the big win is finished. Further, when the jackpot pattern is stop-displayed in the time-saving game state of 1000 times, regardless of the type of the jackpot pattern, the state of the time-saving game is shifted to the time-saving game state of 1000 times again after the jackpot game ends. The opening mode of the second starting port 14 in the first time-saving game state is more advantageous than the non-time-saving game state.

In addition, the initial value of the remaining number N of the second time-saving game state is a numerical value "30", and when 30 times of games (losing) are executed in the low-probability game state, the state then shifts to the second time-saving game state. . The opening mode of the second starting port 14 in the second time-saving gaming state is substantially common to the opening mode of the second starting port 14 in the non-time-saving gaming state. In addition, the second time-saving game state continues until a maximum of 500 games are executed, and then shifts to a non-time-saving game state.

In the above modification, 500 times of the second time-saving game state is started immediately after the 30 times of the low probability non-time-saving game state (first time-saving game state) ends. However, if a jackpot is won in the above time-saving game state, it is not possible to shift to the time-saving game state for 1000 times. Therefore, the player does not win the jackpot until the second time-saving game state is completed and the state is shifted to the low-probability non-time-saving game state (until the game is completed 530 times after the state is shifted to the low-probability game state). play for the purpose of

However, in the modification, in the jackpot lottery of the non-time-saving game state, there is a case where the "third time-saving" is elected. The winning probability of the third short time is, for example, about 1/300. When the third time saving is won, the time saving pattern is stop-displayed in the special figure, and the game state shifts to the third time saving game state. However, when the time saving pattern is stop-displayed in the time saving game state, the third time saving is not started. Like the second time-saving game state, the third time-saving game state continues over a maximum of 500 games, and the opening mode of the second starting port 14 is substantially common to the non-time-saving game state. Also, when a big win is won in the third time-saving game state, the state is shifted to the first time-saving game state of 30 times or 60 times in the same manner as when a big win is won in other time-saving game states. In the above configuration, in the non-time-saving game state, the player plays the game for the purpose of winning the jackpot before the third time-saving game.

According to the above modified example, it is possible to provide the player with new playability. It should be noted that a plurality of types of time-saving symbols may be provided, and the number of games in the third time-saving game state may be changed according to the types of time-saving symbols.

(26) In each of the above-described forms, the screen that can be displayed during the game period (for example, the screen shown in FIG. 23(b)) is displayed immediately after the restoration screen is displayed when power is restored. However, in the case of the customer waiting state immediately after the restoration screen is displayed, a screen (such as a demo screen) that is displayed only in the customer waiting state may be displayed.

(27) In each of the above-described modes, the configuration may be such that the customer waiting screen can be displayed even in the time-saving gaming state. However, it is preferable that the installation notification image GK is not displayed on the customer waiting screen in the time-saving game state.

(28) In each of the above-described modes, the average fluctuation time of the special figure may be shorter in the immediately preceding mode than in the normal mode. Specifically, in the case of a loss in the jackpot lottery, the average time of the variation pattern of the game in which the variation pattern determination table Tn2 (immediate mode) is referred to is shorter than the game in which the variation pattern determination table Tn1 (normal mode) is referred to. Configuration is preferred. In the above configuration, when the normal mode is shifted to the previous mode, the average time of each game is shortened. That is, the average time of each game is shortened in the period immediately before the start of the second time-saving gaming state.

For example, assume a contrast in which the average fluctuation time of the special figure does not change between the normal mode and the immediately preceding mode. In the above comparison, the immediately preceding mode may be prolonged depending on the determined variation pattern. In the above case, the player who wants to start the second time-saving gaming state early may feel stress. In the above-mentioned modification, since the average fluctuation time of the special figure in the immediately preceding mode is shorter than in the normal mode, there is an advantage that the above disadvantages can be suppressed, for example, compared to the comparison.

(29) In each form described above, the execution frequency of each effect in the normal mode and the previous mode can be changed as appropriate. By the way, some players may wish to shift to the second time-saving gaming state rather than winning the jackpot in the immediately preceding mode. The players described above may feel annoyed by the performance with a high degree of expectation for a big win (hereinafter referred to as "high expectation level performance") in the immediately preceding mode. That is, there arises a problem that the high-expectation effect, which is originally expected by the player, feels troublesome.

In consideration of the above circumstances, in a game in which a big hit lottery is lost, a configuration may be adopted in which the high expectation level performance is less likely to be executed in the immediately preceding mode than in the normal mode. For example, a configuration is assumed in which a mini-game effect in which the effect button 8 is instructed to be operated in a predetermined manner is provided as a high-expectation effect. In the above configuration, a configuration may be adopted in which the mini-game effect is less likely to be selected in the immediately preceding mode than in the normal mode in a game in which the winning lottery is lost. According to the modification, the above-described inconvenience is suppressed. However, a configuration may be adopted in which high-expectation-level effects other than the mini-game effects are less likely to be selected in the immediately preceding mode.

(30) In each of the above-described forms, a first jackpot game with a first number of rounds (for example, 10 rounds) and a second jackpot game with a second number of rounds (for example, 4 rounds) smaller than the first number of rounds It is also possible to provide a configuration in which the degree of expectation for winning the first big hit game is suggested by the variation pattern. For example, in the second time-saving game state, in the game in which the first jackpot game is won, the immediate hit effect is less likely to be executed than in the game in which the second jackpot game is won.

(31) In each of the above-described forms, a configuration may be adopted in which the type of time-saving gaming state is appropriately notified. For example, the background image GH may be changed in each time-saving game state. Also, in each time-saving game state, the BGM may be different, or the effect symbol GA may be different. The timing at which the type of the time-saving gaming state is notified can be appropriately set. For example, when each time-saving gaming state is started, a configuration in which the type of time-saving gaming state is notified can be considered.

As a specific example of the modification, the small symbol Ga may be displayed in the time saving rush effect even when any time saving game state is started. In the above configuration, the small pattern Ga corresponding to the big hit pattern is displayed in the time saving rush effect when the first time saving game state is started. In addition, in the time saving rush effect when the second time saving game state is started, a small pattern Ga corresponding to the lost pattern is displayed, and in the time saving rush effect when the third time saving game state is started, it corresponds to the time saving pattern. A small symbol Ga is displayed. Therefore, the player has the advantage of being able to grasp the type of time-saving gaming state to be started from the small symbols Ga displayed in the time-saving rush effect.

(32) In each of the above-described forms, in the time-saving rush effect in the second time-saving game state, the performance symbol GA is hidden, the small symbol Ga, the pending image GB, and the fourth symbol GC are displayed, and the rush image GT is displayed. may be displayed. In the above configuration, there is an advantage that the visibility of the entry image GT is improved and the time reduction rush effect in the first time reduction game state and the time reduction rush effect in the second time reduction game state are easily distinguished. In addition, it is sufficient if it is possible to distinguish between the time saving rush effect of the first time saving game state and the time saving rush effect of the second time saving game state, and the image displayed in the time saving rush effect of the second time saving game state is the effect image GA, small Any of the symbol Ga, the reserved image GB, and the fourth symbol GC may be used, and at least one of the symbols may be displayed. Similarly, in the time-saving rush production in the third time-saving game state, the performance symbol GA may be hidden, the small symbol Ga, the reserved image GB, and the fourth symbol GC may be displayed, and then the rush image GT may be displayed.

(33) In each form described above, the result image GP may be displayed when the second time-saving gaming state ends. The above configuration has the advantage that it is easier for the player to recognize that the second time-saving gaming state has ended, compared to the configuration in which the result image GP is not displayed when the second time-saving gaming state ends. Similarly, the result image GP may be displayed when the third time-saving gaming state ends. The above configuration has the advantage that it is easier for the player to recognize that the third time-saving game state has ended, compared to the configuration in which the result image GP is not displayed when the third time-saving game state ends.

(34) In each of the above-described forms, in the gaming state in which the time-saving design is effective (low-probability non-time-saving gaming state), when the time-saving design is stopped, a special production design GA (hereinafter "time-saving production design") is stopped and displayed. is preferable. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the time saving pattern is invalid, it is preferable to stop and display the performance pattern GA corresponding to the loss when the time saving pattern is stopped.

However, in a game state in which the time saving design is invalid, when the time saving design is stop-displayed, the time-saving performance design may be stop-displayed. In the above configuration, it is preferable that the time-saving performance symbols that are stop-displayed in the game state in which the time-saving patterns are invalid and the time-saving performance symbols that are stop-displayed in the game state in which the time-saving patterns are valid are different.

(35) The symbol combination corresponding to the time-saving symbol is not limited to the above examples. For example, assume a configuration in which a "special symbol" different from the numbers "1 to 9" is included in the production symbol GA. In the above configuration, for example, "7, special symbol, 7" may be adopted as the symbol combination corresponding to the time-saving symbol.

In the above modified example, it is preferable to stop and display the special symbol last among the three symbols. Also, as the special symbol, a symbol that displays a character (for example, a character string "time saving") indicating that the game is to be shifted to the time saving game state is preferably adopted. Furthermore, it is preferable that the special symbol is not included in any combination other than the symbol combination corresponding to the time-saving symbol.

In the above modified example, during the period in which the ready-to-win performance is not executed, the special symbols are not included in the performance symbols GA to be variably displayed, and in the period after the ready-to-win performance is executed, the special symbols may be displayed. In the above configuration, in a game in which the time-saving symbols are not stopped and displayed, the special symbols may be changed and displayed. With the above configuration, even in a game in which the time-saving patterns are not stop-displayed, it is possible to improve the degree of expectation that the time-saving patterns are stop-displayed. All of the above configurations may be adopted, or a part thereof may be adopted.

(36) In each form described above, in the game that shifts to the second time-saving game state (the final game of the low-probability non-time-saving game state), the normal effect symbol GA corresponding to the loss is displayed. Instead of the above configuration, in the game to shift to the second time-saving game state, it may be configured to display a special effect symbol GA. For example, a configuration is conceivable in which the performance symbol GA displaying the characters "Time saving game start!" However, the special production pattern GA displayed in the game that transitions to the second time-saving gaming state is the production pattern GA corresponding to the time-saving design, the production design GA corresponding to the big hit design, and the production design GA corresponding to the small winning design. Distinct (different) configurations are preferred.

(37) In each of the above modes, the period during which the result image GP is displayed can be changed as appropriate. For example, when the final game of the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state, third time-saving game state) ends, the result image GP starts to be displayed, and then the second pending number becomes 0. After the subtraction is performed and the variable display of the second special symbol display device 21 is stopped, the result image GP may be hidden. That is, in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, the result image GP may be continuously displayed until the first special symbol display device 20 can start the first variable display.

(38) In each of the above-described modes, the configuration may be such that no restriction period is provided before transitioning to the second time-saving gaming state. In the above configuration, the determination information acquired when the game ball wins to the first start port 13 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "first determination information") is withheld in the second time-saving gaming state (second Even if it can be determined in the two-hour-saving game state), the suspension change effect based on the first determination information is executed in the non-time-saving game state.

However, in the configuration in which the fact that the right to win the jackpot is held continues to be reported in the second time-saving gaming state, the player's gambling spirit may be excessively aroused. Therefore, in a configuration in which no restriction period is provided before shifting to the second time-saving game state, a configuration in which the pending change effect in the pending image GB is canceled when shifting to the second time-saving game state is preferable. In the above configuration, the hold image GB displayed in the special mode in the non-time-saving game state is displayed in the normal mode in the second time-saving game state. In addition, you may employ|adopt the structure which displays the holding|maintenance image GB currently displayed in the special mode in the 3rd time-saving game state in the normal mode in the 3rd time-saving game state just before shifting to the 3rd time-saving game state.

(39) In each of the above-described forms, a configuration may be provided in which a restricted period is provided before transitioning to the third time-saving gaming state. Specifically, it is conceivable that the period from when it is determined in the preliminary determination that the game is won in the third time saving to when the game state moves to the third time saving gaming state is set as a limit period.

(40) In the above-described embodiment, when shifting to the second time-saving gaming state, regardless of whether the first game of the second time-saving gaming state is executed (regardless of the number of reservations) right-handed A starting image GR was displayed. In addition, regardless of whether or not the first game in the second time-saving game state is executed, a sound instructing to start the right-handed game is output, and the BGM of the second time-saving game state is output.

Instead of the above configuration, on the condition that the first game in the second time-saving game state is executed, a right-handed start image GR is displayed, and a sound instructing to start a right-handed game is output. A configuration in which BGM in the second time-saving gaming state is output may be employed. Further, on the condition that the first game in the third time-saving gaming state is executed, the right-handing start image GR is displayed, and a voice instructing to start the right-handing game is output, and the third time-saving gaming state is performed. BGM may be output.

(41) In the above-described embodiment, when transitioning from the second time-saving gaming state to the low probability non-time-saving gaming state, regardless of whether the first game in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state is executed (holding number The left-handed start image GL was displayed regardless of the presence or absence of . In addition, regardless of whether or not the first game in the low-probability non-time-saving game state is executed, a sound instructing to start the left-handed game is output.

Instead of the above configuration, on the condition that the first game in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state is executed, a left-handed start image GL is displayed, and a voice instructing to start a left-handed game is output. It may be configured to be Further, when shifting from the third time-saving gaming state to the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, on the condition that the first game in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state is executed, the left-handed start image GL is displayed, and the left-handed game is played. A configuration may be adopted in which a voice instructing to start is outputted.

(42) In each of the above-described forms, in addition to the opportunity of winning a big hit in the big win lottery, it may be configured such that a big win game can be executed (so-called, one type and two types of games) when a game ball passes through a specific area. machine). In the above specific areas, game balls can be won in small winning games. That is, when the small winning game is won and the game ball enters the specific area in the small winning game, the big winning game is executed. In the above modified example, the accumulation number m is not initialized when the small hit is won, but the accumulation number m is initialized when the game ball enters the specific area.

In the above modified example, the winning probability of the big hit is when the high probability game state is not provided and when the game ball wins in the first start port 13 and when the game ball wins in the second start port 14 Common. Also, the probability of winning a small win when a game ball enters the second starting port 14 is higher than the probability of winning a big win. Furthermore, in the time-saving game state, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the second starting port 14.例文帳に追加In the above configuration, the jackpot game is more likely to be executed in the time-saving game state than in the non-time-saving game state.

In the modification, a second time-saving gaming state may be provided. In the above configuration, when the cumulative number of times m reaches the number of times of actuation n, the game shifts to a high-probability state of a big hit game. Moreover, in the said modification, you may provide a 3rd time saving game state. In the above configuration, when the time-saving design stops, it shifts to a high-probability state of the jackpot game substantially.

(43) In each of the above-described forms, the number of times N3 of time saving in the third time saving game state may be changed according to the game state in which the time saving design is stop-displayed. For example, when the time saving pattern is stop-displayed in the time-saving game state, the time-saving number N3 may be longer than when the time-saving pattern is stop-displayed in the non-time-saving game state. Further, when the time saving pattern is stop-displayed in the time-saving game state, the number of times of time-saving N3 may be smaller than when the time-saving pattern is stop-displayed in the non-time-saving game state.

(44) In each form described above, the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbols in the time-saving gaming state can be appropriately changed. For example, the variation patterns between the first time-saving gaming state and the second time-saving gaming state may be different. In addition, the variation patterns between the first time-saving gaming state and the third time-saving gaming state may be different, and the variation patterns between the second time-saving gaming state and the third time-saving gaming state may be different.

(45) In each of the above-described forms, when the cumulative number of times m reaches the number of operations n in the third time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state is activated, it may be configured to notify that effect. Temporarily, when the second time-saving game state is activated in the third time-saving game state, in the configuration in which the opening state of the second start port 14 does not change, there is an inconvenience that the player does not know that the second time-saving game state has been activated. is assumed. According to the modification, the above inconvenience is suppressed. For example, in the third time-saving gaming state, by displaying the cumulative number of times m, the presence or absence of transition to the second time-saving gaming state is substantially notified. It should be noted that the fact that the second time-saving gaming state has been activated is notified at an appropriate timing. For example, when the third time-saving gaming state ends, it may be configured to notify that the second time-saving gaming state was operating.

(46) In each of the above-described forms, the opening mode of the second starting port 14 in the third time-saving gaming state may be different for each time-saving design. In the above configuration, compared to the configuration in which the opening mode of the second starting port 14 in the third time-saving game state does not change according to the time-saving pattern, the game is more interesting.

(47) In each of the above-described forms, the pending change effect is shown as an example of the specific effect, but the specific effect is not limited to the pending change effect. For example, a specific effect may be adopted in which a predetermined lamp in the gaming machine 1 emits light in a specific manner. Also, a specific effect in which a special image is displayed on the image display device 31 may be employed. For example, as the specific effect, a effect of displaying a character image of "extreme heat zone" can be considered. With the above configuration, the character image "Super Heat Zone" is more likely to be displayed when a big hit is determined in advance than when a loss is determined in advance.

(48) In each of the above-described forms, the pending change effect (specific effect) that can be determined may be different between when the result of the preliminary determination is a big hit and when the result of the preliminary determination is the third time reduction. For example, when the result of prior determination is a big hit and when the result of prior determination is the third time reduction, the final special mode of the pending image GB that can be determined may be different. As the above configuration, if the result of the prior determination is a big hit, the pending image GB may change to a rainbow color, but if the result of the prior determination is the third time reduction, the pending image GB is configured not to change to a rainbow color. Conceivable.

(49) In each of the above-described forms, the time during which the right hitting start image GR is displayed can be changed as appropriate. Moreover, the time during which the right-handed start image GR is displayed may be changed for each time-saving game state. For example, in the above-described first embodiment, it is preferable that the right-handed start image GR is displayed for a long period of time in the second time-saving game state from the first time-saving game state. Further, it is preferable that the right-handed start image GR is displayed for a long period of time in the third time-saving game state from the first time-saving game state. In the above configuration, the right hitting start image GR may be different between the first time-saving game state and the other time-saving game state. In addition, when the first time-saving game state starts, the right-hand hitting start image GR may not be displayed.

(50) The time-saving game state of each form described above ends when the total number of times the first special symbol display device 20 variably displays and the number of times the second special symbol display 21 variably displays reaches the time-saving number of times N. . However, the timing for ending the time-saving gaming state is not limited to the example of the first embodiment. For example, when the total number of times the first special symbol display device 20 variably displays and the number of times the second special symbol display device 21 variably displays reaches 50 times, the number of times the second special symbol display device 21 variably displays The time-saving game state may be terminated at the first opportunity of the opportunity of reaching five times and the opportunity of winning one small win.

Moreover, it is good also as a structure which an end opportunity differs for every time-saving game state. For example, the first time-saving gaming state is the moment when the total number of times the first special symbol display device 20 variably displays and the second special symbol display device 21 variably displays reaches 50 times, and the second special symbol display. The game ends at the first opportunity of the opportunity that the number of times the device 21 performs the variable display reaches 5 and the opportunity that the small win is won once. In addition, the second time-saving game state is triggered when the total number of times the first special symbol display device 20 variably displays and the second special symbol display device 21 variably displays reaches 500 times, and the second special symbol display. The game ends at the first opportunity of the opportunity that the number of times the device 21 performs the variable display reaches 20 and the opportunity that the small win is won four times. Furthermore, the third time-saving gaming state is the second special symbol display when the total number of times the first special symbol display device 20 variably displays and the second special symbol display 21 variably displays reaches 30 times. A configuration is conceivable in which the game ends at the first opportunity of the opportunity when the number of times the device 21 performs the variable display reaches six times and the opportunity when the small win is won three times.

(51) In each form described above, the effect mode (background image GH, BGM, and effect that can be determined) in each time-saving game state can be changed as appropriate. For example, the production mode of the third time-saving game state may be varied according to the time-saving number of times N3 (100 times, 1000 times). In addition, in the third time-saving game state where the number of times of time reduction N3 is 1000 times, the production mode of the first 100 times is made common to the production mode of the third time-saving game state where the number of times of time reduction N3 is 100 times, and in the game after the 101st time A configuration in which the production mode changes is also possible. Furthermore, in the above configuration, a configuration in which the production mode of the first time-saving game state and the production mode of the third time-saving game state (production modes before and after changing) are different is preferable.

(52) In each of the above embodiments, the remaining number of times image GF displaying the remaining number of times M of the time saving game state may be omitted. In addition, the remaining number of times image GF is displayed in a part of the time saving game state (for example, the first time saving game state), and the remaining number of times image GF is not displayed in another part of the time saving game state (for example, the second time saving game state). may be Further, the remaining number of times image GF may not be displayed in the beginning of the time saving game state, and the remaining number of times image GF may be displayed in the second half of the time saving game state.

As a specific example of the above modification, the remaining number of times image GF is displayed in the first time saving game state and the third time saving game state, and the remaining number of times image GF is not displayed at the beginning of the second time saving game state, and the second time saving A configuration is conceivable in which the display of the remaining number of times image GF is started after the remaining number of times M2 in the gaming state is subtracted to a predetermined numerical value (for example, 100). In the above configuration, the configuration may be such that the remaining number of times image GF is not displayed even after the beginning of the second time-saving game state.

(53) In each form described above, the type of time-saving design can be changed as appropriate. For example, one or both of the time-saving pattern that shifts to the 3rd time-saving game state of 1000 times and the time-saving design that shifts to the 3rd time-saving game state of 100 times may be provided in a plurality of types. For example, when the first time-saving design is stop-displayed and when the second time-saving design is stop-displayed, a configuration can be considered in which the game state is shifted to the third time-saving game state 100 times.

(54) In each form described above, the production pattern GA corresponding to the time saving pattern may be different depending on the time saving pattern, or may be common in the time saving pattern. For example, when the time saving pattern that shifts to the 3rd time saving game state 1000 times is stopped and displayed, and when the time saving pattern that moves to the 3rd time saving game state 100 times is stopped and displayed The pattern GA may be common or may be different.

(55) In each form described above, the period during which the time-saving rush effect is executed is appropriately changed. For example, the fixed period when the time saving pattern is stop-displayed is extended from the normal fixed period. Specifically, the time of the fixed period when the time saving pattern is stop-displayed is extended to the same extent as the time of the ending period of the jackpot game.

In the above configuration, the time-saving rush effect may be executed in the case of shifting to the third time-saving game state during the determination period when the time-saving design is stop-displayed. Also, after the fixed period is over, it may be configured to shift to the third time-saving game state. Furthermore, in the configuration for executing the time-saving rush performance in the fixed period, when adopting the configuration to move to the third time-saving game state after the fixed period ends, the production pattern GA and the small pattern Ga are displayed during the fixed period. may or may not be displayed.

(56) In each of the above-described modes, the configuration may be such that the player can arbitrarily change (customize) the execution frequency of the specific effect. However, regardless of which execution frequency is changed, it is preferable that the execution frequency of the specific effect is less during the above-described limited period than during periods other than the limited period.

(57) In each of the above-described embodiments, the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21 may be configured so that the special symbols can be variably displayed at the same time (in parallel). In the above configuration, the first reserved number is digested regardless of the presence or absence of the variable display of the second special symbol display device 21, and the second reserved number is digested regardless of the presence or absence of the variable display of the first special symbol display device 20. be.

In the above configuration, as in the first embodiment described above, a configuration is assumed in which the cumulative number of times m is added when the special symbols are stopped. Also, it is assumed that the first special symbol display device 20 variably displays in the n-th game, and the second special symbol display device 21 variably displays in the n+1-th game. Furthermore, it is assumed that the n+1th game ends before the nth game (the variable display of the second special symbol display device 21 stops before the variable display of the first special symbol display device 20). In the above case, the accumulated number m is updated to the numerical value "n" at the end of the n+1th game. Therefore, it is preferable that the game state is shifted to the second time-saving game state at the end of the n+1-th game.

A configuration is assumed in which the cumulative number m is added at the start of the variable display of the special symbols. Also, it is assumed that the first special symbol display device 20 variably displays in the n-th game, and the second special symbol display device 21 variably displays in the n+1-th game. Furthermore, it is assumed that the n+1th game ends before the nth game (the variable display of the second special symbol display device 21 stops before the variable display of the first special symbol display device 20). In the above case, the cumulative number of times m is updated to the numerical value "n" at the start of the n-th game. Therefore, it is preferable that the game state is shifted to the second time-saving game state at the start of the n-th game.

(58) In each of the above-described modes, the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol in the n-th game may be different from the variation pattern in the other games. For example, when the variation pattern of the special symbol in the game of the n-th operation is determined, in the image display device 31, it is preferable to notify that the game is shifted to the second time-saving game state. In addition, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the fixed period of the special symbol is extended at the game of the n-th number of times of actuation from the game before the n-th number of times of actuation. In the above configuration, it is preferable that the time saving rush effect in the case of shifting to the second time saving game state is executed in the fixed period in the game of the n-th number of times of operation. Furthermore, after the extended fixed period ends, it may be configured to shift to the second time-saving gaming state.

However, the accumulated number m is initialized at the start of the jackpot game, and after that, when the n-th game is executed, the variation pattern of the special symbols in the game is changed, and a trigger other than the start of the jackpot game ( For example, the operation of the clear button 30) initializes the cumulative number m, and after that, when the n-th game is executed, the variation pattern in the game is not changed (not changed from the previous game). is. In addition, the cumulative number m is initialized at the start of the jackpot game, and thereafter, when the n-th game is executed, the fixed period in the game is extended, and a trigger other than the start of the jackpot game (for example, clear Operation of the button 30) initializes the cumulative number of times m, and after that, when the game of the n-th number of times of operation is executed, it is preferable that the fixed period in the game is not extended. In the above configuration, since the administrator of the gaming machine cannot arbitrarily change the variable time period and fixed period of the special symbols, the inconvenience of harming the fairness of the game is suppressed.

(59) In each of the above embodiments, as a specific example of ending the time-saving gaming state when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the configuration in which the time-saving gaming state ends before the fixed period ends has been described. However, in the configuration in which the time-saving game state ends when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the time-saving game state may end before the fixed period ends.

For example, in the above-described special symbol stop time process (FIG. 18), the time saving end determination process (S234 in the same figure) may be provided before step S233 for providing a fixed period. Specifically, a time saving end determination process may be provided between step S233 and the third time saving transition determination process (S232). In addition, the time saving end determination process may be provided between the third time saving transition determination process and the second time saving transition determination process (S231), or the time saving end determination process may be provided immediately before the second time saving transition determination process. good.

In addition, in the modification, the fixed period of the game in which the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state, third time-saving game state) ends is the longest when the opening and closing door 14b is controlled to the operation mode Db is preferred. In the above configuration, there is no case where the open/close door 14b is in the operating state Db at the time when the non-time-saving game state is started after the time-saving game state is finished. Therefore, in the non-time-saving gaming state, the situation in which the game ball wins the second starting port 14 is suppressed.

(60) In each of the above embodiments, the timing at which the cumulative count command is transmitted may be at the start of the game or at the end of the game. Further, the cumulative number command may be transmitted in all games, or the cumulative number command may be transmitted in some games (for example, every 100 games).

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, instead of the accumulated number command indicating the accumulated number m, a command indicating the remaining number of times “nm” up to the operation number n may be transmitted to the effect control board 120. Further, it may be configured such that neither the command indicating the remaining number of times up to the number of times of actuation n nor the cumulative number command is transmitted to the effect control board 120 . In the above configuration, the sub CPU 121 counts the number of times a command (for example, a symbol determination command) transmitted when the special symbol is stopped (when the cumulative number m is added) is received, so that the sub CPU 121 calculates the current value of the cumulative number m Alternatively, the remaining number of times up to the number of times of operation n can be notified.

(61) In the above-described form, immediately after the second time-saving gaming state ends, it may be configured to be able to shift to a dedicated effect mode (a mode in which a dedicated effect can be executed). In addition, in the above dedicated effect mode, a configuration in which dedicated BGM is output is preferable. Similarly, immediately after the third time-saving gaming state ends, it may be configured to be able to shift to a dedicated production mode (a mode in which a dedicated production can be executed). In addition, in the above dedicated effect mode, a configuration in which dedicated BGM is output is preferable. In addition, it is good also as a structure which transfers to a common special production mode after each time-saving game state is complete|finished.

(62) In each of the above-described forms, when the second time-saving gaming state ends and shifts to the low probability non-time-saving gaming state, even if the number of games in the low probability non-time-saving gaming state reaches the number of times n Do not shift to the time-saving game state. In the above configuration, in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state after the second time-saving gaming state is completed, it is preferable to notify that the second time-saving gaming state has already ended. Specifically, a configuration is conceivable in which the cumulative number of times m is displayed in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state after the second time-saving gaming state ends. When the displayed cumulative count m is greater than the numerical value "800", it is understood that the second time-saving gaming state has already ended.

(63) In each of the above-described forms, according to the result of the preliminary determination, a specific effect (such as a pending change effect) that notifies (suggests) in advance that the game state will shift to the second time-saving game state is not executed. However, it may be configured such that a specific effect is executed to notify (suggest) in advance that the game will be shifted to the second time-saving gaming state.

(64) In each of the above-described forms, the time-saving design may be effective in the time-saving gaming state. For example, it is assumed that the time-saving design is stop-displayed in the second time-saving game state. In the above case, both the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state may operate in parallel. However, in the time-saving game state after the time-saving design is stop-displayed in the second time-saving game state, it is preferable to maintain the open mode of the open/close door 14b in the second time-saving game state.

(65) In each of the above-described forms, the second time-saving at the time when the special symbol stops during the period after the number of times that the number of times the jackpot lottery in the low-probability game state has been determined to have not won the jackpot reaches the number of times n of operations Moved to game state. However, the timing of shifting to the second time-saving game state can be appropriately changed within a period after the number of times of non-winning of the big win in the jackpot lottery in the low-probability game state reaches the number of operations n.

For example, the number of times (cumulative number of times m) that the big win is determined not to be won may be updated (added or subtracted) immediately after the big win lottery (immediately after the start of the game). In the above configuration, it is possible to shift to the second time-saving game state immediately after the start of the game. When adopting a configuration that shifts to the second time-saving game state immediately after the start of the game, it is preferable that the right-handed lamp 28 is lit immediately after the start of the game, and the above-described advantageous period signal (external information signal) is turned on. is. In the above configuration, the above-described non-counting period is started when the game is shifted to the second time-saving game state immediately after the start of the game.

In the above modified example, it is preferable that the above-described time-saving rush effect is executed when the second time-saving game state is entered immediately after the start of the game. In addition, when the game shifts to the second time-saving game state immediately after the start of the game, an image (for example, the above-mentioned right-handed image Gsy) notifying that the game should be played with the right hand is started to be displayed, and the background image of the time-saving game state. A configuration for switching to GH is preferable. In addition, in the above-described first embodiment, the transition to the second time-saving game state before the end of the fixed period of the special symbol, but may be configured to shift to the second time-saving game state after the end of the fixed period.

(66) In each of the above-described embodiments, the configuration in which the remaining number of times M in the time-saving game state is subtracted at the end of the game is adopted, but the configuration may be such that the remaining number of times M is subtracted at the start of the game. In the above configuration, the time-saving game state ends at the start of the game. For example, the second time-saving game state ends immediately after the 1000th game is started. In the above case, when the 1000th game is started in the second time-saving game state, the right-handed lamp 28 is extinguished, and the counting period described above is started.

(67) In each form described above, a game state of a high probability game state and a non-time-saving game state (high-probability non-time-saving game state) may be provided. However, in the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state, the time-saving design is invalid. That is, the time-saving design is effective only in the low-probability gaming state. Also, in the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state, the cumulative number m is not added (maintained at the initial value "0").

(68) In each form described above, a plurality of types of setting values (eg, 1 to 6) are provided, and the probability of being determined to be a big hit in a jackpot lottery (eg, the probability of winning a jackpot in a low-probability gaming state) is the set value. You may employ|adopt the structure which changes according to. However, with each set value, the probability of winning the third short time is common. Moreover, the probability of winning a small hit is common for each set value. The above set values are changed by setting change processing executed in response to setting change operations by the manager of the gaming machine 1 .

In the above modified examples, the number of times n of operation in which the second time-saving game state operates is common to each set value. Specifically, when the probability of winning a big hit in the low probability gaming state is set to "ML" (0<M<1), the number of times n of operation is in the range "2.5/ML ≤ n ≤ 3.0/ML" is preferred.

In the above modification, the number of games in the time-saving game state (hereinafter referred to as the number of times of time-saving N) preferably has a common configuration for all set values. Specifically, the number of time reductions N1 in the first time reduction game state is common for all set values, the number of time reductions N2 in the second time reduction game state is common for all set values, and the time reduction in the third time reduction game state A configuration in which the number of times N3 is common to all set values is preferable. Furthermore, when the minimum jackpot probability among the jackpot probabilities “ML” in the low-probability gaming state of each setting value is “MLmim” (jackpot probability of set value “1”), the number of times of saving time N2 is numerical value “3. 8/MLmin" or less, and the number of times of reduction in working hours N3 is preferably configured to have a numerical value of "3.8/MLmin" or less.

(69) In each of the above-described embodiments, the configuration is such that the cumulative count m is not initialized in the set value change processing by setting value change and the clear operation time processing by operating the clear button 30, and a dedicated operation unit (hereinafter referred to as “accumulated clear The cumulative number m may be initialized when the button for use") is operated.

(70) In each of the above embodiments, the cumulative number m may not be initialized in the clearing operation process, but the cumulative number m may be initialized in the setting value change process. Alternatively, the cumulative number m may not be initialized when the clear button 30 is operated in the normal mode, and the cumulative number m may be initialized when the clear button 30 is operated in the special mode. For example, when the clear button 30 is operated once, the predetermined information is initialized, but the accumulated count m is not initialized. are initialized.

(71) In each of the above modes, an effect suggesting a set value may be executed. For example, when the time-saving gaming state ends, a configuration is conceivable in which an effect suggesting a set value is executed. However, if the transition to the second time-saving game state is made among the time-saving game states and the big win is not won in the second time-saving game state, there is a high possibility that the winning probability of the big win is a low set value. Therefore, when the first time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state ends, an effect suggesting a set value is executed, and when the second time-saving game state ends, an effect suggesting a set value is not executed. is preferred.

(72) In the low-probability non-time-saving game state of each form described above, a plurality of types of production patterns GAx may be displayed according to the production mode in which the game is progressed and the background image GH. Similarly, in the low-probability time-saving gaming state or high-probability time-saving gaming state, a plurality of types of performance symbols GAy may be displayed according to the production mode in which the game is progressed or the background image GH.

Moreover, it is good also as displaying different production|presentation design GAy in each of 1st time saving game state, 2nd time saving game state, and 3rd time saving game state. Specifically, the production pattern GAy common to the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state is displayed, and in the third time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state are different production patterns GAy may be displayed. In addition, the production pattern GAy common to the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state is displayed, and the production pattern GAy different from the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state is displayed in the first time-saving game state. You can do it. Further, a performance pattern GAy common to the first time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state is displayed, and a performance pattern GAy different from the first time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state is displayed in the second time-saving game state. You can do it.

(73) In each of the above-described forms, the configuration when shifting to the second time-saving gaming state can be changed as appropriate. For example, it is assumed that the number of reservations when shifting to the second time-saving gaming state is a numerical value "0". That is, it is assumed that the customer waiting state (non-gaming state) is shifted to immediately after shifting to the second time-saving gaming state. In the modification, in the customer waiting state described above, the right-handed lamp 28 is lit and the right-handed image Gsy is displayed. Further, in the modified example, the emphasized image GZ showing the character string "0 more times" is displayed in the customer waiting state described above.

In the modification, when the first game in the second time-saving game state is started, the right-handed lamp 28 is continuously lit in the game, and the right-handed image Gsy is displayed. displayed continuously. However, in the modification, the emphasized image GZ is hidden in the first game in the second time-saving game state. Furthermore, in the modification, the time-reduction rush performance is not executed in the customer waiting state immediately after shifting to the second time-reduction game state, and then the time-reduction rush performance is executed in the first game of the second time-reduction game state.

On the other hand, if the number of reservations at the time of transition to the second time-saving gaming state is equal to or greater than the numerical value "1", in the modification, immediately after moving to the second time-saving gaming state (in the first game of the second time-saving gaming state ), the right hitting lamp 28 is lit, the right hitting image Gsy is displayed, the emphasized image GZ is hidden, and the time saving rush performance is executed. In addition, in the above modification, it is good also as a structure by which time saving rush production|presentation is performed in a customer waiting state. Further, the number-of-games image GE may be displayed throughout the customer-waiting state, and the number-of-games image GE may be hidden in the first game in the second time-saving gaming state.

(74) In each of the above-described embodiments, the magnitude relationship between the remaining number of times M1 in the first time-saving game state, the remaining number of times M2 in the second time-saving game state, and the remaining number of times M3 in the third time-saving game state can be changed as appropriate. For example, the remaining number of times M1 may be longer than the remaining number of times M2, or the remaining number of times M1 and the remaining number of times M2 may be equal. Alternatively, the remaining number of times M3 may be longer than the remaining number of times M2, or the remaining number of times M3 may be equal to the remaining number of times M2. Similarly, the remaining number of times M1 may be longer than the remaining number of times M3, the remaining number of times M1 may be equal to the remaining number of times M3, or the remaining number of times M3 may be longer than the remaining number of times M1.

(75) In the second embodiment described above, the "first information J1" was exemplified as the "first information relating to execution of the special game specified by prior determination" of the present invention. However, the "first information" of the present invention is not limited to the above examples. For example, the "winning information (start winning designation command) generated when the random number value for judging the special symbol for the jackpot" in the first embodiment is included in the "first information" of the present invention. Further, in the second embodiment described above, the "second information J2" is exemplified as the "second information relating to the transition to the second game state specified by prior determination" of the present invention. However, the "second information" of the present invention is not limited to the above examples. For example, when the random number value for determining the special symbol for losing is acquired by the cumulative number of times m, it becomes possible to shift to the second time-saving game state (second game state). Therefore, the "winning information (start winning designation command) generated when the random number value for determining the special symbol for losing" is included in the "second information" of the present invention.

In each of the above-described embodiments, a specific example in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko machine is shown, but the present invention may be applied to a pachislot machine.

The gaming machine of the present invention is, for example, the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes acquisition means (S139 in FIG. 30) that acquires determination information when the acquisition condition is established, and determination means ( S207 in FIG. 33), a symbol display means (special figure) that variably displays when the determination condition is satisfied and stops displaying the symbol according to the determination result, a special game execution means capable of executing a special game, and a first In the first game state, it is possible to determine the first mode as the operation mode of the movable accessory means that makes it easier to establish the acquisition condition when it is operated in the second mode than when it is operated in the second mode. , in the second game state, operating mode determination means capable of determining the second mode as the operating mode of the movable accessory means; a first start means (S188 in FIG. 32) capable of starting the second game state after the end of the special game; , after that, a second starting means (S244 in FIG. 35) capable of starting the second game state, and a screen display means capable of displaying a screen corresponding to the effect mode composed of various effect images. The average time length of the variable display when winning the special game is shorter in the second game state started by the second start means than in the second game state started by the first start means. The second game state started by the first starting means and the second game state started by the second starting means are different in advantage, and the screen display means displays the second game state started by the first starting means. When the state is started, it is possible to control to the first performance mode among the performance modes , and when the second game state is started by the second starting means, it is possible to control to the second performance mode different from the first performance mode. In the second game state started by the second starting means, when the power is restored after the power is cut off, the control can be performed in the first effect mode .

According to the above configuration, it is possible to start the second game state after the number of determinations, which is the number of times that the special game is determined to have not been won, reaches a predetermined specific number of times. Therefore, compared to the configuration in which the second game state is not started at this opportunity, the interest of the opportunity to start the second game state is improved. In addition, according to the present invention, the average time length of the variable display when winning the special game is compared with the second game state started by the first starting means, the second game state started by the second starting means. It tends to be short in the game state. Therefore, in the second game state started by the second starting means, there is an advantage that the time until the symbols for starting the special game are stopped and displayed can be easily shortened.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1... Game machine 10... Game board 13... First starting port 14... Second starting port 31... Image display device 110... Main control board 111... Main CPU 112... Main ROM 113... Main RAM , 120... Effect control board, 121... Sub CPU, 122... Sub ROM, 123... Sub RAM, 140... Lamp control board, 150... Image control board, 151... Host CPU, 152... Host RAM, 152... Host ROM.

Claims (1)

Acquisition means for acquiring determination information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Judgment means for judging whether a special game is successful or not based on the judgment information when the judgment condition is satisfied;
a pattern display means for variably displaying a pattern when the determination condition is established, and stopping and displaying a pattern according to the result of the determination;
special game executing means capable of executing the special game;
a movable accessory means that makes it easier to satisfy the acquisition condition when operated in the second mode than when operated in the first mode;
In the first game state, the first mode can be determined as the operation mode of the movable accessory means, and in the second game state, the second mode can be determined as the operation mode of the movable accessory means. a determining means;
role product control means for operating the movable role product means in the operating mode determined by the operating mode determining means when an operating condition is established;
a first starting means capable of starting the second game state after the special game is finished;
a second starting means capable of starting the second game state after the number of times the special game is determined to be non-winning reaches a predetermined specific number of times;
a screen display means capable of displaying a screen corresponding to an effect mode composed of various effect images,
The average time length of the variable display when the special game is won is compared with the second game state started by the first start means, and the second game state started by the second start means. tends to be short in
The second game state started by the first start means and the second game state started by the second start means have different degrees of advantage,
The screen display means is
When the second game state is started by the first starting means, it is possible to control to the first effect mode among the effect modes ,
When the second game state is started by the second starting means, it is controllable to a second effect mode different from the first effect mode,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when power is restored after a power failure occurs in the second game state started by the second starting means, the game machine can be controlled to the first effect mode .

Images